Manual Basico de Cajeros PDF

Manual Básico de Cajeros
Por José Antonio Carnicer
Versión: 5/2009
CÓDIGO DESCRIPCIÓN
1er CODIGO
ERROR
ELIMINATION (QUÉ
- PARA TODOS LOS EQUIPOS SIN EXCEPCIÓN -
HACEMOS)
ACTIVIDADES CON MATERIAL CONSUMIBLE
G Cambio de unidad Completa. (ej.Cajero,actualizador Cambio de impresora financiera)
T Cambio de un componente. (ej. Cambio lector de tarjetas, impresora de recibos, cajetín, PMxx )
M Cambio de piezas pequeñas referentes a un modulo (ej. Rueda dentada, correa, eje, scrow, placa hueso, etc.).
ACTIVIDADES SIN MATERIAL CONSUMIBLE
C Error de contacto, Fallo en la Inst. Eléctrica, Corto circuito, etc.
D Actualizar FW
J Ajustar / Limpiar (ajustar OMR, alto de billetes en cajetín, atasco de papel, atasco de dinero, tarjetas, etc.)
9 Limpieza/ Engrase (ej. engrasar ejes, limpieza de sensores, etc.)
F Problema ha sido eliminado por el cliente mismo (Ej.cambiar papel, quitar un atasco de recibos o billetes)
S Software, Driver - Update (sin cambio de versión) (ej. Reinstalación de SW con la misma versión)
U Software, Driver - Update (con cambio de versión) (ej. Reinstalación de SW con versión actualizada)
K Configuración / Cambio de parámetros / Formateo (ej. modificar datos de la BIOS, cambio IP del cajero, etc.)
R Reseteo / Reiniciar
0 Fallo no se puede reproducir (Ej. cajero o actualizador que no se detecta avería)
ACTIVIDADES FUERA DEL PRODUCTO REPORTADO
W Fallo se elimina por otra compañía (ej. Telefónica, empresa de mantenimiento eléctrico de oficina, empresa de seguridad, etc.)
4 Fallo por parte del operador / Instrucciones nuevas a cliente (Ej. que carge el papel, carga de efectivo, etc.)EL MISMO
2º CODIGO ERROR
CAUSES (DÓNDE - SÓLO PARA CAJEROS (28). NO PARA ALA'S -
LO HACEMOS)
CÓDIGOS FALLO DENTRO DE PRODUCTO

A Transporte y salida de dinero
B Función de Depósito
D Impresoras (recibos, diario y documentos) NO PM
E Ingresador de efectivo (Glory), Escrow, Deposito de monedas.
F Elementos de Seguridad (Puertas de Apertura, Cámara y Video)
G Frontal de Cajero, puertas, laterales, caja fuerte, cerraduras, etc.
H Shutter dispensador y deposito.
I Cableado Interno, luminosos e indicadores
J Unidad de reconocimiento (BEB)
K Lectores de tarjetas y Chip
L Ventilación, Calefacción, Filtros y Medio Ambiente.
M Monitores, Pantallas táctiles y Pantallas.
N Fuentes de Alimentación (Distribuidor de Alimentación, SAI, etc.).
O Componentes de Seguridad (EMA / UMA)
P PC Incluyendo: placa, memoria, Hdd / Floppy / CD, tarjetas.
Q Módulo de Libretas (PM e Hitachi) SÓLO SI ESTA EN UN CAJERO, NO EN ALA's
R Cilindro Almacenador de Billetes, Cajetines de Reciclador
S Scanner, Lectores ópticos.
T Teclados, Pin, EPP, SOP, Soft-Keys
U Cajetines de Billetes (Ingreso / Salida) y Reject / Retract.
V Dispensador de Dinero (Stacker, Extractores, etc.).
W Placas Electrónicas (ZAC para NG ó CMD, Electrónica Especial)
X Antiskimming
Z CCDM
CÓDIGO FALLO FUERA DEL PRODUCTO
0 Fallo por Parte del Operador, Causas Externas. (ej. colocación incorrecta del papel, cajetín mal insertado.)
1 Sistema / Aplicación, Software / Emulación
2 Red Eléctrica, Mantenimiento.
4 Comunicaciones (Estructura del Cliente). (ej. router, cableado en mal estado, etc.)
5 Consumibles (ej. papel de impresoras, cinta de impresión PM, etc.)
6 Producto que no es de Wincor-Nixdorf HW / SW.
7 Vandalismo
2º CODIGO
ERROR CAUSES
(DÓNDE LO
- SÓLO PARA IMPRESORAS (30). NO PARA CAJEROS -
HACEMOS)
CÓDIGOS FALLO DENTRO DE PRODUCTO

N Fuente de alimentación. bateria, etc.
B interface óptico
C Controlador, eléctronica
R Generador de caracteres
O Transporte de recibo, libreta
Q Transporte de diario
E Transporte de documentos
D Mecanica de impresión, carrier driver, cabeza
U Unidad Drum
H Estación laser, estación de fusión
I Conectores, cables, linea
J Llaves, switch, sensor, fotosensor
K MSR, Zekosa
L Lector óptico, MICR
V Cuchilla corte
A Introductor, arrastre, cambio de página
Y Cambio completo sin busqueda de error
X Hardware No definido
CÓDIGO FALLO FUERA DEL PRODUCTO
Fallo por Parte del Operador, Causas Externas. (ej. colocación incorrecta del papel, cajetín mal
0
insertado.)
1 Sistema / Aplicación, Software / Emulación
2 Red Eléctrica, Mantenimiento.
4 Comunicaciones (Estructura del Cliente). (ej. router, cableado en mal estado, etc.)
5 Consumibles (ej. papel de impresoras, cinta de impresión PM, etc.)
6 Producto que no es de Wincor-Nixdorf HW / SW.
7 Vandalismo
9 Fallo que no se puede determinar (ej. no detecta avería.)
Impresora de
Impresora de libretas en cajeros CCDM Caja fuerte
Diario/Recibos
CÓDIGO D CÓDIGO Q CÓDIGO Z CÓDIGO G
A ND99 A Patillas placa hueso A Transporte intermedio N Botonera cerradura electrónica
B ND9A B Sensores placa hueso V Módulo dispensador B Mecánica cerradura electrónica
C ND9E C Motor placa hueso H Shutter de salida C Pilas cerradura electrónica
D ND9C D Otros placa hueso U Cajetines R Maneta apertura
E ND9G E Cabezal mecánica Zekosa E ESCROW O Tope apertura puerta
F ND71 F Motor mecánica Zekosa J Lector cheque / billetes (BEB) Q Pestilleria
G ND98 G Otros mecánica Zekosa R Unidad de almacenamiento E
H ND98D H Controlador Zekosa Z Chasis CCDM D Puerta completa
I TH30 I Plástico transparente guia carrier B Unidad de transporte a rechazo U
J TP06 J Electrónica shutter P Amplificadora /controladora H
K TP07 K Mecánica Shutter W Controladora dispensador I Conectores, cables
L TH97 L Fotos Shutter T Sensores detectores metal J
M TH60 M Otros shutter M Controladora detectores metal K
N TP01 N Fotos bandeja transparente K Lector caracteres magnéticos L
O O Cabezal C Unidad de alineación V
P P S A
Q Q Fuente de Alimentación D Módulo de impresión Y Cambio de módulo completo
R R Dispensador de libretas Y Unidad transporte separador X Otros elementos
S S Placa base Q Placa CCDM storage
T T Módulo paso de página N Fuente de alimentación
U U Fingers paso de página G
V V Electrónica paso página O
W W Fotos paso página I Cableado interno
X X Carrier L
Y Y OMR F Cambio módulo completo
Z Z Cambio PM completa X Otros
1 1 Conectores, cables
2 2 Otros elementos
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
CAWI 7215-450 (TOR)
Consideraciones generales
Nº posición Código de apertura. Funciones
1 Maestro (6 Dígitos). Abre.
Cambiar el código apertura.
ABRIR LA CERRADURA
Ejemplos de apertura:
1. Dar orden de apertura al TOR. (CONSOLA)
2. Esperar 10 minutos de retardo.
3. C + 1 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 (Donde 123456 es el código de usuario).
4. Abrir.
CAMBIAR CODIGO MAESTRO

Nada mas estar abierta la puerta tiene 20 segundos para cambiar el código. Si no se realiza en
este tiempo empezar de nuevo la operación. Es decir cerrar y esperar retardo.
La cerradura debe estar siempre abierta.
Existen dos opciones:
* 1 * 1 * código antiguo * código nuevo * código nuevo *
* 1 * código antiguo * código nuevo * código nuevo *
Ejemplo:
 *1 * 1 * 1 2 3 4 5 6 * 6 5 4 3 2 1 * 6 5 4 3 2 1 *
*****ANOMALIAS*****
La conexión que hay física entre el TOR (CONSOLA) y el cajero no es nuestra.
Casos:
* TOR (CONSOLA) no funciona
Solución—Le indicamos a la oficina que pase incidencia a alarmas. Indicarles que desactivemos el
TOR (CONSOLA) para proceder abrir la caja fuerte manualmente.
1º- DESACTIVACION DEL TOR (CONSOLA) DESDE EL CAJERO:

* 9 * 123456 * 0 * EMITE BIPS.MARCAR RETARDO CON COMBINACION.
1 123456 o combinación que tenga la oficina INMEDIATAMENTE. ?????’
No es necesario realizarlo inmediatamente, una vez desactiva, ya se puede abrir
prescindiendo del TOR.
En caso de que al desactivar el TOR, la puerta se pueda abrir, instar a la oficina a que
pase avería a ALARMAS.
2º- ACTIVAREMOS EL TOR (CONSOLA) DESDE EL CAJERO GIRANDO EL POMO Y

C CERRAMOS LA PUERTA.
9 * 123456 * 1 *
NO HAY LUZ EN LA OFICINA Y EN EL CASO DE QUE NO TENGA PILA EL RETARDO???
Si se va la luz, el sistema TOR funcionara, por lo tanto no se deberá ni desactivar ni
colocar una pila nueva en la botonera para poder abrirlo.
Cuando cliente nos comenta que han girado la maneta con la puerta abierta
Solución: Desactivar TOR
Marcar 1+combinación y girar la maneta
Volver a activar el TOR
CAWI 7215-300 (NO TOR)
ABRIR LA CERRADURA
Ejemplos de apertura:
1. Dar orden de apertura: C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 (Donde 123456 es el código del usuario).
2. Esperar 10 minutos de retardo.
3. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6.
4. Abrir.
CAMBIAR CODIGO MAESTRO

NADA MAS ESTAR ABIERTA LA PUERTA TIENE 20 SEGUNDOS PARA CAMBIAR EL CODIGO. SI
NO SE REALIZA EN ESTE TIEMPO EMPAZAR DE NUEVO LA OPERACIÓN. ES DECIR CERRAR Y
ESPERAR RETARDO.

* 0 * Código antiguo * código nuevo * código nuevo *
Ejemplo:
 *0 * 1 2 3 4 5 6 * 6 5 4 3 2 1 * 6 5 4 3 2 1 *
*****ANOMALIAS*****
QUE SECUENCIAS DE ERROR TIENE?
Luz roja + 12 tonos + luz verde parpadeando = la puerta para la caja fuerte no está
cerrada correctamente
12 tonos + luz roja = Clave incorrecta 3º intento bloquea, esperar 15 mtos.
10 tonos + luz roja y verde parpadeando = batería baja
EL SINTOMA DE CAMBIO DE PILAS ES EL MISMO QUE EN 4B? Si

ETC, ETC (Tal vez deberías ser mas concreto con las dudas :P)
PONER EL CIERRE AUTOMATICO

La cerradura debe cerrar automáticamente pasados 6 segundos. Para programar esta opción se debe
teclear la siguiente secuencia:
* 4 * código maestro * 1 *
CAMBIAR EL RETARDO
La cerradura debe estar abierta (tiempo de 5 a 10 seg.). Solo el maestro puede cambiar el retardo.
3 * código maestro * tiempo *
El tiempo es en minutos y siempre de dos dígitos. El tiempo de retardo debe ser de 10 minutos.
Ejemplo:* 3 * 1 2 3 4 5 6 * 10 *
CAMBIAR EL CODIGO MAESTRO
(A realizar por el responsable de la oficina).
Nada mas estar abierta la puerta tiene 20 segundos para cambiar el código. Si no se realiza en
este tiempo empezar de nuevo la operación. Es decir cerrar y esperar retardo.
* 0 * 1 2 3 4 5 6 * Código nuevo * código nuevo *
Ejemplo:
*0*123456*000000*000000*
Modelo 6124 / 6125.
INSTRUCCIONES RESUMIDAS
Candado de seguridad electrónico
Guía de configuración y operación
PUNTOS IMPORTANTES
• Al momento de programar, debe ingresar los nuevos códigos dos veces, para confirmar que
coinciden.
• Cómo reiniciar el candado: Si desea empezar a ingresar un código y comete algún error,
puede presionar * para reiniciar el candado, o bien puede esperar 10 segundos para que se
reinicie automáticamente. Nota: No espere más de 10 segundos entre un ingreso de datos y
otro o se reiniciará el candado.
• Pitido de error: Si escucha un pitido largo y continúo durante alguna secuencia de
programación, significa que cometió un error. Comience de nuevo con la secuencia.
• Sanción de error: Si ingresa cinco códigos incorrectos de manera consecutiva, el seguro
comenzará periodo de sanción. Si ingresa un código erróneo durante este periodo, escuchará
dos pitidos largos y el candado no se abrirá. No tendrá otra alternativa más que esperar diez
minutos antes de poder ingresar un código válido para abrir el candado.
APERTURA.
Introducir código de 6 dígitos finalizando con el símbolo #. Ejemplo 1 2 3 4 5 6 #.
En este momento la cerradura se abrirá, por lo que se podría girar la maneta de la pestilleria
para abrir la puerta. Transcurridos un mínimo de 20 segundos tras abrir la cerradura, si se gira
de nuevo la maneta para cerrar la puerta, se cerrara automáticamente la cerradura.
APERTURA CON RETARDO.
Estas cerraduras deben, por ley, llevar un retardo. Con ello tras introducir la combinación no
abre como en el punto anterior, sino que suenan tres bips ♪♪♪, que comienza a contar el
retardo.
Sabemos que estamos en periodo de retardo por que suena un bip ♪ cada 10 segundos, y se
emite un destello rojo. Esto durará todo el periodo todo el periodo de tiempo que esté
estipulado el retardo.
Llegará un momento en que sonará 10 bips ♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪ seguidos, esto indica que se ha
acabado el tiempo del retardo, y que estamos en ventana de apertura.
La ventana de apertura es el periodo de tiempo que existe para, transcurrido el retardo,
reintroducir el código y abrir la cerradura. O sea, que este momento se puede reintroducir el
código que se tecleó anteriormente y la cerradura se abrirá.
Se sabe que la cerradura está en ventana de apertura porque sonarán dos bips ♪♪ cada 6
segundos durante este periodo.
COMO CAMBIAR LAS PILAS
***RETIRAR LAS PILAS VIEJAS EN EL MOMENTO DEL CAMBIO***
Durante el cambio de pilas no se perderán ni los códigos ni la configuración del programa.

Retire cuidadosamente la carcasa del teclado levantando primero el extremo inferior (el más
cercado al logotipo de S&G) y después aflojándolo en la base. Retire las pilas usadas de los
terminales. Para evitar doblar o romper el soporte, sujete la parte superior de cada soporte de
pilas mientras inserta la pila nueva; se recomienda el uso de pilas alcalinas Duracell®. Nota: Si
se retira la corriente del candado en el modo Control/Empleado, el candado se enciende en el
estado de deshabilitación.
DURACION DE TEMPORIZACION O PROGRAMACION DEL RETARDO
****PUERTA ABIERTA Y CERRAR PESTILLERIA*****
Si el parámetro de temporización ya se configuró y desea modificarlo, ingrese un código de

usuario para comenzar la temporización. Sololamente el código maestro está autorizado a
programar y cambiar un retardo. Cuando venza la temporización (el candado emite 10 pitidos
rápidos) y el periodo de ventana de apertura ya comenzó, configure los minutos de la
temporización.
Por ley se debe programar con un retardo a 10 minutos. Es configurable de 1 a 99 minutos,
siendo mínimo 1 minuto al retardo mínimo. Para eliminar el periodo de temporización,
simplemente ingrese cero (0) para los minutos de temporización.
Si no hay retardo, como por ejemplo, al venir la cerradura de fábrica, la ventana de apertura no
existe, por lo que el retardo se cambia en cualquier momento, pero si el retardo existe, debe
cambiarse solo en ventana de apertura.
Ingrese:
7 4 * Código Maestro # ♪♪♪♪♪ 0 0 # ♪♪♪ Minutos de temporización # ♪♪♪ Minutos de
temporización # ♪♪♪
Por ejemplo, para configurar la temporización de 15 minutos, ingrese:

7 4 * Código Maestro # ♪♪♪♪♪
0 0 # ♪♪♪
1 5 # ♪♪♪
1 5 # ♪♪♪
CAMBIO DE CODIGO MAESTRO
****PUERTA ABIERTA Y CERRAR PESTILLERIA*****
La cerradura viene con código maestro (o código 0) de fabrica o que el usuario nos pida
cambiarla.
Ingrese:
2 2 * Código de usuario anterior # ♪♪♪♪♪
Nuevo Código de usuario # ♪♪♪
Nuevo Código de usuario # ♪♪♪
Por ejemplo, para cambiar el Código Maestro preconfigurado de fábrica a 654321:

2 2 * 1 2 3 4 5 6 # ♪♪♪♪♪
6 5 4 3 2 1 # ♪♪♪
6 5 4 3 2 1 # ♪♪♪
Referencia para las secuencias de pitidos
* Acción/Condición
Lo que usted oye
* Código incorrecto ingresado

1 pitido largo continúo ♪
* Código ingresado durante el periodo de sanción por error

2 pitidos largos continuos ♪♪
* Código de usuario integrado para comenzar temporización

3 pitidos agudos cortos ♪♪
* Cuenta regresiva de temporización

1 pitido corto agudo cada 10 segundos ♪
* Señal de expiración de temporización

10 pitidos agudos cortos ♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪
* Señal de ventana de apertura

2 pitidos cortos agudos cada 6 segundos ♪♪
* Advertencia de pilas bajas

5 secuencias de 2 pitidos agudos cortos ♪♪ ♪♪ ♪♪ ♪♪ ♪♪
* El nivel de las pilas está demasiado bajo para llevar a cabo las funciones
20 pitidos agudos cortos (bloqueo de código) ♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪♪
* Indicador de extensión de cerrojo

1 secuencia de pitidos graves/agudos ♪
* Señal de forzado del teclado (opcional)

2 secuencias de SOS (3 cortos agudos, 3 cortos graves, 3 cortos agudos) ♪♪♪ ♪♪♪ ♪♪♪
* Fin de descarga de seguimiento de auditoría

3 pitidos agudos cortos ♪♪♪
* Habilitar candado (Modo Control/Empleado)

4 pitidos agudos cortos ♪♪♪♪
* Deshabilitar candado (Modo Control/Empleado)

2 pitidos graves ♪♪
SPIDER PRO (procedimiento Caja Madrid)
PRECAUCIONES BÁSICAS
1) La Consola y la Cerradura deberán de estar conectadas entre si permanentemente,

aún en almacenaje. Si esto no se cumple: después de 24 horas de desconexión entre
dichos elementos, la hora real no se mantendrá y deberá de ser reprogramada.
2) Este método de apertura permite abrir siempre y sin retardo.
3) Este método de apertura se invalida al realizar una apertura con un código de
usuario.
4) Notifique el Nº de Cerradura instalada a la Entidad.
PROCESO DE APERTURA PARA INSTALADORES,

UTILIZANDO LA CLAVE DE PRUEBAS
1) El SPIDER PRO deberá de estar conectado a la red de 220 V.

2) Pulsar (libro) (En el visor aparece: CLAVE DE PRUEBAS)
3) Pulsar clave de pruebas 1 2 4 4 5 5 6 6
4) Pulsar √ (En el visor aparece: CANAL IrDA?)
5) Pulsar X (En el visor aparece: CONFIRMAR RELOJ EN HORA?)
6) Pulsar √ (En el visor aparece: la fecha real Día/Mes/Año)
7) Pulsar √ (En el visor aparece: CONFIRMAR NÚMERO ID?)
8) Pulsar X (En el visor aparece: PROBAR APERTURA?)
9) Pulsar √ (En el visor aparece: INICIADO PROCESO DE APERTURA, el SPIDER
PRO se abre, y aparece: CERRAR?)
PROCESO DE CIERRE
1) Pulsar √ (En el visor aparece: CERRANDO…. PROBAR APERTURA?)

SALIR
Pulsar (derecha)
RESETEAR
Pulsar (arriba) (abajo) A LA VEZ
UTILIZANDO LA CLAVE DE USUARIO 2
• Recomiendo utilizar esta clave porque tras la primera inserción con éxito,
elimina la de pruebas.
• Esta clave se debe comunicar por parte del técnico, al supervisor de la
máquina para que la utilice.
• Es extremadamente primordial la personalización de las llaves,
eliminando o guardando la de transporte.
1. El cajero debe estar conectado a la red eléctrica. Puesto que no existe acceso al
cable que está en la caja fuerte, debe desconectarse el primer conector que llega
al distribuidor de 220 (entrada) y conectar un cable a este punto, que venga
directamente de la red eléctrica.
2. Pulse la tecla √
3. Introduzca la clave de usuario2 : 2 7 2 6 9 4 2
5. En el visor aparece: APERTURA?
7. Se inicia el retardo de apertura programado en la ventana de apertura.
8. Una vez finalizado el tiempo de retardo aparece: CONFIRME CLAVE
11. Seguidamente la SPIDER se abre y aparece ABIERTA, permaneciendo en este
estado hasta la finalización del tiempo programado como abierto.
,WINCOR
(S&G6124,6125y68E0)
NIXDORF
INSTRUCCIONES
CERRADURA CAJAFUERTE
DEL
CAJERO
INSTRUCCIONES
OPEMTIVASRESUMIDAS
l. Apertura
Esla er¿d!É s 5bE media € h ¡¡rmdlcdón dé un oÉdho d;, ar menor 6 di9i6,
fnal¿ar po. el .fmbolo*. pad qú. l. er.dlE *pa quo M lemr.ado d6 tn ¡dudr b
deb¡€ndo
_-.-- ,?,91119911131I:-6 I 2 3 4 s 6 ,*.p"rroquésrs. qur€6abrirár6j¿o $
I 2 3 , 15 6 #
Er 6€ odsnro ¡¡ 6F¡rtúE se*úif¡, p.f toqB * podrástEr ta Mér. d. ta Désnt€.iá
un mmmodé 20s¿sundc tr¿s.br,r te @ir¡duÉ. sl ; arGde
nú*o E mm@ pd €m. E Fré@.s 6ñrá aulmlfM.nte t¿cmdu¿
'1.7 AoertuE éon ÉlaRto.

EC¡s @mduEs debe¡. For tey,jlMr un Era¡do c¡n el|l' rB ¡itDdudr r¿drlinacjón
rc .bE.6mo.en cf punro.ntc¡tor, dno qu6 sueMn16 bip6,r¡. q!. ¡rülc3nq@ @ié@ .
sob€noslw est¡nco pdtododo elaÉo Dorquésu€E un b¡p¡ cáda10 sundos v
s emrc unodÉno qo. Es ouÉ€ @o erpériodod6üÉmpoqu€ eté Eüputadoet rdtdo.
Één t0 bip€,¡r¡¡r¡,¡.¡ *gutdc, *to tñd¡e quo 3. há
aeDado€rúéñpooerd¿do,yq
. _g ":"!11?d" "ryl'l! e:r.penodo qu€qi$e páÉ,rr¿rsqmdo
oáriempo
fáduE. o se.¡qu€o1€stemomenlo
erE¡arro.
* p!.de re.nrmduor
€i
s.,sbe qre ts emdla erá envent.n¿de áp.rtuÉ p.rque son¿éndosbtps,, c.da 6
-
2. rcambio del código |1|aestro.

_ ta ÉÉdm viere de fábde on ul o5digoñáero, et @¿tdeb€sar emuado a uñ
. El
pemre
c@qo máetu 1ocódigo0j és uñ aidigo espec,átque. ademásdé áofir h cemdu,a
progÉmár¿ dáúo, cFa eá,es unojd:goqu. qe$oná
comosedio anr€domenr., ete oódiqodebec¿ñbiaEedel ori€hat1 2 3 4 5 6 *á
okopfopi.!¿rro
deraoldrá. Elo seh.Éd¿ t¿s'quieñt¿
m.n.¡¿
z2*t I # i¡¡¡,¡ [ I # .¡j¡ l#¡r¡
I Cúdo s pr@dA a (mbir códisos,y pon

evih P.sibl6 tróblcms, & debcnn ür
¿lsms 6es , abú l¡ andu, ¡b¡t t¡ pu!tu y csmr
dd m¡rcor* d¡b.r úd!¡ (r rosEditos deh buctu\
WINCOR
NIXDORF
E¡ @n@to,pa6 €ñblardetcód¡go
1 2 3,( 5 6 e oü! seh.rá:
2 2 * l 2 3 4 5 6 # ¡ ¡ , ¡ f, : - . - - l # ¡ ¡ ¡ Í . - - - - - J # r ¡ ,
códiqonú*o Cód¡Oo
nudo-
3. Programac¡ón del retardo

. _ como e óijo aflenomdre, e
É reta¡no6 @nf¡guBhsdé 1 5 99min|nc, siendo1 mh,noet E|ardomi.itu.

L. poaEm¿¡róndel el€¡no se h.€ de ¡. sroúifft. @neE:
z4t a-: - - --l#¡r¡rr00#r¡¡ [-_I#rx [__l#¡¡,

tub:n¡
Coúu c. I,b.fu ¡h ¡ 2 3 45 ó t, poodu útdod. t5 oitr¡cc
? { * I 2 3 4 5 6 # ,¡¡.i, OO# ,r¡ I S # ,,¡ I S # ¡¡.t,
utu vd qu. $ €[g. un Étárúo,d€ sto pu¿d.ss enüado o átimi.adoenv.ntán. d.
6p€!!E y por er ..dso n..sf!. E9o $ h¿e ¡nlEdudiendo !ná dmlr¡ádón v¡h-;ñ;;
I G¡.úo se d66ntará y, at en
l¡Eo s. .rñna petendo o
@ro nrl¡néód. ntnúc de E|Ído.
s¡ no n.y Elqdo, @ñ por €jempto.!t v€dr ¡a emduE d€ ráM@, t5 véntan.
¿pen@rc disr., porroquáetrer5Éo3é6nba en@dqujsmohú'o. leo r;rEhldo;d". dé
ATENCIÓN
Estacerraduranecesiladospilas arcafrras6LR
de 9V. S&G recomiendan
paraunfuncionamreñto
o pROCELL
ópiimopilas DURACELL
':!
"J
,t
1¡
g 43*
Y drn 6cudúñs 16 stridd qü' $ p'¡duc'r si
qú {rmd hb¡mdo @tru úod.ro 6t¡
¡
DE SONIDOS
REFERENCIA
;t* si.np c i!rc'lst sbcr r Fris dc los enidos qü. pódúcc l¡ cmdú- oúl6 'l sbdo
{¡¡ !ii s¿ i¡Hd .¡Ú o nodo de Prcs'moon s o lvuBv
se übró abrnl¡ emdú 6n u códi@irodo

!; jjilJ.¡i.¡¡.r r¡¡
r¡ ¡,¡¡i,J' -h
-'"d,i!-Éd,sod*@bFd-i'".ió'P"'ú":"'"'
;; ñ- a ñ i i¿ t. E ! P.Eie z tu @ É
rs - se rÉbj ql cudo. rom.@ h ' m@ de¡

vs.sl.nbwo@d.¿p.rü'
. se.s.eoúndo h! FLx.
tl¡t1ll4!!
,,,:,r,¡]],,ir,.¡ -l,3 o|.. * mo@" v E nopr4s !!!!$L!9rsl.:.:i
!-rde.{6,ón blnd. Fsúo rcpog!4ll
: ü
ñi ¿. ¡".*" "0.¿' t"p.'".n.
-El ..dso 'nmd¡ció .n h Pmgrs
lri / El odco i¡ü.düc'dop$ ¿brirB oño
iro" !' *r'¿o -L pon sltaqeru'*d
['ro Ú! rmo
dl"l o
ü
I t E^-ñ;-"p.'ru U;;" .r s!.nrq dddiri rr
J
i
I
DeL34lrÍetñ ¿EBMen4
I cN cl4to e e$'a- \E '!t\('! / &ífuú lU
'
ovf¿¿ÁÉ lS h:nurd PHLQT Da!&Io@'catLt'a
B¿ir4uegggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggggg
dd!^
no e)m)
f'e<ea -¿!O;'¿d'L"'ftro¿'(
N¡¡.^e.err": ,15 k¡uulnt '/
C"P!1<cre :'/A" la ^<¿e@L¡t|t^l
Wtusi n 'Vev¡- ,t/'t¡be
a.,e n/.'ttz et ?es¡-tua ve¿¿!¡r, ¿lr1 A atwn' 6n-l-1'

ürlav eL t'oqLe otE , *Lttu4! h¡&m,o+!¡.'¡ sa">o^
FL.r E!4q! hpi^ttw ¡otat twr oe
tAqqElf../s¿*
c- fi<¡aitl
Cajeros CajaMadrid con cerradura SPIDER PRO
Procedimiento de Apertura en la fase de Instalación
• Utilizando la clave de Pruebas.

o Recomiendo NO utilizar este tipo de apertura porque tiene una vida muy
corta, esto es 100 aperturas, tras esto, la cerradura se bloquea y solo
puede ser abierta siguiendo las instrucciones de un especialista en esta
rama.
2. Pulse , en el visor aparece : CLAVE DE PRUEBAS
3. Introduzca la clave de pruebas : 1 2 4 4 5 5 6 6
4. Pulse √, en el visor aparece : CANAL iRDA?
5. Pulse X, en el visor aparece: CONFIRMAR RELOJ EN HORA?
6. Pulse √, en el visor aparece: la fecha real Día/Mes/Año.
7. Pulse √, en el visor aparece: CONFIRMAR NÚMERO ID?
8. Pulse X, en el visor aparece: PROBAR APERTURA?
9. Pulse √, en el visor aparece: INICIADO PROCESO DE APERTURA.
10. Seguidamente, la SPIDER se abre y aparece : CERRAR?
11. Gire la llave y la maneta. Abra la puerta.
Proceso de Cierre
1. Pulse √ , en el visor aparece: CERRANDO ……PROBAR APERTURA?

2. Para salir, pulse
3. Para resetear, pulse simultáneamente .
• Utilizando la clave de Usuario 2.
• Recomiendo utilizar esta clave porque tras la primera inserción con éxito,
elimina la de pruebas.
• Esta clave se debe comunicar por parte del técnico, al supervisor de la
máquina para que la utilice.
• Es extremadamente primordial la personalización de las llaves,
eliminando o guardando la de transporte.
5. En el visor aparece: APERTURA?
7. Se inicia el retardo de apertura programado en la ventana de apertura.
8. Una vez finalizado el tiempo de retardo aparece: CONFIRME CLAVE
11. Seguidamente la SPIDER se abre y aparece ABIERTA, permaneciendo en este
estado hasta la finalización del tiempo programado como abierto.
SPIDER PRO
PRECAUCIONES BÁSICAS
1) La Consola y la Cerradura deberán de estar conectadas entre si permanentemente,

aún en almacenaje. Si esto no se cumple: después de 24 horas de desconexión entre
dichos elementos, la hora real no se mantendrá y deberá de ser reprogramada.
2) Este método de apertura permite abrir siempre y sin retardo.
3) Este método de apertura se invalida al realizar una apertura con un código de
usuario.
4) Notifique el Nº de Cerradura instalada a la Entidad
PROCESO DE APERTURA PARA INSTALADORES,

UTILIZANDO LA CLAVE DE PRUEBAS
1) El SPIDER PRO deberá de estar conectado a la red de 220 V.

2) Pulsar (En el visor aparece: CLAVE DE PRUEBAS)
3) Pulsar clave de pruebas 1 2 4 4 5 5 6 6
4) Pulsar 9 (En el visor aparece: CANAL IrDA?)
5) Pulsar X (En el visor aparece: CONFIRMAR RELOJ EN HORA?)
6) Pulsar 9 (En el visor aparece: la fecha real Día/Mes/Año)
7) Pulsar 9 (En el visor aparece: CONFIRMAR NÚMERO ID?)
8) Pulsar X (En el visor aparece: PROBAR APERTURA?)
9) Pulsar 9 (En el visor aparece: INICIADO PROCESO DE APERTURA, el SPIDER
PRO se abre, y aparece: CERRAR?)
PROCESO DE CIERRE
1) Pulsar 9 (En el visor aparece: CERRANDO…. PROBAR APERTURA?)
SALIR
Pulsar Î
RESETEAR
Pulsar Ï Ð A LA VEZ
CIERRE INCIDENCIAS CAJEROS SISTEMA 4B
código 13 - Password 1357
CÓDIGOS DE RESOLUCION DE AVERIA
Valor Descripción Explicación

1 Ajustar Dispositivo
2 Limpiar Dispositivo
Quitar atasco causado por accesorios (papel, cinta
3 Quitar atasco accesorios
entintada, etc.)
5 Engrasar Lubrificar, engrasar dispositivo
6 Quitar atasco vandalismo Quitar objetos extraños, por ejemplo, papel en lector
7 Reparar vandalismo Para averías abiertas por acto vandálico en general

Cambio pieza de recambio
8
defectuosa
10 Cambio modulo
11 Cambio pieza
12 Reapretar, reasentar Dispositivo
30 Instalar nuevo SW/FW/CW Instalar versión programa 4B
31 Instalar parche de SW
32 Recargar SW Recargar versión programa 4B
34 Reconfigurar parámetros Cargar configuración ATM
35 Recuperar backup Recuperación versiones telecargadas
50 Sin reparación
51 Incidente no del Servicio Técnico
52 Reparar sin piezas
54 Instrucicones al operador
72 Reset (Power ON/OFF)
73 Reset (Reset switch)
90 Otros
CÓDIGOS DE PRESENCIA DE TECNICO
Valor Descripción Explicación

20 Pendiente Empresa de Seguridad Empresa de Seguridad no acude o pospone cita
Avería no resuelta por que Oficina o Empresa de
21 Pendiente Proxima visita
Seguridad sobrepasan su horario
22 Averia no finalizada SE queda para el día siguiente
40 Valoración de vandaslismo Valorar daños en aviso vandalismo
80 Pendiente de pieza A la espera de recibir las piezas
81 Espera de discos de programa Espera de discos de programa
90 Otros Otra causa no especificada en los códigos anteriores
Aplicación 4B. Problemas al listar Diario Electrónico
El fichero Diario Electrónico se genera al detectarse cualquier problema en la impresora

de diario. La aplicación genera un fichero diferente por cada día. Puede estar en este estado
varios días, hasta que finalmente la aplicación deja al cajero Fuera de Servicio.
Una vez solventado el problema, con el código 39 se reactiva la impresión de todos
estos ficheros.
A veces la información contenida en estos ficheros está dañada lógicamente, de
manera que, al intentar listar el Diario Electrónico, la impresión se detiene al no poder
interpretar estos datos erróneos. En este caso, la aplicación no permite que el cajero quede En
Servicio.
Pasos a seguir en estos casos:
1. Es muy importante asegurarse que la impresora de diario funciona perfectamente

testeándola con KDIAG o el test interno.
2. Salvar la mayor cantidad posible de movimientos pendientes de imprimir. Con código 91,
password 9876, listar todos los días que falten, comenzando por el día actual hacia atrás,
hasta que no quede ninguno pendiente, o hasta que lleguemos al que contiene el error. En
algunas ocasiones, esto es suficiente para solucionar el problema.
3. Comprobar si el cajero estaba sin línea antes de quedar Fuera de Servicio. Podemos
comprobarlo revisando el estado del fichero de movimientos (código 18, opción 1 =
Estado). Si es así, listar los movimientos pendientes de enviar con código 18, opción 2
(Leer).
4. Inicializar los ficheros de diario electrónico. Introducir código 97, password 1996, opción 4 =
Inicializar, password 1935.
5. Rearrancar el cajero y comprobar impresión en diario.
La aplicación creará de nuevo los ficheros y directorios correspondientes cuando lo necesite.
Si con lo indicado anteriormente no se consiguiera desbloquear la impresión del Diario

Electrónico, habría que borrar manualmente los ficheros y directorios implicados.
Borrado manual de los ficheros del Diario Electrónico
Los pasos 1 a 3 deberán haber sido realizados previamente.

Conectar un teclado al pc del cajero. Rearrancarlo e interrumpir el arranque de la aplicación
con Control + C.
Cambiar al directorio raíz y teclear:
C:\dir D_E*.*
Deben aparecer el directorio D_E y el fichero D_E_LOG.DAT. Ambos deben ser

eliminados.
Borrar el fichero D_E_LOG.DAT situado en el directorio raiz con el comando:
C:\del D_E*.*
Para borrar el directorio D_E, es preciso vaciarlo previamente, ya que en OS/2 no existe el
comando DELTREE.
El directorio D_E está organizado en subdirectorios de año (98, 99, 00). Cada uno de estos
subdirectorios está subdividido en subdirectorios de mes (01, 02, ..., 12). Los ficheros
correspondientes a cada día que no se pudo imprimir el diario están contenidos en estos
subdirectorios de mes. Utilizar el comando dir *.* para visualizar cada uno de estos
subdirectorios.
Ejemplos:
C:\D_E\98\12\24.lzv (fichero 24.LZV del día 24 de Diciembre de 1998)

C:\D_E\99\11\29.lzv (fichero 29.LZV del día 29 de Noviembre de 1999)
Cambiar a cada uno de los directorios de mes existentes con el comando cd.
Ejemplo:
C:\cd D_E
C:\D_E\cd 99
C:\D_E\99\cd 11
Con el comando del *.* borrar todos los ficheros existentes en cada subdirectorio de mes.
Ejemplo:
C:\D_E\99\cd 11\del *.*
Con el comando rd, eliminar todos los subdirectorios de mes que haya, una vez
borrados todos los ficheros contenidos en ellos.
Ejemplo:
C:\D_E\99\rd 01
C:\D_E\99\rd 11
Eliminar, de la misma forma todos los subdirectorios de año que haya.

Ejemplo:
C:\D_E\rd 98
C:\D_E\rd 99
Finalmente eliminar el subdirectorio D_E.

Ejemplo:
C:\rd D_E
Rearrancar el cajero y comprobar impresión en diario.

CONFIGURACION CONEXION TCP/IP BANCO POPULAR
Después de anotar el número de serie aparecía un menú con varias

posibilidades. Hasta ahora anotabamos siempre X25 tanto para X25 como para
XOT. Ahora aparece una nueva opción TCP/IP que deberemos elegir.
Los datos necesarios para la conexión de los cajeros constan de dos partes:
Datos identificativos del cajero. IP Propia, Máscara, Gateway (si procede)

Datos de conexión para el envío de las transacciones. IP(s) destino, Puerto(s) destino.
DATOS PROPIOS
Mediante el programa del disco duro c:\tcp\xotcnf.exe configuramos los datos propios.
Estos datos los debe facilitar el Banco Popular pues dependen de cada oficina.
Nos deben dar: IP Propia, Máscara y Gateway.
Este conjunto de datos son los mismos que para XOT.
DATOS CONEXION
En este caso de conexión IP nativa el destino es diferente al del XOT.
Para las conexiones de cajeros del Banco Popular vamos a usar siempre los siguientes datos:
IP Principal 10.66.12.8
IP Secundaria 10.66.12.9
Puerto 4001
Estos datos deben ser introducidos por la operatoria de Supervisor de 4B

En esta operatoria se usa siempre la Password 5081
COD. 60 para introducir la IP Principal.
Nos pide ANOTE DIRECCION DE SERVER IP1. Anotamos 10 <Anotación>
COD. 61 para introducir la IP Secundaria.
La entrada se produce de la misma manera que la IP Principal pero anotaremos:
10, 66, 12, 9 en las entradas correspondientes
COD. 62 para introducir los Puertos Primario y Secundario
Nos pide ANOTE DIRECCION DE PUERTO IP1. Anotamos 4001 <Anotación>
La telecarga es un proceso separado del transaccional y 4B ha considerado que podría

realizarse contra otras IPs distintas de las del transaccional, por ello hay que repetir el proceso
de entrada para los datos de conexión del proceso de Telecarga. En el caso de Banco
Popular los datos para la Telecarga son los mismos.
COD. 70 Aparece un menú.
COD. 91 (Opción oculta) INTRODUCIR IP PRINCIPAL DE TELECARGA
Nos pide IP1, IP2, IP3, IP4 de la misma manera que en el cod. 60.
Anotaremos 10, 66, 12, 8.
COD. 92 (Opción oculta) INTRODUCIR IP SECUNDARIA DE TELECARGA
Anotaremos 10, 66, 12, 9.
A continuación nos pide los puertos
Puerto para IP Primaria. Anotamos 4001<Anotación>
Puerto para IP Secundaria. Anotamos 4001<Anotación>
COD. 65 Listado de la configuración de comunicaciones.

Este código no listará nada mientras no haya conseguido conexión.
CONFIGURACION CONEXION TCP/IP BANCO GUIPUZCOANO

posibilidades. Hasta ahora anotábamos siempre X25 tanto para X25 como para
Datos identificadores del cajero. IP Propia, Máscara, Gateway (sí procede)

DATOS PROPIOS
Estos datos deben de ser facilitados por el Banco Guipuzcoano ya que dependen de cada
oficina.
Nos deben de dar: IP Propia, Máscara y Gateway.
DATOS CONEXION
Para las conexiones de cajeros del Banco Guipuzcoano vamos a usar siempre los siguientes
datos:
Puerto 4021


realizarse contra otras IP’S distintas de las del transaccional, por ello hay que repetir el proceso
de entrada para los datos de conexión del proceso de Telecarga. En el caso de Banco
Guipuzcoano los datos para la Telecarga son los mismos.
COD. 91 (Opción oculta) PARA INTRODUCIR IP PRINCIPAL DE TELECARGA
Nos pide IP1, IP2, IP3, IP4 de la misma manera que en el código 60.
Anotaremos 172, 16, 92, 8.
COD. 92 (Opción oculta) PARA INTRODUCIR IP SECUNDARIA DE TELECARGA
Anotaremos 172, 16, 92, 9.

CONFIGURACION CONEXION TCP/IP BANCO PASTOR

Datos identificadores del cajero. IP Propia, Máscara, Gateway (sí procede)

DATOS PROPIOS
Estos datos deben de ser facilitados por el Banco Pastor ya que dependen de cada oficina.
Nos deben de dar: IP Propia, Máscara y Gateway.
DATOS CONEXION
Para las conexiones de cajeros del Banco Pastor vamos a usar siempre los siguientes datos:
Puerto 4026


realizarse contra otras IP’S distintas de las del transaccional, por ello hay que repetir el proceso
de entrada para los datos de conexión del proceso de Telecarga. En el caso de Banco Pastor
los datos para la Telecarga son los mismos.
COD. 91 (Opción oculta) PARA INTRODUCIR IP PRINCIPAL DE TELECARGA
Anotaremos 10, 90, 88, 97.
COD. 92 (Opción oculta) PARA INTRODUCIR IP SECUNDARIA DE TELECARGA
Anotaremos 10, 90, 88, 98.

CONFIGURACION CONEXION TCP/IP BANCO SANTANDER

Datos identificativos del cajero. IP Propia, Máscara, Gateway (si procede)

DATOS PROPIOS
Estos datos los debe facilitar el Banco Santander pues dependen de cada oficina.
Nos deben dar: IP Propia, Máscara y Gateway.
DATOS CONEXION
Para las conexiones de cajeros del Banco Santander vamos a usar siempre los siguientes
datos:
Puerto 4006

La Tele Carga es un proceso separado del transaccional y 4B ha considerado que podría

realizarse contra otras IPs distintas de las del transaccional, por ello hay que repetir el proceso
de entrada para los datos de conexión del proceso de Tele Carga. En el caso de Banco
Santander los datos para la Telecarga son los mismos.
COD. 91 (Opción oculta) INTRODUCIR IP PRINCIPAL DE TELECARGA
Anotaremos 172, 16, 92, 8.
COD. 92 (Opción oculta) INTRODUCIR IP SECUNDARIA DE TELECARGA
Anotaremos 172, 16, 92, 9.

CMOS-SETUP SCENIC 6XX 4.03.99
Bios-Version: V4.06 R 1.01.1107
MAIN
System Time: [hh:mm:ss] aktuelle Uhrzeit

System Date: [mm/dd/yy] aktuelles Datum
Diskette A: [1.4M]
Diskette B: [None]
 Hard Disk 1: Wert Mbyte (NONE bei SCSI)

 Hard Disk 2: NONE
 Boot Options
Video Display: [EGA/VGA]
Base Memory: 640k

Extended Memory: 64M
Main > Hard Disk 1
Autotype Hard Disk: [Press Enter] (autom. Erkennung nutzen!)
Main > Boot Options
POST Error Halt: [No Halt On Any Errors]

Quick Boot: [Disabled]
Quiet Boot: [Disabled]
Boot Seqence:
1. Diskette
2. Hard Disk
3. ATAPI CD-ROM
4. Network
Primary Display [AGP VGA]
 Hard Disk Boot Device

 Diskette Boot Device
1/4 Bri BS P32

Advanced
 Cache Memory
 Peripheral Configuration
 PCI Configuration
 Advanced System Configuration
 Power On/Off
 System Management
Plug & Play O/S: [No] 1)

Reset Configuration Data: [No]
Lock Setup Configuration: [No] 2)
Large Disk Acess Mode: [DOS]
1) [No] Das System-Bios übernimmt die gesamte Plug & Play-Funktionalität.

[Yes] Das Betriebssystem übernimmt einen Teil der Plug & Play-Funktionen;
Nur dann wählbar, wenn ein Plug & Play fähiges Operating System
eingesetzt wird. (z. B. Windows 95)
2) [Yes] Zugewiesene IRQ für PCI werden in Win 95/98 übernommen.
Reset Configuration Data Cambiar a YES y rearrancar pc para que resetee ciertas
direcciones de PCI. Al arrancar se cambia sólo a NO
Advanced > Cache Menory
Cache: [Enabled]
Cache System BIOS Area: [Write Protect]

Cache Video BIOS Area: [Write Protect]
Cache DRAM Memory Area: [Write Back]
Advanced > Peripheral Configuration
Serial 1: [Enabled]
Serial 1 Adress: [3F8h, IRQ 4]
Serial 2: [Enabled] AUTO
Serial 2 Adress: [2F8h, IRQ3]
Parallel: [Enabled]
Parallel Mode: [Printer] BI-DIRECTIONAL
Parallel Adress: [378h, IRQ7]
Parallel Drive: [Disabled]
Diskette Controller: [Enabled]

Hard Disk Controller: [Primary and Secondary] 1)
Mouse Controller: [Disabled] DISABLED
2/4 Bri BS P32

1) [Disabled] bei PC mit SCSI
3/4 Bri BS P32

Advanced > PCI Configuration
D.BANK
PCI Interrupt Mapping INTA#: [Auto] 1) [Auto]
PCI Interrupt Mapping INTB#: [Auto] [Auto]
PCI Interrupt Mapping INTC#: [Auto] [Disable]
PCI Interrupt Mapping INTD#: [Auto] [Disable]
PCI Interrupt Sharing [Auto] 2)
 PCI/PnP ISA IRQ Resource Exclusion 3) IRQ 3 RESERVED (ONLY)

 PCI/PnP ISA Memory Region Exclusion 3) DC00-DFFF RESERVED
 PCI/PnP DMA Resource Exclusion 3)
1) [Auto] Der PCI-Interrupt wird automatisch gemäß den Plug & Play Richtlinien zugeordnet.
[Disabled] Für die gesteckte PCI-Baugruppe wird kein PCI-Interrupt verwendet.
[IRQ03 ...] Der PCI-Interrupt wird auf den ausgewählten ISA-Interrupt geschaltet.
2) Anzahl IRQ für PCI kann begrenzt werden.
3) IRQ-, Memory- und DMA-Bereiche können für ISA-Karten reserviert werden.
Advanced > Advanced System Configuration
ISA Memory Gap: [Disabled]

PCI Bus Parity Checking: [Disabled]
ECC CPU Parity Checking: [Disabled]
ECC Memory Parity Checking: [Disabled]
ACPI: [Disabled]
Graphics Aperture: [64 MB]
USB Legacy Support: [Disabled] 1)
1) [Enabled] Bios erkennt anstecken einer USB-Tastatur.
Advanced > Power On/Off
Power Off Source

Software: [DISABLED]
Keyboard: [DISABLED]
Power Button: [DISABLED]
Power On Source
Chipcard: [DISABLED]
Remote: [DISABLED]
LAN: [DISABLED]
Timer: [DISABLED]
LAN Wakeup Mode
4/4 Bri BS P32

Monitor: [OFF]
Advanced > System Management
Fan Control: [Auto]

Error Halt: [No Halt On Any Errors]
Fan State
CPU: OK
Power Supply: OK
Auxiliary: OK
Thermal Sensor State

CPU: OK
System: OK
Auxiliary: None
Security
Setup Password INSTALLED

System Password NOT INSTALLED
Set Setup Password: [Press Enter]

Set Setup Password Lock: [Standard]
Set System Password: [Press Enter]
System Password Mode: [System]
System Load: [Standard]

Setup Prompt: [Enabled]
Virus Warning: [Disabled]
Diskette Write: [Enabled]

Flash Write: [Enabled]
Sicrypt PC-Lock: [Disabled]
Cabinet Monitoring: [Disabled]
5/4 Bri BS P32

Power
APM [DISABLED]
Power Management Mode: [Customized]
Standby Timeout: [Disabled]

Suspend Timeout: [Disabled]
Suspend Mode: [Suspend]
Hard Disk Timeout: [Disabled]
Resume On Time: [Off]

Resume Time: [00:00:00]
 Activity Detection
Exit
Save Changes & Exit BIOS Ende, Änderungen speichern

Discard Changes & Exit BIOS Ende, ohne Abspeichern
Get Default Values
Load Previous Values
Save Changes
6/4 Bri BS P32

Página 1 de 1
Aditional changes on setup PC2150

1 Standard CMOS Features
Halt On No errors
2 Advanced BIOS Features
DC000 – DFFFF Shadow Enabled
Boot up floppy seek Disabled
PS/2 Mouse Disabled
3 Integrated Peripherals
Onboard Serial Port1 Auto
Onboard Serial Port2 Auto
4 Power Management Setup
ACPI Function Disabled
PM Control by APM No
Video Off Option Always On
State After Power Failure On
5 PNP/PCI Configurations
Resources controlled By Manual
IRQ Resources
IRQ3 Legacy ISA
Setup Password set at: 2029 (choose Alpha numerics area for password)
file://D:\embedded\setp.htm 12/03/2002
BIOS-SETUP
Bios version: V6.00 PG
Rel.: 7531114 A
Standard CMOS features
…
Drive A 1.44M, 3.5 in.
Drive B None
Video EGA/VGA
Halt On All , But Keyboard
Order number System xxxx - Service Manual 4-1

¡Error! Utilice la ficha Inicio para aplicar Überschrift 2 al texto que desea que
aparezca aquí.¡Error! Utilice la ficha Inicio para aplicar Überschrift 1 al texto que desea que a
Advanced BIOS features
Virus Warning Disabled

CPU Internal Cache Enabled
External Cache Enabled
CPU L2 Cache ECC Checking Disabled
Processor Number Feature Disabled
Quick Power On Self Test Enabled
First Boot Device Floppy
Second Boot Device HDD-0
Third Boot Device CDROM
Boot Other Device Enabled
Swap Floppy Drive Disabled
Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled
Boot Up NumLock Status On
Gate A20 Option Normal
Typematic Rate Setting Disabled
Security Option Setup

PS/2 Mouse Function Enabled
OS Select For DRAM > 64 MB Non-OS2

Video BIOS Shadow Disabled
C8000-CBFFF Shadow Disabled
…resto Disabled
4-2 System xxxx - Service Manual Order number

aparezca aquí.¡Error! Utilice la ficha Inicio para aplicar Überschrift 2 al texto que dese
Advanced Chipset features
DRAM Timing By SPD Disabled

DRAM Clock Host Clock
SDRAM Cycle Length 3
Bank Interleave Disabled
DRAM Drive Strength Auto
Memory Hole Disabled

P2C/C2P Concurrency Enabled
Fast R-W Turn Around Disabled
System BIOS Cacheable Disabled
Video RAM Cacheable Disabled
Frame Buffer Size 2M
AGP Aperture Size 64M
AGP-4X Mode Disabled
AGP Driving Control Auto
On Chip USB Disabled
On Chip Sound Auto
On Chip Modem Disabled

CPU to PCI Write Buffer Enabled
PCI Dynamic Bursting Enabled
PCI Master 0 WS Write Enabled
PCI Delay Transaction Disabled
PCI #2 Access #1 Retry Enabled
AGP Master 1 WS Write Disabled
AGP Master 1 WS Read Disabled

Integrated Peripherals
On Chip IDE Channel0 Enabled

On Chip IDE Channel1 Enabled Default
IDE Prefetch Mode Enabled

Primary Master PIO Auto
Primary Slave PIO Auto
Secondary Master PIO Auto
Secondary Slave PIO Auto
Primary Master UDMA Auto
Primary Slave UDMA Auto
Secondary Master UDMA Auto
Secondary Slave UDMA Auto
Init Display First PCI Slot
LCD Display Mode Mode 1
IDE HDD Block Mode Enabled
Onboard FDD Controller Enabled
Onboard Serial Port 1 Disabled
Onboard Parallel Port 3BC/IRQ7

Onboard Parallel Mode Normal Connection of standard
printer
Onboard Serial Port 4 Disabled COM4 switched off
Onboard Legacy Audio Disabled

aparezca aquí.¡Error! Utilice la ficha Inicio para aplicar Überschrift 2 al texto que dese
Power Management Setup
ACPI function Disabled

> Power Management Press Enter
Power Management User Define
HDD Power Down Disabled
Doze Mode Disabled
Suspend Mode Disabled
PM Control by APM No
Video Off Option Suspend -> Off
Video Off Method V/H SYNC+Blank
Modem use IRQ 3
Soft-Off by PWRBTN Instant-Off
State After Power Failure On
> Wake Up Events Not relevant

PNP/PCI configurations
PNP OS Installed No with Win NT, OS2, DOS
Reset Configuration Data Disabled
Resources Controlled By Manual Reservation for ISA card

will follow
> IRQ Resources Press Enter Reserve IRQ
> DMA Resources Press Enter Reserve DMA
PCI/VGA Palette Snoop Disabled

Assign IRQ for VGA Disabled
Assign IRQ for USB Disabled

CMOS-SETUP Embedded P4 (Default Settings) 3.4.2003
Bios-Version: 1.00
STANDARD CMOS FEATURES

Date (mm:dd:yy)
Time (hh:mm:ss)
► IDE Primary Master ST380021A

► IDE Primary Slave None
► IDE Secondary Master SAMSUNG CD-ROM SC-1
► IDE Secondary Slave None
Drive A 1.44M, 3.5 in.

Drive B None
Video EGA/VGA
Halt On All , But Keyboard
ADVANCED BIOS FEATURES
Virus Warning Disabled

CPU L1 & L2 Cache Enabled
Quick Power On Self Test Enabled
First Boot Device Floppy
Second Boot Device CDROM
Third Boot Device HDD-0
Boot Other Device Enabled
Swap Floppy Drive Disabled
Boot Up Floppy Seek Disabled
Boot Up NumLock Status On
Gate A20 Option Normal
Typematic Rate Setting Disabled
Security Option Setup

APIC Mode Enabled
MPS Version 1.4
OS Select For DRAM > 64MB Non-OS2
Report No FDD For WIN 95 No
Full Screen LOGO Show Enabled
Small Logo (EPA) Show Enabled
1/4 Bri BD P32

Bios-Version: 1.00
ADVANCED CHIPSET FEATURES
DRAM Timing Selectable By SPD
Command Pre Clock Auto

Memory Frequency For Auto
System BIOS Cacheable Enabled
Video BIOS Cacheable Disabled
Memory Hole At 15M-16M Disabled
Delayed Transaction Enabled
Delay Prior to Thermal 16 Min
AGP Aperture Size (MB) 64
On Chip VGA Enabled

On-Chip Frame Buffer Size 8MB
2/4 Bri BD P32

Bios-Version: 1.00
INTEGRATED PERIPHERALS
On-Chip Primary PCI IDE Enabled

IDE Primary Master PIO Auto
IDE Primary Slave PIO Auto
IDE Primary Master UDMA Auto
IDE Primary Slave UDMA Auto
# On Chip Secondary PCI IDE Disabled PC2100
IDE Secondary Master PIO Auto
IDE Secondary Slave PIO Auto
IDE Secondary Master UDMA Auto
IDE Secondary Slave UDMA Auto
USB Controller Enabled
USB 2.0 Controller Enabled
USB Keyboard Support Enabled
AC97 Audio Auto
AC97 Modem Disabled
Init Display First Onboard/AGP
Onboard PCI LAN Enabled
# AC97 Audio AMP Enabled Onboard
Disabled External amplifier
IDE HDD Block Mode Disabled
POWER ON Function BUTTON ONLY
Onboard FDC Controller Enabled

Onboard Serial Port 1 3F8/IRQ4
Onboard Serial Port 2 2F8/IRQ3
UART Mode Select Standard
Onboard Parallel Port 378/IRQ7
Parallel Port Mode Standard
PWRON After PWR-Fail On

Game Port Adress 200
Midi Port Address Disabled
3/4 Bri BD P32

Bios-Version: 1.00
POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP
ACPI Function Disabled

ACPI Suspend Type S1(POS)
Power Management User Define

Video Off Method Blank Screen
Video Off In Suspend No
Suspend Type Stop Grant
Modem use IRQ 3
Suspend Mode Disabled
HDD Power Down Disabled
Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN Instant-Off
Wake-Up by PCI card Enabled
Power On by Ring Disabled
Wake Up On LAN Enabled
Resume by Alarm Disabled
Primary IDE 0 Disabled

Primary IDE 1 Disabled
Secondary IDE 0 Disabled
Secondary IDE 1 Disabled
FDD, COM, LPT Port Disabled
PCI PIRQ(A-D)# Disabled
PNP/PCI CONFIGURATIONS
Reset Configuration Data Enabled
Resources Controlled By Auto(ESCD)
PCI/VGA Palette Snoop Disabled
4/4 Bri BD P32

Assigning the function pushbutton Operation
Display Function Description

00 Normal operation -
1 RESET AZM startup with status indicator of "--" (approx. 10
sec). If an error is discovered preventing or impeding
the AZM's standby mode (soiled photosensors) the
corresponding error or a warning will be indicated to
the status indicator.
This test function is identical to the startup when the
AZM is inserted in the dispensing position (closing the
safety switch).
2 Whole test + This test confirms the AZM-NG's mechanical
RESET components one after the other. Any error is sent to the
status indicator. This test may only be applied visually
to the functionality of the lift magnets for the single-
reject switch and the retaining combs as well as to the
electromagnetic coupling. If the test concludes without
error, a RESET is performed.
3 Test dispensing + This test applies to the cash paths and the dispensing
RESET functionality of all cassettes used and filled with notes.
First a note is removed from the uppermost cassette
and guided through the single-reject switch into the
reject compartment; thereupon one note is removed
from all cassettes and transported from the stacker
compartment into the wait position (shutter remains
closed) and finally into the reject compartment.
Any errors are indicated on the status indicator. If this
function concludes without error, a RESET is
performed.
Table 3-1: Assigning the function pushbutton
3-14 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600

Initializing the ZAC-NG Getting started
Jumper settings on the controller (ZAC-NG)
Figure 4-1: Position of the jumper field on the ZAC-NG
A 12-digit jumper area beneath the status indicator controls the following settings:
Jumper no. open connected

1* Odd parity Even parity
2 19200 baud 9600 baud
3 Parity No parity
4 See following table
5 See following table
6 Frontload Rearload
7 Not assigned (reserve) Not assigned (reserve)
8 No shutter present Shutter present
9 Ignore door sensor with Do not ignore door sensor with
encryption encryption
10 No Z-module present Z-module present
11 not assigned (reserve) not assigned (reserve)
12 not assigned (reserve) not assigned (reserve)
* Jumper 1 is located at the upper end of the controller board
Table 4-1: Jumper settings on the ZAC-NG
Jumper 4 Jumper 5
2 dispensing modules open open
4 dispensing modules open connected
5 dispensing modules connected connected
6 dispensing modules connected connected
Table 4-2: Setting the number of connected dispensing modules
4-2 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600

Functions Sensors and electromechanical components
Functions
Sensors and electromechanical components
Z-module
Figure 5-1: Sensors and electromechanical components

(both front and rearload are shown here as examples only)
Abbreviation Meaning
L Photosensor
G Bifurcated photosensor
M Motor
H Lift magnet
S Switch
RL Reflection photosensor
ST Connector
EK Electromagnetic coupling
Table 5-1: Meaning of the abbreviations
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 5-1

Sensors and electromechanical components Functions
Symbol Meaning
LM Photosensor measuring station
LAMx Extraction sensor (x = V-module position)
LKLx Cassette empty sensor (x = V-module position)
L1 controls single reject switch (reflection photosensor)
L18 Notes in collecting tray; frontload path monitoring
L19 Collecting tray note counter; frontload path monitoring and bundle reject
L21 Note counter and reject/retract monitoring
L22 Note monitoring and start position for customer direction rearload
L26 Notes in cash-out position for frontload
L27 Notes in cash-out position for rearload with Z-module
(optional photosensor in the shutter)
L28 Z-module monitoring photosensors (optional)
L29 Notes in cash-out position for rear load without Z-module
L33 Cash monitoring frontload
L35 Frontload monitoring sensors
G1 Collecting tray in home position bifurcated photosensor
G3 Collecting tray in note cash-out position
G4 Reject/retract switch position sensor in R/R cassette (beside M6)
G8 Reject rocker in home position
G9 Reject rocker in bundle reject and customer retract position
G10 Door sensor in shutter rearload (optional)
G11 Door sensor in shutter rearload (optional)
G12 Door sensor in shutter frontload (optional)
G13 Door sensor in shutter frontload (optional)
M1 Function 1 main drive motor to dispense and collect notes
M1 Function 2 note transport in the stacker
M3 Swivel motor for collecting tray and switching between the functions 1 and
2 of the main drive motor
M4 Step motor for Z-module synchronous with M1
M5 Step motor for reject rocker (bundle reject and customer retract)
M6 Retract compartment step motor; controls the switch in the R/R cassette
from outside
M7 Door motor on shutter rearload (optional)
M8 Door motor on shutter frontload (optional)
H2 Single reject switch lift magnet
HRx Retaining shaft lift magnet (x = V-module position 1-6)
S1 R/R cassette switch pushed in
RLx Cash-out cassette pushed in (x = V-module position 1-6), pressure control
STx Cassette connector (x = V-module position 1-6)
EKx Electromagnetic coupling (x = V-module position 1-6)
Table 5-2: Brief descriptions
5-2 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600

Functions Sequences in the AZM-NG (detailed description)
Check mechanical and electrical components
Individual components are checked. The following errors may occur:
<21> Measuring station faulty

<23> Bundle reject switch faulty / blocked
<24> Reject / retract drive faulty / blocked
<25> Dispensing drive faulty
<26> Dispensing / transport switch faulty / blocked
Checking the transport paths
If notes are/were in customer access, a retract is performed.
A bundle reject is performed if there is a bundle in the stacker or in the SAT-NG

when a RESET is carried out.
When the stacker is free, the transport motor is switched on for approx. 5 sec. All
recognized notes are transported into the reject cassette.
The following status messages can be output if an error occurs:
<18> Note jam in dispensing path

<19> Note jam in stacker
Check the cash shutter (optional)
If available, the cash shutter is checked by opening and closing it. Processing is
stopped with (status indicator <28>) if the test cycle does not run correctly.
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 5-11

Functions The main cash-out controller (ZAC-NG)
Position of the function groups
Jumper field
Figure 5-9: Position of the jumper field on the ZAC-NG
Function pushbutton
Status indicator 1st

position
Status indicator 2nd

position
Figure 5-10: Position of the controls on the ZAC-NG
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 5-19

The main cash-out controller (ZAC-NG) Functions
1 Battery
2 Battery on/off
3 Function p/b
4 Status indicator
5 Jumper field (for assignment see following page)
6 Beep
7 Bootstrap loader (EPROM)
8 Connection for shutter and Z-module
9 Connection for RS232C
10 Connection for power supply + 24V
11 Connection for safe door sensor
12 Connection for security separating shutter
13 "Erase CMOS parameters" jumper
Figure 5-11: Position of the function groups on the ZAC-NG
5-20 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600

Error codes during start-up Debugging
Error codes during start-up

Error code Meaning Response
off Power supply missing Switch on device
Controller faulty Replace controller
Controller test after power- None

on (the indicators flash and
change constantly)
Warning: battery too low Replace battery (controller)
Firmware start-up (RESET) None

Determining the validity of -> Error 11
the firmware -> Initialize photosensors -> CMOS
Checking the CMOS Errors L xx, 22
parameters -> Errors 23 ... 28
-> Errors 18,19, 71..9A
Testing mechanical
components
Clearing run
Error during photosensor Check photosensor xx and free it, try
xx initialization after changing again with RESET. Replace module or
the configuration or controller ?
replacing the controller (the (See also table 6 - 2)
indicator alternates
between "L" and the
photosensor number "xx")
Start-up completed without
error
Table 6-1: Error codes during system start-up
6-2 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600

Debugging Error codes during normal operation
Error codes during normal operation

Error code Meaning Description / Remedy
off No power supply Switch on the system
-- Startup (after RESET or Wait until startup has ended (approx.
electronics selftest) 10 sec)
00 No error -
01 Software faulty Select "1" at the function pushbutton
(RESET)
10 Controller faulty During AZM startup the power-up test

discovered a serious error in the ZAC's
electronics. The controller must be
replaced.
11 Software missing Perform download
(download)
12 Separating switch open Close separating switch (bring the AZM
into the cash-out position in the safe)
13 Device lock on A retract was executed during which the
money not withdrawn by the customer
was deposited in the horizontal transport
of the SAT. The software then
suppresses all transport functions of the
AZM.
Remove the customer money from the
SAT and reset the system block through
the system software.
14 AZM-NG minimum In order to operate, the AZM requires at
configuration missing least one ready cash-out cassette and
the reject/retract cassette (RR cass.).
Install the RR cassette and filled cash-
out cassette(s) and log on through the
system software.
Table 6-2: Error codes in normal operation (part 1)
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 6-3

Error codes during normal operation Debugging

18 Note jam during dispensing During dispensing, a note jam was
established in the cash-out areas or the
vertical transports of the V-modules or in
the stacker transport (photosensors
LAMx, LM, L1, L21, L19, L18, L22).
Check the note path from the cassettes
to the stacker or reject compartment for
jammed notes.
Check that the connections to the ZAC
and photosensor elements sit correctly.
Then bring the AZM into the cash-out
position in the safe, closing the safety
switch and reinitializing the AZM
(RESET). Should the status indicator
continue to display "18" after
reinitialization, the jam was not
eliminated effectively or a new jam has
occurred.
Using the test program, check the
selftest job "Status of the photosensors".
If a photosensor (exc. the cassette-
empty photosensors) is reported
"covered", ascertain the cause and
eliminate the error.
If no error can be found and "18"
continues to be displayed after a
subsequent startup, the SAT, the
corresponding V-module, or the
controller must be replaced.
6-4 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600


19 Note jam in stacker A note jam has been detected in the
horizontal transport of the SAT, or the
note bundle fanned out too much during
transport.
Remove all notes in the note path from
the stacker compartment to the note
dispenser or at the entrance to the reject
cassette.
and the photosensor elements sit
correctly.
reinitialization the jam was not eliminated
effectively.
Using the test program, check the
selftest job "Status of the photosensors".
If one of the photosensors L18 to L35 is
reported "covered", ascertain the cause
and eliminate the error.
If no error can be found and "19"
continues to be displayed, the SAT or
the controller must be replaced.
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 6-5


20 Single reject switch (H2) Check the SAT in the area of the single
faulty/blocked reject switch for jammed/torn notes and
remove them. Check the movability of
the single reject switch by pressing and
releasing the anchor in the lift magnet H2
(with the RR cassette removed check the
movement of the single reject switch's
fingers from the rear through the RR
chute).
Select test function 2 (mechanism test)
at the function pushbutton and observe
the activation of the single reject switch.
If the lift magnet H2 does not more or
only partially move, the SAT or the
If the magnet moves with the full lift, the
AZM may be put into operation again.
Should the error reoccur after a short
time and no cause be determined after
the single reject switch has been
rechecked, the SAT or the controller
must be replaced.
21 Measuring station faulty Replace top double V-module, the
dispensing unit NG with DMS or
controller
22 Photosensor amplifier faulty Check all note paths from the cassettes
or photosensor initialization to the stacker, from the stacker to the
not successful note dispenser, and at the entrance into
the RR cassette for jammed/torn notes
and remove these.
reinitialization, the controller must be
replaced.
6-6 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600


23 Bundle reject switch (M5) The bundle reject rocker could not be set
faulty/blocked to the correct position.
Check the area of the bundle reject
rocker for jammed/torn notes and
remove these.
Check that all transport belts in the
SAT's horizontal transport run on the
rollers.
Check the movability of the bundle reject
rocker by rotating the eccentric shaft
manually to the driving gear wheel.
Bring the AZM into the cash-out position
in the safe (closing the safety switch)
and after the startup select test function
2. If this test function again concludes
with the status indicator "23", the SAT or
the controller must be replaced;
otherwise the AZM may again be put into
operation.
24 Reject/retract drive (M6) The compartment selection reject/retract
faulty/blocked in the RR cassette could not be set
successfully.
Remove the RR cassette and check the
movability of the retract compartment in
the RR cassette.
and the motor M6 are correct.
Check that the bifurcated photosensors
on the toothed segment of the switching
lever sit correctly.
in the safe (closing the safety switch).
Reinsert the RR cassette, select test
function 2 (mechanism test) at the
function pushbutton, and check the
movement of the RR drive (M6). If the
motor does not move or the end limits of
the lever are not reached (status
indicator "24" reappears), the SAT or the
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 6-7


25 Dispensing drive (M1) After a short runup time, the main motor
faulty/blocked (M1) could not be geared down to
minimum rpm. Select "1" (RESET) at the
function pushbutton.
If the motor attempts a runup but emits
loud noises during the process, check
the note paths of the AZM for a serious
note jam. Examine the entrance into the
RR cassette for notes jammed there.
The green handwheel must turn
anticlockwise without being forced.
and after starting up the AZM select test
function pushbutton. Pay especial
attention to motor noises and the
transport function of the main motor.
If the main motor does not run or this
test function concludes again with the
status indicator "25", the SAT or the
controller must be replaced; otherwise
the AZM may again be put into
operation.
26 Switching Check the SAT in the area of the stacker
dispensing/transport (M3) for jammed/torn notes and remove them.
faulty/blocked Bring the AZM into the cash-out position
and after starting up the AZM select test
function pushbutton. If this test function
concludes again with the status indicator
"26", the SAT or the controller must be
replaced.
6-8 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600


28 Shutter error Examine the cash-out area of the SAT
(or Z-module) and shutter for foreign
matter obstructing the movement of the
shutter.
(closing the safety switch).
Select test function 2 (mechanism test)
at the function pushbutton and observe
the movement of the shutter. Shutter
errors can be eliminated without hazard
during the test function whereafter test
function 2 is to be performed without
intervention in the shutter movement. If
this test concludes again with the status
indicator "28", the shutter or the
29 Cash-out photosensor Examine the note dispenser of the SAT
covered (manipulation) and shutter for foreign matter impairing
the function of the cash-out photosensor.
For rearload with Z-module the cash-out
photosensor is located in the shutter; for
all other configurations, in the folding
output section of the stacker transport.
Check that the connectors to the ZAC sit
correctly (for the configuration with the Z-
module the connectors to the Z-module
and shutter are also important).
and select test function "1" (RESET). If
after the startup the status indicator
again displays "29", the shutter (with Z-
module), the SAT (configuration without
Z-module), or the controller must be
replaced.
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 6-9


3x Too many bundle rejects Bundle rejects may be caused e.g. by
(x = 1-6) extremely obliquely dispensed or
uncontrolled note stacking or by
disturbances of the photosensors.
This error may be ignored at the first
occurrence (warning). If however this
error has occurred often, the procedure
is as follows:
1. Remove the cassette from V-module
"x" and check the inserted notes: are
the first few notes warped along one
side?
2. After removing the cassette, check the
cash-out area in the dispensing
module for jamming by torn notes.
3. Check the transport path from
cassette "x" to the stacker
compartment for jammed/torn notes.
Has a transport belt slipped from the
rollers?
4. Check that the connectors to the ZAC
and individual photosensor elements
sit correctly.
5. Check any stiffness in the lift of the
magnet for the retaining comb by
pressing the anchor (if necessary
check the movement of the magnet
with test function 2 (mechanism test)).
If these tests do not return an error and
the status 3x continues, the
corresponding V-module or the controller
must be replaced.
6-10 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600


4x Note extraction impossible A) A note could not be removed from
or faulty note pressure with cassette "x" or
a new cassette (x = 1-6) B) The requisite pressure could not be
applied as the cassette was inserted.
Procedure in case A):

1. Remove cassette "x" and check the
inserted notes: the notes must lie
vertically in the cassette. Are the first
few notes warped? The convex side of
the note must point to the pressure
carriage. Are the first few notes stuck
together or caught in their creases?
2. After removing the cassette examine
the cash-out area in the V-module for
jammed/torn notes.
3. Check that the connectors to the ZAC
and coupling of module "x" sit
correctly.
4. Now insert the filled cassette in the V-
module "x" and after closing the safety
switch select "3" (test dispensing) at
the function pushbutton. If this test
concludes again with error code 4x,
reselect test dispensing, checking the
function of the coupling and retainer
comb. If the coupling or retainer
magnet is not activated, the V-module
or the controller must be replaced.
--> continued overleaf
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 6-11


4x Note extraction impossible Procedure in case B):
or faulty note pressure with 1. Remove cassette "x" and check the
a new cassette (x = 1-6) inserted notes: the notes must lie
(continued)
vertically in the cassette. Are the first
few notes warped? The convex side of
the note must point to the pressure
carriage. If necessary, move notes
from the back of the cassette to the
front. If the note stack rubs too much
against the side note guides (laterally
projecting notes crumpled back) the
note stack must be realigned.
2. Reinsert cassette. Is the pressure
carriage driven audibly forwards?
- If there is no noise, check that the
connectors to the ZAC and
cassette
sit correctly.
Perform the test with another
cassette: if the motor is still not
driven, then the controller is defect.
- If there is motor noise yet the error
message 4x reappears after a few
seconds (together with three
beeps), remove the cassette and
check the lift of the extractor shaft
manually for stiffness. Remove,
open, and manually place the
cassette into the dispensing
position. Check the movement of
the retract bar for stiffness.
3. If no cause can be ascertained and
this error also appears with another
cassette in this V-module, the quality
of the pressure sensor must be
examined with the test program and
selftest job "Query Status Cassette
Pressure" (DYQ) - in the event of error
the V-module or the controller must be
replaced.
6-12 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600


5x Too many bad notes Dispensing from cassette "x" established
(x = 1-6) too many double or too wide or too small
notes.
Remove cassette "x" and check that the
correct type of notes are inserted. Check
the notes for warping or adhesion.
Reinsert cassette and restart application.
If dispensing diverts many "good" notes
via single reject or the error "4x"
reappears after a short interval, a new
reference value must be determined for
this note type. If the error cannot be
eliminated, the V-module or the
If these diverted notes are genuine
multiple removals (check contents of the
RR cassette), narrow the dispensing gap
by way of testing: rotate the adjusting
wheel on the dispensing
unit by half a tooth higher.
Important: If there are loud noises,
repeated cash-out attempts at
dispensing, damage to the dispensed
notes (rubbed or scratched patches), or
even error status "4x" during subsequent
dispensing, this modification must be
immediately reversed.
6x Cassette faulty (x = 1-6) The note data stored in cassette "x"
cannot be read or rewritten.
Check that the connectors to the ZAC
and cassette connector sit correctly. If
the error also occurs with another
cassette in this V-module, the controller
must be replaced.
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 6-13


70 Photosensor measuring The two photosensors of the thickness
station soiled measuring station (LM) must be cleaned
(use compressed air or a brush). Call
function "1" (RESET) at the function
pushbutton. If after the dispenser startup
the status code "7x" reappears, the
uppermost V-module or the controller
must be replaced.
Examine the degree of soiling for all
photosensors with the test program via
selftest job "DYK" (Query Status
PhotoSensor Photosensor Amplifier):
photosensors returning the status "3"
(TKD error) must be cleaned. Status
improvement can be queried after
RESET.
Note: The AZM can still operate after the
first occurrence of this error until
operation is automatically deactivated
with increasing soiling.
7x Dispenser sensor soiled or A) If a cassette can be inserted error-free
pressure sensor faulty in V-module "x" (single beep), the
(x = 1-6) error message indicates a heavily
soiled photosensor "dispensing
sensor" in V-module "x" (LAMx) that
must be cleaned. Finally RESET
(bring the AZM into the dispensing
position).
Note: The AZM can still operate after
the first occurrence of this error until
B) If a cassette cannot be inserted in V-
module "x" (also no beep after several
seconds) then after the connectors to
the ZAC and pressure sensors (RLx)
have been checked the V-module or
6-14 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600


8x Empty sensor soiled Clean the photosensor "KLx" in the
(x = 1-6) corresponding V-module and the
corresponding prism in the cassette's
pressure carriage. Finally RESET (bring
the AZM into the dispensing position).
RESET.
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 6-15


90 SAT: Photosensor L1 Open up the stacker transport and
soiled remove the shaft with the stacker
wheels. Using a brush carefully clean all
of the shouldered surfaces of the two
large deflection rollers under rotation of
the green handwheel.
Now reinsert the stacker wheels, close
the stacker, and replace the AZM into
the cash-out position. If after dispenser
startup (RESET) the status indicator
continues to display error code "90", the
stacker must be replaced.
RESET.
6-16 February 95, U60761-J-Z1-1-7600


Photosensor soiled Photosensor "9x" is soiled and
91 SAT: photosensor L18 urgently needs cleaning: using a
brush or compressed air remove
92 SAT: photosensor L19 (P) dust deposits on the surfaces of the
93 SAT: photosensor L21 (P) corresponding sender/receiver
94 SAT: photosensor L22 (elements with transparent or purple-
tinted plastic housings) and if
95 SAT-F: photosensor L26 (P)
necessary the corresponding prism
96 SAT-F: photosensor L33 (P) (P) (2 transparent surfaces opposite
97 SAT-F: photosensor L35 (P) the sender/receiver). After cleaning
98 Shutter: photosensor L27 (P) bring the AZM into the base position
and wait for startup or select "1"
99 Z-module: photosensor L28 (P) (RESET) at the function pushbutton.
9A SAT-R: photosensor L29 (P) Examine the degree of soiling for all
photosensors with the test program
via selftest job "DYK" (Query Status
RESET.
Note: The AZM can still operate
after the first occurrence of error
code "9x" until operation is
automatically deactivated with
increasing soiling (the status
indicator also displays "9x" in this
case).
U60761-J-Z1-1-7600, February 95 6-17

Central cash-out controller (ZAC) Cash-out module with SAT 2X00
Central cash-out controller (ZAC)
Assignment of ZAC
4
1
5
14
1 Battery jumper
2 Reset jumper
3 Function button
4 Status display (two 7-segment displays, 1st position uppermost)
Example: Status message ‘14’
5 Jumper panel 1 – 14
8-6 ProCash 2100 - Service Manual SNP: 01750030891 A

Display Function Description of function

00 Normal mode -
1 RESET Start-up cash-out module with status display
‘—‘ (approx. 10 sec.). If an error is detected
that hinders or threatens the operational
readiness of the cash-out module (dirty
photosensors), the relevant error or a warning
is then indicated on the status display.
This test function is identical with the start-up
when the cash-out module is inserted into
dispensing position (close the safety isolation
switch).
2 Overall test In this test the mechanical components of the
+ RESET cash-out module are activated in sequence.
Any errors detected are shown on the status
display. The lifting magnets for the retaining
shaft and the electromagnetic clutch can only
be subjected to a visual function test in this
case. If no errors are detected during the test,
a RESET is then carried out.
3 Test dispensing + In this test the cash paths and the dispensing
RESET function of all installed cassettes containing
banknotes are checked: two banknotes are
withdrawn from the top cassette and one note
is withdrawn from each of the other cassettes;
these are then transported by the collecting
tray to the wait position (shutter remains
closed) and then to the reject compartment.
Any errors detected are shown on the status
display. If no errors are detected in this
function, a RESET is then carried out.

Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Central cash-out controller (ZAC)
Jumper settings
Table 1:
Jumper no. Open Closed
1 odd Parity even Parity
2 19200 Baud 9600 Baud
3 Parity No Parity
4 Dispenser module
5 See table 2
6 front load rear load
7 No horizontal transport Horizontal transport facility
facility available available
8 No shutter available Shutter available
9 Ignore door sensor when Do not ignore door sensor when
encryption used encryption used
10 No Z module available Z module available
11 For dispensing modules
see table 2
12 For variant see table 3
13 For variant see table 3
14 Reserve
Jumper 1 is located on top of the controller board.

i
Default settings
This jumper assignment is mandatory for cash-out module SAT 2X00.
SNP: 01750030891 A ProCash 2100 - Service Manual 8-9

Table 2:
Number of dispenser Jumper no.4 Jumper no.5 Jumper no.11
modules
1 dispenser module open open closed
2 dispenser modules open open open
3 dispenser modules open closed closed
4 dispenser modules open closed open
5 dispenser modules closed closed open
6 dispenser modules closed open open
Reserve closed open closed
Reserve closed closed closed
Table 3:
Jumper no.12 Jumper no.13
No variant open open
Scope extension * closed open
IBM 4733i Emulation * open closed
Reserve closed closed
* in planning

Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00
Overview of sensors and electromechanical components
G11/G10 L28 L27
SM7
SM4
L21
SM6
M1 G4
G2 G8/G9
G1/G3
H6
SM1 SM5
L1 L18
S1
MDMS II
HR 1
RL 1
LKL 1
LAM 1
EK 1
HR 2
RL 2
LKL 2
LAM 2
EK 2
The overview of sensors and electromechanical components is based

i on the example of a Frontload model.
The designations also apply to the Rearload.

Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Function principle
Explanation of abbreviations
EKx Electromagnetic clutch (x = dispenser module item)
G Bifurcated photosensor
H Lifting magnet
HRx Lifting magnet retaining shaft (x = dispenser module item)
L Photosensor
LAMx Dispensing sensor (x = dispenser module item)
LKLx Cassette empty indicator (x = dispenser module item)
M Motor
MDMS II Mechanical thickness measurement station II
RLx Reflex photosensor (x = dispenser module item), Pressure
controller
S Switch
SM Stepper motor
STx Cassette connector (x = dispenser module item)
Characters Meaning
L1 Note counter, controls stacker wheel
L18 Notes in collecting tray
L21 Monitoring reject/retract
L27 Notes in output position, Frontload / Rearload
L28 Cash monitoring photosensor in 2X00 stacker
G1/G3 Bifurcated photosensor collecting tray in home position
G2 Bifurcated photosensor for stacker wheel position
G4 Position sensor for reject/retract cassette (next to H6)
G8/G9 Bifurcated photosensor 2X00 lifting cam in collecting tray in
home position/ note output
G10/G11 Bifurcated photosensor locking shutter open / closed
M1 Function 1 main drive motor for dispensing and collecting
notes
M1 Function 2 drive for drawing notes into the reject/ retract
cassette
H6 Lifting magnet, retract compartment
S1 Reject/retract cassette inserted switch
SM1 Stepper motor for driving the stacker wheel

Function principle Cash-out module with SAT 2X00
Characters Meaning
SM4 Stepper motor for 2X00-stacker
SM5 Stepper motor for lifting cam drive in collecting tray
SM6 Stepper motor for collecting tray pressure rake
SM7 Stepper motor for locking shutter

Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Description of cash path (Frontload)
Description of cash path (Frontload)
Cash-out
L28 L27
G10
G11
SM7
SM4
L21
5
SM6
G1/G3
M1
G8/G9 4
S1
SM5
3
L1 1 2
L18
MDMS II
HR
RL
LKL
LAM
EK

Description of cash path (Frontload) Cash-out module with SAT 2X00
− Dispensing of the required number of notes from the cassette. Drive force
provided by motor (M1). Controlled and monitored by the electromagnetic
clutch (EK), the dispensing sensor (LAM), the reflex photosensor (RL), the
photosensor for cassette empty signaling (LKL) and the lifting magnet
retaining cam (HR).
− Transport of the individual notes to the measuring station (MDMS II).
− The notes are placed on the lifting cam (3) in the collecting compartment
by means of the stacker wheel (1). Monitoring is provided by (L1) and
(L18).
− When all notes are in the collecting tray, the pressure fingers (2) are turned
onto the notes of the lifting cam by means of the motor (SM6). The
deflector (4) swings to output position and the guide fingers (5) turn
downwards. Controlled by (G1/G3).
− The drive momentum provided by the motor (SM5) causes the lifting cam to
move into the upper position in the collecting tray where the notes are
transferred to the already running additional transport facility and
transported to the wait position under the photosensor (L28).
− Open the shutter by means of a motor (SM7). Controlled by photosensor
(G10/G11).
− Transport the notes to the removal position under the photosensor (L27).
− Close the shutter after the cash has been removed.

Bundle retract when notes are not removed
L28 L27
G10
G11
SM7
SM4
L21
5
SM6
G1/G3 D 6
M1
G8/G9 4
E S1
SM5
3
L1 1 2
L18
MDMS II
HR
RL
LKL
LAM
EK
− The sequence is the same as for cash-out.

− The notes are not removed within the waiting time.
− Execution of the bundle retract.

i The sequence for the bundle retract depends on application

programming.
There are two options/ sequences for bundle retract:
- Bundle retract to the retract compartment
- Bundle retract to the collecting tray
Bundle retract to the retract box

− The bundle is drawn back to the wait position under the photosensor (L28).
− The shutter is closed.
− The bundle is transported to the retract compartment (a). Monitoring is by
means of photosensor (L21).
The device is once again ready to operate.

i
Bundle retract to the collecting tray

− The bundle is drawn back to the wait position under the photosensor (L28).
− The shutter is closed.
− The bundle is transported to the collecting tray (b). Monitoring is by means
of photosensor (L18).
− The device sets the device block internally (status display 13) and goes
out of action.

Bundle reject
L28 L27
G10
G11
SM7
SM4
L21
5
SM6
G1/G3
M1
G8/G9 4
S1
SM5
3
L1 1 2
L18
MDMS II
HR
RL
LKL
LAM
EK
retaining cam (HR).
− The dispensing procedure is aborted if an error is detected. No more notes
are withdrawn from the cassette.

− The faulty note or the last withdrawn note is placed on the lifting cam (3) in
the collecting tray by means of the stacker wheel (1). Monitoring is by
means of (L1) and (L18).
transported to a stop position above the deflector (4).
− The lifting cam (3) moves downwards. The deflector (4) and the retaining
finger (5) switch to reject position.
− The bundle is transported to the reject cassette. Monitoring is by means of
photosensor (L21).

Bundle reject from wait position
L28 L27
G10
G11
SM7
SM4
L21
5
SM6
G1/G3
M1
G8/G9 4
S1
SM5
3
L1 1 2
L18
MDMS II
HR
RL
LKL
LAM
EK
retaining cam (HR).
− The notes are placed on the lifting cam (3) in the collecting compartment
by means of the stacker wheel (1). Monitoring is provided by (L18).

Error codes Cash-out module with SAT 2X00
transported to the wait position under the photosensor (L28).
− The lifting cam (3) moves downwards. The deflector (4) and the retaining
finger (5) switch to reject position.
− The bundle is transported to the reject cassette. Monitoring is by means of
photosensor (L21).
Error codes
The texts corresponding to the error codes listed in this section do not match
those displayed on the monitor or operator panel in every case or with the
texts in the operating system specific error message manuals.
Because of the constructional differences between the standard-cash-out
module and the solution for the ProCash 2100 and ProCash 2000 systems, it
is not possible to provide a standard text for all solutions.
For this reason, the following texts have been specially written for the above-
mentioned systems.

Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Start-up phase
Start-up phase
No. Meaning Reaction
Off No power supply Switch on device
Controller test after power None

on
(the displays flash and
change continuously)
Warning: Battery too weak Replace battery
Start firmware (RESET) None

Determine validity of -> Error 11
firmware -> Initialisation of photosensors
Check CMOS parameters -> CMOS
Errors L xx, 22
Test mechanical -> Errors 25 ... 28
components
Clearing run -> Errors 18,19, 29, 71..99

Start-up phase Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

Error during photosensor Check and clear photosensor
xx initialisation after change of xx, try RESET again.
configuration or Replace module or controller if
replacement of controller necessary.
(the display alternates
(See also table 6 - 2)
between ‘L’ and the
photosensor number ‘xx’)
Start-up complete without
error
Microcontroller None
burn / load FW
Comparison after load None
Successful loading of None

microcontrollers

Cash-out module with SAT 2X00 Normal mode
Normal mode
Error Meaning Explanation/Measures
code
Off No mains power supply Switch on
Power-up (after reset or Wait until power up is complete
electronic self-test) (approx. 10 sec.).
No error -
Software faulty Select ‘1’ on function button (reset).
Controller faulty When starting the cash-out module

the power-up test detected a serious
fault in the electronics of central cash-
out controller II. The controller must
be replaced.
Software missing Reload firmware.
(download)
Safety switch open Close the safety switch (place cash-

out module in safe in cash-out
position).
Device block pending A retract has been carried out in
which the customer’s forgotten cash
is deposited in the collecting tray.
After this, all transport functions of the
cash-out module are blocked by
software means.
Remove the notes from the collecting
tray and then reset the device block
using the system software.
Cash-out module In order to operate, the cash-out
minimum configuration module requires at least one ready
missing cash-out cassette and the reject/
retract cassette.
Insert the reject/retract cassette and
filled cash-out cassette(s) and
register them using the system
software.

Normal mode Cash-out module with SAT 2X00

code
Cash jam during A cash jam was detected during
dispensing dispensing in the dispensing areas,
vertical transport facilities of the
dispenser modules or in the 2X00
stacker (photosensors LAMx, L18, L1 or
thickness sensor of mechanical
thickness measuring station MDMS II).
Check the cash path from the cassettes
to the collecting tray for jammed notes/
scraps.
Make sure the connectors to central
cash-out controller II or to the
photosensor elements fit correctly. Then
return the cash-out module to cash-out
position in the safe, thereby closing the
safety isolation switch and starting the
cash-out module again (reset). If the
status display continues to show ‘18’
after this start, then either the jam has
not been eliminated or another jam has
occurred.
Use the appropriate self-test program to
test the ‘Status of the Photosensors’
(DYK). If a photosensor (other than the
‘cassette empty’ photosensors’) is
registered as ‘occluded’, then determine
the cause and eliminate the fault.
If you cannot find a fault and ‘18’ still
appears after the next restart, then the
2X00 stacker, the relevant dispensing
unit or the controller should be replaced.


code
Cash jam in the 2X00 A jam has been detected in the 2X00
stacker/ collecting tray stacker or in the inlet area of the reject
cassette. Remove all banknotes in the
cash path from the collecting tray to the
cash output or in the reject cassette
inlet.
Make sure the connectors to central
cash-out controller II or to the
photosensor elements and to the
electronics of the 2X00 stacker fit
correctly.
Then return the cash-out module to
cash-out position in the safe, thereby
closing the safety isolation switch and
starting the cash-out module again
(reset). If the status display continues
to show ‘19’ after this start, then either
the jam has not been eliminated or
another jam has occurred.
Use the appropriate self-test program
to test the ‘Status of the Photosensors’
(DYK). If one of the photosensors L18 -
L28 is registered as ‘occluded’, then
determine the cause and eliminate the
fault.
If you cannot find a fault and ‘19’ still
appears after the next restart, then the
2X00 stacker, the relevant dispensing
unit or the controller should be
replaced.
Thickness measurement The dispensing unit in the uppermost
station MDMS II faulty double dispensing module or the


code
Photosensor Check all cash paths from the cassettes to the
amplifier is collecting tray, from the collecting tray to the cash
faulty or output and the inlet area of the RR cassette for
photosensor jammed notes/ scraps and remove these as
initialisation is necessary.
unsuccessful Then return the cash-out module to cash-out
position in the safe, thereby closing the safety
isolation switch and starting the cash-out module
again (reset). If the status indicator continues to
show ‘22’ after restart, then the controller must be
replaced.
Retract drive Empty the reject cassette (see the “Empty reject
mechanism cassette” section).
faulty / lifting Check that the retract compartment can move
magnet H6 within the reject cassette.
blocked Replace the 2X00 stacker or controller.
Dispensing It was not possible to bring the main motor (M1)
drive up to minimum speed after a short start-up
mechanism period. Check that the connector to central cash-
(M1) faulty/ out controller II fits correctly. Select ‘1’ (Reset) on
blocked the function button.
If the motor tries to start, but loud running sounds
can be heard: check the cash paths of the cash-
out module for a major cash jam. Check the inlet
to the reject/retract cassette for jammed notes.
Set the cash-out module in the safe to cash-out
position (security isolation switch closed) and
select test function 2 (mechanical test) on the
function button after starting up the cash-out
module: monitor running sounds and the
transport function of the main motor.
If the main motor does not turn or if this test
function once again ends with status display ‘25’,
then the 2X00 stacker or the controller must be
replaced, otherwise the cash-out module cannot
be operated.


code
Controller for Check the 2X00 stacker in the area of the
pressure rake collecting tray for jammed cash/ scraps and
of lifting cam remove these as necessary.
faulty/ blocked
(SM6 or SM5)
position (security isolation switch closed) and
select test function 2 (mechanical test) on the
function button after starting up the cash-out
module: if this test function once again ends with
status display ‘26’, then the 2X00 stacker or the
Shutter error Check the output area of the 2X00 stacker and
shutter for foreign matter that impede the
movement of the shutter flap.
Check that the connectors to the central cash-out
controller II and to the electronics of the 2X00
stacker fit correctly.
Set the cash-out module to cash-out position
(security isolation switch closed).
Select test function 2 (mechanical test) on the
function button and monitor the movement of the
shutter. It is safe to clear the shutter even while
the test function is running – then repeat test
function 2 without intervening in the movement of
the shutter. If this test again ends with status ‘28’,
then the 2X00 stacker or controller must be
replaced.


code
Output Check the note output area of the 2X00 stacker-
photosensor is and shutter for foreign matter that impede the
occluded function of the output photosensor.
(manipulation)
Check that the connectors to the central cash-out
controller II and to the electronics of the 2X00
stacker fit correctly.
position (safety isolation switch closed) and select
‘1’ (Reset) wit the function button. If the status
display still shows ‘29’ after the cash-out module
has been started, then the 2X00 stacker or
controller should be replaced.


code
Too many Bundle rejects are executed on the ProCash
bundle rejects 2X00 when the measuring station detects a faulty
x
(x=1-6) banknote. The cause may be banknotes that are
dispensed extremely obliquely or in an
uncontrolled manner, or photosensor faults.
This error can be ignored the first time it occurs
(warning). However, if this error has already
occurred several times, proceed as follows:
1.) Remove the cassette from dispenser module
‘x’ and check the banknote inset. Is the right type
of banknote in the cassette? Are the first notes
crumpled on one side? Is the pressure on the first
notes the same on both sides?
2.) With the cassette removed, check the
dispensing area in the dispensing module for
jammed scraps.
3.) Check the transport path from cassette ‘x’ to
the collecting tray for jammed cash/ scraps. Has
the transport belt run off the rollers?
4.) Check that the connectors to central cash-out
controller II and to the various photosensor
elements fit correctly.
5.) Check the correct lift of the magnet for the
retaining cam by pressing on the anchor (if
necessary check the movement of the magnet in
test function 2 (mechanical test).
6.) Determine the reference value.


code
Cash cannot be A) No cash could be dispensed from cassette
x dispensed or ‘x’ or
incorrect B) The required pressure could not be
pressure on established when inserting the cassette.
notes when Procedure in case A):
inserting a 1.) Remove cassette ‘x‘ and check the
cassette (x=1-6) banknote inset. The notes must be upright in
the cassette. Are the first notes very crumpled?
Curved notes should bend towards the
pressure carriage. Are the first notes stuck or
jammed together?
2.) When the cassette is removed, check the
dispensing area in the dispenser module for
jammed cash/ scraps.
3.) Check that the connectors to central cash-
out controller II and to the clutch on dispenser
module ‘x’ fit correctly.
4.) Then insert filled cassette into dispenser
module ‘x’ and select ‘3’ (test dispensing0 on
the function button with the safety isolation
switch closed. If this test again ends with error
code 4x, select test dispensing again and
check the function of the clutch and retaining
cam. If the clutch or retaining cam is not
activated, the dispensing unit or controller must
be replaced.
Procedure in case B):
1.) Remove cassette ‘x’ and check the
banknote inset.‘ The notes must be upright in
the cassette. Are the first notes very crumpled?
Í Continued on the next page

Error code Meaning Explanation/Measures

Cash could not Curved notes should bend towards the
be dispensed or pressure carriage! If necessary, transfer
x
faulty note notes from the back of the cassette to the
pressure when front. If the stack of banknotes rubs
(Continued) inserting a excessively against the side note guides
cassette (x=1-6) (notes protrude to the side or are bent
backwards), then the stack of notes should
be better aligned.
2.) Re-insert the cassette. Can you hear
the pressure carriage moving forward?
- If you cannot hear any noise, check that
the connectors to the central cash-out
controller II and to the cassette fir correctly.
Carry out the test using a different
cassette: If the motor still is not activated,
then the controller is faulty.
- If you can hear the motor, but error
message 4x still appears after a few
seconds (together with three acoustic
signals), remove the cassette and check
the lift of the dispensing shaft by hand.
Remove the cassette, open it and place it
in dispensing position by hand. Check the
smooth movement of the return bar.
3.) If you cannot find the cause of the
problem and if the same problem occurs in
this dispenser module with a different
cassette, then it is necessary to check the
quality of the pressure sensor using the
DYQ self-test program ‘check status of
cassette pressure’. If an error occurs, the
dispensing unit or controller should be
replaced.


code
Too many More than 5 notes were found to measure
x poor quality incorrectly during dispensing from one cassette
notes (too long, too short, too oblique).
Is the wrong denomination in the cassette? If
necessary determine a new reference value.
Cassette is The banknote data stored in cassette ‘x’ cannot be
x faulty read or re-written.
Check that the connector to central cash-out
controller II and the cassette connector fit
correctly. If the fault also occurs with a different
cassette in this dispenser module, then the
controller should be replaced.
Thickness Check thickness measuring station MDMS II for
measuring jammed cash/ scraps.
station
Check connectors to the MDMS II and to the
MDMS II is not
controller.
ready to
operate After this, select function ‘1’ (Reset) on the
function button. If status code ‘70’ reappears after
the dispenser is started, then the dispenser unit
with the measuring station or controller must be
replaced.


code
Dispensing A) If a cassette can be inserted in dispenser
sensor is dirty module ‘x’ without error (single acoustic signal),
x
or pressure then the error message indicates a very dirty
sensor is faulty ‘dispenser sensor’ (LAMx) photosensor in
(x=1-6) dispenser module ‘x’ which must be cleaned.
Then execute a reset (set cash-out module to
dispensing position).
Use the ‘DYK’ self-test program (check status of
photosensors/photosensor amplifiers) to check the
level of dirt on all photosensors: Photosensors
that show status ‘3’ (Service error) must be
cleaned. The improvement in status can be
checked after reset.
Note: The cash-out module can continue to
operate the first time this error occurs until
operation is automatically discontinued due to
accumulated dirt
B) If it is not possible to insert a cassette in
dispenser module ‘x’ (and there is no acoustic
signal even after a few seconds), then the
dispensing unit or controller must be replaced
after inspection of the connectors to central cash-
out controller II and to the pressure sensors (RLx).


code
Cassette Clean photosensor ‘KLx’ in the relevant dispenser
x empty sensor module and the associated prism in the pressure
is dirty (x=1-6) carriage. Then execute a reset (set cash-out
module to dispensing position).
Use the ‘DYK’ self-test program (check status of
photosensors/photosensor amplifiers) to check the
level of dirt on all photosensors: Photosensors
that show status ‘3’ (Service error) must be
cleaned. The improvement in status can be
checked after reset.
operate the first time this error occurs until
operation is automatically discontinued due to
accumulated dirt.


code
Photosensor is Photosensor ‘9x’ is dirty and is in urgent need
dirty of cleaning: the accumulation of dust on the
surfaces of the relevant transmitter/ receiver
and the associated prism should be removed
with a brush or with compressed air. After
2X00 stacker: cleaning, set the cash-out module to home
Photosensor L1 position again and wait for start-up or select ‘1’
(Reset) on the function button.
2X00 stacker: Use the ‘DYK’ self-test program (check status

Photosensor L18 of photosensors/photosensor amplifiers) to
check the level of dirt on all photosensors:
Photosensors that show status ‘3’ (Service
2X00 stacker: error) must be cleaned. The improvement in
Photosensor L21 status can be checked after reset.

2X00 stacker: operate the first time error code ‘9x’ occurs,
Photosensor L27 until operation is automatically discontinued
due to accumulated dirt (status ‘9x’ is also
displayed in this case).
2X00 stacker:
Photosensor L28

Function and Integration CMD controller
Connectors on the CMD controller
Connector Description
X1 Mechanical thickness sensor
X2 Shutter
X3 Transport module
X4 V.24 interface from PC
X5 USB interface from PC
X6 Door switch and safety switch in safe
X7 V.24 interface SCOP card (AVT2800)
X8 Special electronics module
X9 24 V power supply
X10 24 V connection to SCOP card (AVT2800)
X11 Motor M1
01750060162 B Cash Media Dispenser Version 4 - Service Manual 2-25

CMD controller Function and Integration
Connector Description
X12 Additional motor attached to the main drive assembly for single
reject (optional)
X13 Clamp motors
X14 Motors and lifting magnets on stacker / left and right side panel
X15 EEPROM on stacker
X16 Hall sensors on stacker
X17 Hybrid photosensors on single reject
X18 Hybrid photosensors on stacker / left side panel
X30 Dispensing unit
X31 Dispensing unit
X32 Hybrid photosensors and photosensors on stacker / right side
panel
X33 Position switch and extensions
X40 Jumpers
The pin assignments are described in the "Pin Assignments" chapter.
2-26 Cash Media Dispenser Version 4 - Service Manual 01750060162 B

Start-up Initializing the CMD-V4
Jumper settings on the CMD controller
Position of the jumper array on the CMD controller
1 Jumper array on the CMD controller

Initializing the CMD-V4 Start-up
The 10-position jumper array beneath the status display controls the following
settings:
Jumper Signal Open Closed

1 Door Ignore door sensor Do not ignore door sensor
when encryption is when encryption is used
used
2 SCOP Deactivate SCOP Activate SCOP handling
handling
3 Jump A Set standard line parameter (19200,8,2,ODD);
trigger reset (remove the jumper afterwards)
4 Jump B Two double One double dispensing
dispensing units in a unit in a 4-cassette
4-cassette housing housing
5 Jump C Reserved for future use
6 Jump D NCR Emulation is active
7 Clear CMOS Clear CMOS; trigger reset (remove the jumper
afterwards)
8 NEN SE controls power NEN signal is generated
saving mode by the CMD-V4
9 Battery CMOS backup CMOS backup battery
battery inactive active
10 Jump PLD Spare input for the programmable logic device
Jumper 1 is located at the top of the controller board.
Door / SCOP should only ever be selected with one jumper.

If this is not done (both jumpers are inserted) standard encryption is overlaid by
SCOP handling!
i The dispensing amount is part of the SCOP procedure. There is

therefore an automatic switch to the controller's standard instruction set
when the procedure is activated.

Device Overview and Operation Function test
Function test
In some cases it is useful to check whether the CMD-V4 is ready for operation
without using other tools.
There is a function button on the controller for this purpose. Pressing this
button lets you cycle through the possible functions on the status display.
Releasing the button when the required function is shown will trigger the
function.
The functions described in the following sections can be performed

i only when the safety switch is closed (i.e. the CMD-V4 is in cash-out
position). Functions ’2’ and ’3’ may be started only from normal
operation (display ’00’ or ’14’) or when all transport paths are
guaranteed to be clear.
Display Function Function description

Normal operation Return to normal mode (no function)
RESET After resetting, the result is shown on the

status display.
Overall test + All mechanical CMD-V4 components are

RESET operated one after the other.
Test dispensing + Standard command set:

RESET A note is dispensed from each installed
cassette and transported to the
reject/retract cassette.
<nACT> is modified; <nNDV> remains
unchanged.

Function test Device Overview and Operation
FW version The version number is displayed in

alternating mode.
Example:
From the firmware identifier (read with DIL)
$MOD$ 061203 1137 CMD_V4_0.BIN
the version number 1137 is displayed as

follows:
11 for 1 second
37 for 1 second
dark for 1 second
After nine attempts, the device returns

to normal mode.
Reset statistics Resettable counters are set to 0, and the

counter current time of the realtime clock is saved.

Status display codes
Displays in normal operation

Off No power supply Switching device on
-- Boot up (after RESET or electronic self-test)
bu Burn; program controller
C0 Compare; check controller
IO Controller OK
00 No error
01 Software faulty If possible, read hardware
status, switch device off/on,
read hardware status (field stop
info), download if necessary
05 Communication problem with ChipCard Check/replace lines to
controller ChipCard controller and
ChipCard controller
06 Communication problem with ChipCard / or Check / replace ChipCard on
wrong ChipCard inserted controller
(ChipCard number not '226-0PR')
09 Locking handle open Push dispenser completely into
the safe, if necessary adjust
switch
10 Controller defective or replace controller
10 Battery empty or battery jumper not connected: Mount battery jumper or replace
only with self-test commands for battery testing battery
11 Software is missing (download) Perform download
12 Safety switch open Insert CMD-V4
13 Device lock waiting Remove notes from CMD-V4;
then per SW: RESET lock flag
14 Minimum configuration of CMD-V4 not available Insert cassettes; if necessary,
(RR-box + at least 1 cash-out cassette) determine reference values or
cassette defective
15 Cassette board has invalid coding, is not Replace cassette distributor
inserted or defective board, check cables
16 Output transport coding invalid Perform coding on output
transport cable connector.
17 Belt drive of clamp defective M3 or jam Press the function button on the
CMD controller until ’01’
appears on the display.
Call service personnel if the
error is still displayed after the
RESET.
18 Banknote jam during dispensing Clear paper jam; then perform a
RESET.
19 Clamp transport defective / jammed Press the function button on the
VCMD: Note jam in output transport appears on the display.
RESET.
20 Single reject deflector faulty / blocked Remove block; then RESET; if
MA2/1, MA2/2, SM1 nec. replace stacker or
controller
21 Faulty measuring station DDU Press the function button on the
RESET.
22 Photosensor amplifier faulty or photosensor Clear cash paths; then perform
initialization not successful a RESET or replace controller.
23 Routing disk defective / blocking SM2 / SM3 Press the function button on the
VCMD: appears on the display.
Bundle reject deflector defective / blocked SM6
RESET.
24 Reject / retract drive faulty / blocked MA6 If necessary, replace cassette,
output transport or controller.
25 Dispensing motor DCM1 faulty Replace output transport or
controller.
26 Stacker wheel drive defective / blocked SM9 Remove block; then RESET; if
nec. replace stacker or
VCMD: controller
Comb-type lifting bar defective / blocked SM5
Switching dispensing / transport defective /
blocked M3
28 Shutter error Eliminate error; then perform a
RESET.
29 Output photosensor covered (manipulation) Eliminate error; then perform a
RESET.
3x Too many problems dispensing from cassette x Check cash paths; then perform
(x = 1 - 6) a RESET; if nec. dispense test
note(s)
4x Banknotes cannot be dispensed from cassette x Check the contents of cassette
(x = 1 - 6); x; RESET
incorrect banknote pressure in new cassette
5x Too many bad banknotes from cassette x Check the contents of cassette
(x = 1 - 6) x; RESET
6x Cassette x (x = 1 - 6) faulty Write error (cassette EE-
PROM)
Replace cassette x , RESET.
Dirty photosensors
No. Meaning Description
7x Dispensing sensor of cassette x (x = 1 - 6) or PSDx
pressure sensor faulty
8x Empty sensor of cassette x (x = 1 - 6) PSEx
90 Stacker wheel input PS 1
91 Tray monitoring PS 18
93 'Tray empty' (single reject) PS 2
VCMD: Monitoring of entrance reject box PS21
95 Removal photosensor PS 27
VCMD PS 26
9A Bundle rear edge control, shutter sensor PS 28
DISPENSADOR V4
Function and Integration
Sensors and electromechanical

components
Horizontal output transport

PS27
PS28
HS4 SM2,3 DPS5,6

MA6 HS3
HS2
SM1 DPS8,9
DPS2
DCM1
DCM7 DPS14
DPS11
DPS10
DPS15 DPS4
DPS7
PS2 HS1
PS1
SM9 PS18 DCM2,3 SW1
MA2/2
MA2/1
DDU
PSE1 MAC1 SMC1

PSD1 CL1
01750060162 A Cash Media Dispenser Version 4 - Service Manual 2-1

DISPENSADOR V4
Sensors and electromechanical components Function and Integration
Vertical output transport
DPS10
DPS11
SM7
PS27 PS28 HS4
SM2,3 DPS5,6
MA6 HS3
HS2
SM1 DPS8,9
DPS2
DCM1
DPS14
DPS15 DPS4
DPS7
PS2 HS1
PS1
SM9 PS18 DCM2,3 SW1
MA2/2
MA2/1
DDU
PSE1 MAC1 SMC1

PSD1 CL1
2-2 Cash Media Dispenser Version 4 - Service Manual 01750060162 A

DISPENSADOR V4
Function and Integration Sensors and electromechanical components
Stacker and output transport

Compo- Designation Location
nent
D Permanent magnets (2 units) – without sensors Clamp
DPS 2 Stacker wheel position query Stacker wheel input
DPS 4 Sensor: position of retract compartment Reject / retract box
DPS 5 Sensor: home position Routing disk drive, left
DPS 6 Sensor: home position Routing disk drive, right
DPS 7 Home position of sliding surface Single reject
DPS 8 Sensor: Position Routing disk drive, left
DPS 9 Sensor: Position Routing disk drive, right
DPS 10 Hybrid photosensor Shutter
DPS 11 Hybrid photosensor Shutter
DPS 14 Home position of switch Single reject
DPS 15 Switch position: single reject Single reject
HS 1 Home position (Hall sensor) Clamp positioning
HS 2 RR home position Clamp positioning
(behind the routing disk) (Hall sensor)
HS 3 Reversal in FL direction Clamp positioning
(if required) (Hall sensor)
HS 4 Stop over position and final position of clamp Clamp positioning
(Hall sensor)
PS 1 Stacker wheel input Stacker wheel input
PS 2 'Tray empty' check Single reject
PS 18 Tray monitoring/ input monitoring 'clamp empty' Swivel drive for clamp flap
reject/retract box
PS 27 Removal photosensor Clamp positioning
PS 28 Bundle rear edge control Clamp positioning
DCM 1 Main drive motor Stacker wheel input
DCM 2 Traction motor + planetary gears Clamp
DCM 3 Belt drive + planetary gears Clamp
DCM 7 DC motor (outdoor) Shutter
MA 2/1 Switch control magnet Single reject
MA 2/2 Switch control magnet Single reject
01750060162 A Cash Media Dispenser Version 4 - Service Manual 2-3

DISPENSADOR V4
Sensors and electromechanical components Function and Integration
Compo- Designation Location

nent
MA 6 Magnet for retract comportment Reject box
SW 1 Reject / retract box pushed in Reject box
SM 1 Pressure on sliding surface for emptying Single reject
SM 2 Routing disk motor Routing disk drive, left
SM 3 Routing disk motor Routing disk drive, right
SM 7 Stepper motor (indoor) Shutter
SM 9 Stacker wheel stepper motor Stacker wheel input
T1 Timing disk Stacker wheel input
Components of dispensing unit and cassette

Component Designation Location
MACx Retaining magnet Dispensing unit; cassette x x=1–6
CLx Extractor gear Dispensing unit; cassette x x=1–6
PSDx Dispensing sensor Dispensing unit; cassette x x=1–6
PSEx Empty sensor Dispensing unit; cassette x x=1–6
DDU Length measurement, measuring on the upper dispensing unit
station
SMCx Stepper motor for pressure in cassette x x=1–6
STx Cassette connector at cassette x x=1–6
2-4 Cash Media Dispenser Version 4 - Service Manual 01750060162 A

Messages and troubleshooting
The following figure shows the position of the sensors:
Shutter
Add. conveyor
(version 1)
Printer
Envelope dispenser
6-2 January 95, 01750041248 A

Meaning of the sensors

Sensor status 1 (active) means that the relevant sensor is covered.
Sensors available in status command:
Sensor active Meaning

SRREADY Deposit cassette is in place.
SDEMPTY Envelope dispenser still has some envelopes.
SDLOW The level of envelopes in the dispenser is low.
SDOUT One envelope is at the exit of the dispenser.
SPHEAD Envelope under the print head.
SPOUT Envelope in the printer conveyor
SUINPLACE The chassis is correctly attached to the additional conveyor.
SCINSIDE Envelope in the conveyor (version 1)
SCMIDDLE Envelope in the conveyor (version 1)
SCOUT Envelope in the conveyor (version 1)
SHPOS2 See table 2
SHPOS1 See table 2
ENV Envelope in the shutter
SB0 LED for print head covering (print head is covered )
SB1 LED for print head covering (print head is uncovered)
Shutter output signals:
SHPOS1 SHPOS2 Status

0 0 Shutter undefined
0 1 Shutter open
1 0 Shutter closed
01750041248 A, January 95 6-3

LED position and function

15 LEDs are used for sensor and signal monitoring. If one LED is on, this means that
the respective sensor is covered. In idle condition, only LED SB0 should be ON.
6-4 January 95, 01750041248 A

LEDs and their meaning
No. Signal name Abbr. LED ON meaning

L1 SPHEAD SPHD The envelope is under the printer head.
L2 SPOUT SPOT The envelope is in the printer conveyor.
L3 SRREADY SRRY The deposit cassette is not in place.
L4 SUINPLACE SUINP The chassis is not correctly attached to the additional

conveyor.
L5 SDOUT SDOT One envelope is at the exit of the dispenser.
L6 SDEMPTY SDEP The envelope dispenser is out of envelopes.
L7 SDLOW SDLW The level of envelopes in dispenser is low.
L8 SCINSIDE SCIN Envelope in the conveyor on the safe exit/entry

(version 1)
L9 SCMIDDLE SCMD Envelope in the middle of the conveyor (version 1)
L10 SCOUT SCOT Envelope in the conveyor on the shutter side

(version 1)
L11 SB0 SBD0 LED for print head covering
L12 SB1 SBD1 LED print head covering
L13 SXENV SSEV Envelope in the shutter
L14 SXSHPOS1 SSP1 See table 2 for SHPOS1,

'1' in the table means LED off
L15 SXSHPOS2 SSP2 See table 2 for SHPOS2,
'0' in the table means LED off
01750041248 A, January 95 6-5

Troubleshooting
Description Cause Action
Unit cannot be - Cable connection interrupted - Re-establish connection
addressed by
the system - V24 cable loose or not connected - Check connector for correct
position
- Controller faulty - Replace printer assembly
- Power supply unit faulty - Replace power supply unit
- Cable CN 16 between power - Check connector for correct

supply unit and controller is loose position
or not plugged
Unit does not - Printer or additional conveyor - Set printer into correct
start up (version 1) not in place position
(safety switch not activated)
- Safety switch cable (CN 15) - Check connector for correct

loose or not plugged position
- SUINPLACE (L4) micro switch - Adjust micro switch

incorrectly set
- SUINPLACE (L4) micro switch - Replace printer assembly

faulty
- Cable CN 7 loose or not - Check connector for correct

connected position
Cassette - Cassette incorrectly inserted - Reinsert cassette

cannot be
detected (L3) - Micro switch incorrectly set - Set micro switch
- Micro switch faulty - Replace printer
- Cable CN 7 loose or not - Check connector for correct

plugged position
- Controller faulty - Replace printer
6-6 January 95, 01750041248 A


Cassette is not - Locking mechanism incorrectly - Set locking mechanism
locked when set at printer correctly
inserted
- Cassette locking mechanism
faulty - Replace cassette
- Cassette not inserted correctly - Insert cassette correctly
Cassette - Locking mechanism at printer - Set locking mechanism

cannot be set incorrectly correctly
removed
- Cassette locking mechanism - Replace cassette
faulty
Shutter does - Sensor dirty - Clean sensor

not recognize
envelopes - Sensor faulty - Replace shutter
(L13)
- Additional conveyor cable - Check connector for correct
(version 1) or additional logic position
(version 2) loose or not
plugged
- Shutter electronics faulty - Replace shutter
- Logic on additional con- - Replace additional conveyor

veyor (version 1) faulty
- Additional logic faulty (ver. 2) - Replace additional logic
01750041248 A, January 95 6-7


Shutter cannot - Foreign body near the shutter - Remove foreign body
be opened or or the sensor
closed
(L14 / L15) - Motor faulty - Replace shutter
- Motor cable loose or not plugged - Check cable for correct

position
- Motor cable mixed up - Plug correctly
- Drive belt faulty - Replace shutter
- Pulleys loose - Tighten pulleys
- Shutter is jammed - Make shutter run smoothly

or replace it
- Additional logic faulty - Replace additional logic

(version 2)
- Shutter electronics faulty - Replace shutter
Envelopes are - Envelopes inserted incorrectly - Insert envelopes correctly

not fed from
the dispenser - Envelopes too wide - Use specified envelopes
- Holding-down clamp jammed - Loosen holding-down clamp

or replace printer assembly
- Cables CN 6 or CN 12 loose - Check connector for correct

or not plugged position
- Motor faulty - Replace printer assembly
- Sensors L6 or L7 faulty - Replace printer assembly
6-8 January 95, 01750041248 A


Printer does - Press-down mechanism for - Lock press-down
not transport bottom carriage unlocked mechanism or replace
envelopes (springs do not press carriage printer assembly
against top belt)
- Cable CN 9 or CN 13
loose or not plugged - Check connector for correct
position
- Controller faulty
- Replace controller
Additional - Motor cable CN 5 / CN 6 loose - Check connector for correct
conveyor does or not plugged position
not transport
envelope - Press-down mechanism for - Lock press-down
(version 1) bottom carriage unlocked mechanism or replace
(springs do not press carriage additional conveyor
against top belt)
- Sensors L1 or L2 faulty - Replace printer assembly
- Sensors L1 or L2 dirty - Clean sensors
- Cable between printer and addi- - Check connector for correct

tional conveyor (socket CN 14 or position
CN 3 on controller) loose or not
plugged
- Electronics on additional - Replace additional conveyor

conveyor faulty
- Motor faulty - Replace additional conveyor
Conveyor trails - Sensor cable loose or not plugged - Check cable for correct
too long and position
device
indicates - Sensor dirty - Clean sensor
sensor error
- Sensor faulty - Replace printer assembly
or additional conveyor
(version 2)
01750041248 A, January 95 6-9


Envelop gets - Envelope folded during transport - Check conveyor mechanism
stuck in the for correct operation
additional
conveyor - Sensor SCMIDDLE positioned too - Raise sensor mounting
(version 1) low in the paper chute
- Conveyor belts drag along the - Replace printer assembly

bottom funnel plate of the printer
Envelope gets - Envelope folded during transport - Check conveyor mechanism

stuck inside for correct operation
the printer
- Wiper assembly not in "open" - Check wiper assembly
position for correct operation
Printout - Ink cartridge empty - Install new print head

incomplete or
none at all - Print head not in correct position - Install print head correctly
- Contact surfaces on print head - Clean contact surfaces

or print head cable dirty
- Ink jets dried up - Clean print head or insert

new head; check wiper
mechanism for correct
operation
- Incorrect print head installed - Install correct print head
- Head cable ( CN 8 / CN 11) loose - Check connector for correct

or not plugged position
- Head cable faulty - Replace printer assembly
6-10 January 95, 01750041248 A


Sealing rubber - Envelope in the conveyor - Remove envelope
of the print
head cover - Head not installed correctly - Install head correctly
does not close
around head - Print head cover incorrectly set - Adjust print head cover
or has no or replace printer assembly
function
(L11 / L12) - Cables CN 5, CN 17 loose or - Check connector for correct
not plugged position
- Wiper assembly faulty - Replace printer assembly
Pushbutton - Cable CN 1 loose or not - Check connector for correct

"Test" without plugged position
function
- Pushbutton faulty - Replace printer assembly
01750041248 A, January 95 6-11

Equipment main controller Deposit Unit (NG)
Equipment main controller
1 FLASHPROM 5 DIP – switch S1 (setting the

2 V.24 (RS232C) interface configuration)
3 7-segment display (Rearload) 6 CPU
4 DIP - switch S2 (setting the 7 7-segment display (Frontload)
changing mode)

Deposit Unit (NG) Configuration main controller
Configuration main controller
Switch on configuration
Dip switch S1 for the switch on configuration of:
− baud rate,
− parity,
− character set,
− reset discharge.
The configuration of the controller is also possible by the controlling
software. The settings by the controlling software have priority over
the settings by the DIP switches.
During the test operation of the deposit unit the controlling software
is disabled. This means that only the configuration from the DIP
switches is active. To have no difference it is recommendable to
adjust the DIP switch setting to the software setting.
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Contents B1 B0 P1 P0 C2 C1 C0 R0
Default on on on on off off off on
Baud rate (B1, B0)

B1 B0
1200 OFF OFF
2400 ON OFF
4800 OFF ON
9600 ON ON

Deposit Unit (NG) Configuration main controller
Revision level
Revision levels will be published by service information.
Dip switch S2
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Contents E3 E2 E1 E0 M3 M2 M1 M0
Valency 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
The revision level of the electronic (E3 - E0) and of the mechanic (M3-M0)
must be set with the Dip switch S2, if the revision needs imperatively a special
firmware.
The setting is in binary code.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON Example for the code:
OFF Electronic: 5 (binary 0101)
Mechanic: 4 (binary 0100)

Printing unit Deposit Unit (NG)
Printing unit
Character Normal and elongated print if the character set is used.
fonts:
Character sets: Software controlled from the system.
Each sign from the topical character set is definable.
The print head is delivered in a separate container. Follow during the

installation the operating instructions and the instructions from the print head
supplier.
Status display
The deposit unit contains a status display to indicate the status of the unit.
1 2
1 7-segment display (Frontload)

2 7-segment display (Rearload)

Deposit Unit (NG) Status display
Status display Meaning

undefined Controller error / no deposit loader available
Start-up
No error
RAM error
Software not available
Shutter error - condition undefinable
Shutter error -
shutter is opened
Print module transport engine problem
Print head cover problem

Cassette shutter problem
Paper detect by sensor ENV
Paper detect by sensor SCOUT
Paper detect by sensor SCMIDDLE
Paper detect by sensor SCINSIDE
Paper detect by sensor SPOUT
Paper detect by sensor SPHEAD
Paper detect by sensor SDOUT
Deposit box not installed
Print head not available
‘printer and dispenser’ unit not arrested
Print head cover is not closed

24 V missing
Sensor ENV
is very dirty
Sensor SCOUT
is very dirty

Status display Deposit Unit (NG)

Sensor SCMIDDLE
is very dirty
Sensor SCINSIDE
is very dirty
Sensor SPOUT
is very dirty
Sensor SPHEAD
is very dirty
Sensor SDOUT
is very dirty
Sensor SDEMPTY
is very dirty
Sensor ENV no function because it is very dirty
Sensor SCOUT
no function because it is very dirty
Sensor SCMIDDLE no function because it is very dirty
Sensor SCINSIDE no function because it is very dirty
Sensor SPOUT
Sensor SPHEAD
Sensor SDOUT
Sensor SDEMPTY no function because it is very dirty
Paper detect by sensor SLOUT1
Paper detect by sensor SLOUT2
Sensor SLOUT1
is very dirty
Sensor SLOUT2
is very dirty *

Deposit Unit (NG) Status display

Sensor SLOUT1
Sensor SLOUT2
Warning: envelope dispenser almost empty
Warning: envelope dispenser is empty
Test program 1 selected

‘Test’ key Deposit Unit (NG)
‘Test’ key
The deposit unit has one key for testing the device and eliminating a
malfunction in the paper transport e.g. You can execute the test function only if
the deposit unit is inserted into the device.
Rearload
Select a test program with the
‘Test’ key (see section "Test
program").
Release the ‘Test’ key to execute
the test program.
Frontload
Select a test program with the
‘Test’ key (see section "Test
program").
Close the device door.
The selected test will be executed if
the door is closed.

Deposit Unit (NG) Test programs
Test programs
12 3 4
1 ‘Test’ key frontload 3 7- segment display

2 7-segment display Rearload
Frontload 4 ‘Test’ key rearload
If you press the ‘Test’ key at the printing unit with envelope dispenser the four
test programs will be shown on the 7-segment display.
Release the ‘Test’ key to execute the favoured test program.

Test programs Deposit Unit (NG)
Test program description

- Cleaning the print cartridge
- Cover print cartridge
- Cleaning the print cartridge
- Cover print cartridge
- Testing the forward and backward transport
- Complete test (recommended)
The deposit unit transports an envelope to the
shutter, takes it back, prints the envelope and
takes it to the deposit cassette
- Only for the service staff
The test programs can only be executed when both conditions are
fulfilled:
− The deposit unit is pulled completely into the safe or the
operating unit.
− ProCash 2150 / CSC456 Mark III:
The additional transport is engaged, i.e. micro switch
(SUINPLACE) is closed and the connection from the shutter and
mini-additional transport is closed, i.e. micro switch
(SXINPLACE) is closed (see following section "Messages of the
test program 4").
− ProCash 2100:
The operating panel with the shutter is pulled in completely, i.e.
micro switch (SXINPLACE) is closed.

Messages of the test program 4
ProCash 2150 / CSC456 Mark III:

Upper LED
Photosensor L8 (SDLOW) not interrupted (dispenser
almost empty)
Photosensor L11 (SRRDYF) interrupted (cassette
from the frontload position is available)
Photosensor L10 (SRRDYR) interrupted (cassette
from the rearload position is available)
Photosensor L12 (SPHOME) not interrupted (print
head covered)
Micro switch S1 (SUINPLACE) & S2 (SXINPLACE),
conveyor and shutter closed
Key SDTEST pressed
Shutter signal L13 (SXSHPOS1) is ’low’ (will be

reported in the status with a ’0’)

ProCash 2150 / CSC456 Mark III

Lower LED (Paper path photosensor)
Photosensor L9 (SDEMPTY) detects an envelope
Photosensor L7 (SDOUT) detects an envelope
Photosensor L6 (SPHEAD) detects an envelope
Photosensor L5 (SPOUT) detects an envelope
Photosensor L2 (SCOUT) detects an envelope
Photosensor L1 (ENV) detects an envelope

ProCash 2100:
Upper LED
Photosensor L8 (SDLOW) not interrupted (dispenser
almost empty)
Photosensor L10 (SRRDYR) or L11 (SRRDYF)
interrupted (cassette from the frontload position is
available)
Photosensor L16 (SLOPEN) not interrupted (cassette
is open)
Photosensor L12 (SPHOME) not interrupted (print
head covered)
Micro switch S2 (SXINPLACE); shutter is closed
Key SDTEST pressed


ProCash 2100
Lower LED (Paper path photosensor)
Photosensor L9 (SDEMPTY) detects an envelope
Photosensor L7 (SDOUT) detects an envelope
Photosensor L6 (SPHEAD) detects an envelope
Photosensor L5 (SPOUT) detects an envelope
Photosensor L19 (SLOUT2) detects an envelope

*
Photosensor L18 (SLOUT1) detects an envelope
*
Photosensor L17 (SLCLOSE) is switched (cassette is
closed)
Photosensor L1 (ENV) detects an envelope

Deposit Unit (NG) Messages and malfunctions
Messages and malfunctions
System error messages

System error messages will be described in the corresponding software
documentations.
Error event
In the event of an error, the envelope currently being conveyed will be placed
into the cassette.
Positions of photosensors
The following diagrams show the position of the photosensors:

III)
8-96
L1 (ENV) L2 (SCOUT) L5 (SPOUT) Safety circuit breaker L7 (SDOUT) Print unit
S2 (SXINPLACE) L6 (SPHEAD) L8 (SDLOW) L9 (SDEMTY)

L14 (SXSHPOS2)
L15 (SXSHPOS3)
Shutter
Mini-additional transport
ProCash 2100 - Service Manual

L13 (SXSHPOS1) S1 (SUINPLACE) L12 (SPHOME) Cassette (Envelope box) L10 (SRRDYR)
Deposit unit with mini-additional transport (ProCash 2150 / CSC456 Mark
SNP: 01750030891 A
Deposit Unit (NG)
S2 (SXINPLACE) Safety circuit breaker
L1 (ENV) L5 (SPOUT) L6 (SPHEAD) L8 (SDLOW)
Deposit Unit (NG)
L7 (SDOUT) L9 (SDEMTY)
SNP: 01750030891 A
L13 (SXSHPOS1)
L15 (SXSHPOS3)
Shutter

L14 (SXSHPOS2) L11 (SRRDYF) L18 (SLOUT1) Cassette lock L16 (SLOPEN) L17 (SLCLOSE) Safe
L19 (SLOUT2)
L12 (SPHOME) Cassette (Envelope box)

Deposit unit without mini-additional transport (ProCash 2100 FL)
8-97
8-98
Safety circuit breaker
L1 (ENV) L5 (SPOUT) L6 (SPHEAD) L8 (SDLOW)
S2 (SXINPLACE) L9 (SDEMTY)
L7 (SDOUT)
L14 (SXSHPOS2)
L15 (SXSHPOS3)
Shutter

Cassette (Envelope box)
L13 (SXSHPOS1) L12 (SPHOME) L17 (SLCLOSE) L18 (SLOUT1) Cassette lock L10 (SRRDYR) Safe
Deposit unit without mini-additional transport (ProCash 2100 RL)
L19 (SLOUT2)
L16 (SLOPEN)
SNP: 01750030891 A
Deposit Unit (NG)
Meaning of the photosensors and switches
No. Signal name Abbr. Meaning photosensor OFF
CSC 456 Mark III

ProCash 2100
ProCash 2150
L1 ENV SSEV X X The envelope is in the shutter
L2 SCOUT SCOT X The envelope is in the mini-
additional transport at the shutter
L5 SPOUT SPOT X X Envelope is in the conveyor of
the printer
L6 SPHEAD SPHD X X The envelope is under the print
head
L7 SDOUT SDOT X X One envelope is at the exit of the
dispenser
L8 SDLOW SDLW X X The level of envelopes in the
dispenser is low
L9 SDEMPTY SDEP X X The envelope dispenser is out of
envelopes
L10 SRRDYR SRRR X X The cassette (rearload) is not in
place
L11 SRRDYF SRRF X The cassette (frontload) is not in
place
L12 SPHOME SPHE X X Print head covered
S1 SUINPLACE SUINP X Printing unit or mini-additional
transport is not correctly attached
S2 SXINPLACE SXINP X X Shutter or printing unit is not
correctly attached
L13 SXSHPOS1 SSP1 X X See following table
L14 SXSHPOS2 SSP2 X X See following table
L15 SXSHPOS3 SSP3 X X Shutter is open

Messages and malfunctions Deposit Unit (NG)
No. Signal name Abbr. Meaning photosensor OFF
CSC 456 Mark III

ProCash 2100
ProCash 2150
L16 SLOPEN SLOP X Cassette shutter open
L17 SLCLOSE SLCL X Cassette shutter closed
L18 SLOUT1 SLO1 X Envelope in the cassette lock
L19 SLOUT2 SLO2 X Envelope in the cassette lock
Shutter output signals

The photosensor status 1 (active) means that the relevant photosensor is
covered.
L13 L14 Status
0 1 Shutter opened
1 0 Shutter closed

Troubleshooting
Pay attention to the connection between the additional transport and
printing unit, it must be firmly fixed.

Unit cannot be Cable connection Re-establish connection
addressed by interrupted.
the system V24 cable loose or not V.24 Check connector for correct
connected position
Controller faulty Replace the controller or the
printing unit
Power supply unit faulty Replace power supply unit
Cable at connector X 9 Check connector for correct
between power supply unit position
and controller is loose or not
plugged
Unit does not Printer or mini-additional Set printing unit and / or
start up transport not in place (safety mini-additional transport into
circuit breaker or basic correct position
position sensor not activated
Safety switch cable at Check connector for correct
connector X 7 loose or not position
plugged
Micro switch SUINPLACE Replace the printing unit or
(S 1) or SXINPLACE (S2) the mini-additional transport
incorrectly set or faulty
Cable at connector X 2 Check connector for correct
(sensor board) loose or not position
connected
Controller faulty Replace the printing unit
Wrong firmware version Load the firmware new (with
loaded or firmware faulty KDIAG)


Cassette cannot Cassette incorrectly inserted Reinsert cassette
be detected Hybrid photosensor faulty Replace printing unit
(L 10) Cable at connector X 102 Check connector for correct
Controller faulty Replace printing unit
Cassette cannot Cassette locking Replace the cassette
be removed mechanism faulty
Shutter does Photosensor dirty Clean photosensor
not recognise Photosensor faulty Replace the printing unit
envelopes (L 1) (ProCash 2100) or the mini-
additional transport
(ProCash 2150 / CSC 456
Mark III)
Cable to mini-additional Check connector for correct
transport (ProCash 2150 / position
CSC 456 Mark III) or
additional logic loose or not
plugged
Photosensor board of Replace the corresponding
printing unit (ProCash 2100) components
or mini-additional transport
(ProCash 2150 / CSC 456
Mark III) faulty


Envelopes are Envelopes inserted Insert envelopes correctly
not fed from the incorrectly
dispenser Envelopes too wide Use specified envelopes
Envelopes damaged or Insert new envelopes
folded
Holding-down clamp Loosen holding-down clamp
jammed or replace printing unit
Cables at connector X 14 Check connector for correct
Motor faulty Replace printing unit
Photosensor L8 or L9 faulty Replace printing unit
Shutter cannot Foreign body near the Remove foreign body
be opened or shutter or the photosensor
closed Motor faulty Replace shutter
(L 13 / L 14) Motor cable loose or not Check cable for correct
plugged position
Motor cable mixed up Plug correctly
Drive belt faulty Replace shutter
Pulleys loose Tighten pulleys
Shutter is jammed Make shutter run smoothly
or replace it
Additional logic faulty Replace additional logic
Photosensor faulty Replace shutter
Printing unit Press-down mechanism for Lock press down
does not bottom carriage unlocked mechanism or replace
transport (springs do not press printing unit
envelopes carriage against top belt)
Cable at the connectors X 1 Check connector for correct
or position
X 15 loose or not plugged
Controller faulty Replace controller or
printing unit
Motor faulty Replace printing unit


Printing unit trails Photosensor cable X2 or Check cable for correct
too long X101 loose or not plugged position
and device Photosensor dirty Clean photosensor
indicates photo Photosensor faulty Replace printing unit
sensor error Photosensor dirty Remove foreign body
Mini-additional Motor cable at connector X Check connector for
transport does 106 loose or not plugged correct position
not transport Press-down mechanism for Lock press-down
envelope bottom carriage unlocked mechanism or replace
(ProCash 2150 / mini-additional transport
CSC 456 Mark
III)
Photosensor L 1 and L 2 Replace mini-additional
faulty transport
Photosensor L 1 and L 2 dirty Clean the photosensor
Envelope gets Envelope folded during Check conveyor
stuck in the transport mechanism for correct
additional operation
transport Conveyor belts drag along Replace additional
(ProCash 2150 / the bottom funnel plate of the transport
CSC 456 Mark printer
III)
Lower rollers are difficult to
operate or block
Additional Cable between printing unit Check connector for
transport does and mini-additional transport correct position
not transport (socket X 102 on controller)
envelope loose or not plugged
(ProCash 2150 /
CSC 456 Mark
III)
Controller faulty Replace printing unit or
controller
Motor faulty Replace additional
transport


Envelope gets Envelope folded during Check conveyor
stuck inside the transport mechanism for correct
printer operation
Wiper assembly not in Check wiper assembly for
’open’ position correct operation
Cassette is not set Set cassette correctly
correctly
Cassette is full Empty cassette
Cover does not Envelope in the conveyor Remove envelope
close around the Head not installed correctly Install head correctly
head Print head cover faulty Replace printing unit
Closing Cable at connector X 10 Check connector for correct
mechanism from loose or not plugged position
print head cover Print head cover faulty Replace printing unit
without function
‘Test’ key without Cable at connector X 4 Check connector for correct
function loose or not plugged position
‘Test’ key faulty Replace printing unit
Printout Ink cartridge empty Install new print head
incomplete or Print head not in correct Install print head correctly
none at all position
Contact surfaces on print Clean contact surfaces
head or print head cable
dirty
Ink jets dried up Clean print head or insert
new head; check wiper
mechanism for correct
operation
Incorrect print head Install correct print head
installed
Head cable at connector X Check connector for correct
11 / X12 loose or not position
plugged
Head cable faulty Replace printing unit
Controller faulty Replace controller or
printing unit
Sealing rubber of the print Replace printing unit
head is missing or faulty


Cassette lock Motor defect Replace the cassette lock.
(ProCash 2100) Envelope in the area of the Remove the envelope.
can not be shutter
opened or closed Photosensors L18 / L19 Clean the photosensors.
dirty
Photosensors L18 / L19 Replace the cassette lock.
faulty
Motor cable mixed up Check the correct
connection of the
connectors.
Motor cable not put up Check the correct
connection of the
connectors.
Cassette lock Drive-belt defect Replace the cassette lock.
(ProCash 2100) Basic position sensor L16 / Replace the cassette lock.
can not be L17 defect
opened or closed Shutter jams Replace the cassette lock.
Cassette full Empty the cassette.
Magnet defect or jamming Replace the cassette lock
Cassette lock Connector at the cassette Check the correct
(ProCash 2100) is lock (X1) loose or not connection of the
not recognised plugged connector.
by the device (no Controller at the printing Replace the controller or
response) unit defect the complete printing unit
with controller.
Wrong firmware loaded Load the correct firmware.
Firmware defect Load the firmware again.


Shutter at the Magnet defect Replace the cassette lock.
cassette lock can Cable at the magnet loose Check the correct
be opened or not connected connection of the
manually connector.
(Manipulation) Magnetic keeper jamming Replace the cassette lock.
Controller at the printing Replace the controller or
unit defect the complete printing unit
with controller.
Connector X1 at the Check the correct
cassette lock loose connection of the
connector.

Checking the photosensors and switches

Checking the photosensors and switches can be on principle done as shown in
the following description. At some devices a complete test is not possible,
because the teamwork of the units in opened position is not given for all
configuration combinations.
1. Shutter and mini-additional transport (ProCash 2150 / CSC 456 Mark III)
• Open the shutter.
• Insert an envelope.
• Slowly pull in the envelope by turning the hand wheel at the additional
transport.
• While the envelope passes the different photosensors, check the report on
the 7-segment display at the controller (see section "Status display").
2. Printing unit
• Insert an envelope.
• Slowly pull in the envelope by tuning the hand wheel at the printer.
• While the envelope passes the different photosensors, check the report on
the 7-segment display at the controller (see section "Status display").
3. Envelope dispenser
• Remove the envelopes.
On the 7-segment display must be shown ‘dE’.
• Lift the envelope press-down spring.
On the 7-segment display must be shown ‘dL’ or ‘00’.

4. Cassette
• Remove the cassette.
On the 7-segment display must be shown ‘30’.
5. Connection between mini-additional transport and shutter

(ProCash 2150 / CSC 456 Mark III)
• Open the device unit with the build in shutter.
6. Print head cover

• Cover is closed (rubber closes around the print head).
• Open the print head cover manually.
7. Shutter mechanism (ProCash 2100)

• Start the test program ‘3’ (see section "Test programs").
• Hold the shutter, so that it is not possible for it to open complete.
• Start the test program ‘3’ again, and prevent the shutter from closing only
when it feeds in the test envelope.
• On the 7-segment display must be shown ‘12’ or ‘13’
The status of the LEDs can also be checked by means of the system
test program '3' or test program '4' (see section "Test programs").
The meaning of the shown message on the 7-segment display you
can find in the table in the section "Test programs".

How the BCM works
Components and controls
1
2
3
8
4
5 9
6 10
11
12
7
13
14
15
16
1 Knob 1 for transporting banknotes 10 Cleaning lever 1

2 Knob 2 for transporting banknotes 11 Cleaning lever 2
3 Service cover of cash input unit 12 Locking lever for the
4 Recognition unit device cover
5 Service cover of reject unit 13 Device cover
6 Transport unit cover 14 Handle for tilting the box
7 Knob 3 for transporting banknotes 15 Cash box
8 Cash input unit slot 16 Cash box handle
9 Reject slot
01750046754 B Bundle Cash-in Module - Service Manual 2-1

RAS Commands
Overview of CPU board 01750047380
CN4
LCD
DSW1
RSW1 RSW2 PSW1 PSW2
CN4 Slot for memory card

LCD Display element
DSW1 DIP microswitches
PSW1 'Confirm' key
PSW2 'Cancel' key
RSW1 Rotary switch for adjusting values on the LCD

DIP switch settings RAS Commands
DIP switch settings

The DIP switches must be set as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 7 8
ON
OFF
Switches Function State

1 None
2 Recognition unit OFF: valid ON: invalid
3 Reject unit OFF: valid ON: invalid
4 Cash box OFF: valid ON: invalid
5 Escrow unit OFF: valid ON: invalid
6 Cash input unit OFF: valid ON: invalid
7 None
8 'remote' or 'local' OFF: remote ON: local
3-2 Bundle Cash-in Module - Service Manual 01750046754 B

RAS Commands How to replace firmware
How to replace firmware

• Activate the product-specific software (please refer to the operating manual
shipped with the device).
• Open the safe and pull out the BCM as far as possible (please refer to the
operating manual shipped with the device).
Remove the two screws (1) and
remove the cover (2).
The illustration shows the CPU

board (1).

Starting RAS commands RAS Commands
Starting RAS commands

If the rotary switches RSW1 and RSW2 are not changed or the
PSW1 button is not pressed for 30 seconds, the LCD will display the
previous contents.
Turn the rotary switches RSW1 and

RSW2 (RSW) as long as 'FF'
appears on the display. The BCM is
FF in one of two states (remote or
local). The state is determined by
the setting of the eighth bit of the
DIP switch at the moment of switch-
on (off; remote, on; local).
The BCM must always be
switched off before the eighth
bit is set, as the status of the
DIP switches is only
transferred during the BCM
switch-on process.
Then press the PSW1 button, the

cursor lights up and the BCM waits
for RAS commands. The present
FF setting of the RSW rotary switches is
displayed.

RAS Commands Entering RAS commands
Entering RAS commands
Operation Display
In the first two columns

RSW=Command (1st) XX the set values on the RSW
are displayed
Enter the first command XXYY

and press the PSW1 button
If a 2nd command
is not entered
RSW=Command (2nd) XXYY
Enter the second command

and press the PSW1 button XXYYZZ
If a 3rd command
is not entered
RSW=Command (3rd) XXYYZZ
Enter the 3rd command

and press the PSW1 button
Execution of the command or data input for each command
If the PSW2 button is pressed during input, the BCM will wait for the first
character of the command.

Terminating RAS commands RAS Commands
Terminating RAS commands
In remote condition
The RAS procedure is terminated by setting RSW to 'FF' and pressing the
PSW1 button while the BCM is waiting for commands. If there is an error at
that time, the status code will be displayed (see chapter "Malfunctions").
The cursor lights up and the BCM
waits for the RAS commands.
FF
After pressing the PSW1 button if no

error occurs.
In local condition
The RAS procedure is terminated by switching off the BCM.

RAS Commands List of RAS commands
List of RAS commands

Command Data Contents
1 2 3
02 Input → →
reject output
03 Input → escrow→ output
04 Input → escrow→ deposit
05 Input → →
escrow / reject output
07 RESET (Return)
08 RESET (deposit)
28 Read ROM version for all units
32 01 Display reject codes for rejected
banknotes
32 02 Display data for all recognized banknotes
33 01 Display total number of banknotes
33 02 Display number of rejected banknotes
33 03 Display number of banknotes by
denomination
33 04 Display error codes that occurred
33 05 Display transactions
33 06 Display error codes in the sequence they
occurred in
50 01 Initializing to original state
51 01 Date/Time Setting the date/time

RAS command 02 RAS Commands
RAS command 02
The command you select becomes invalid if the RESET command is
executed or if an error occurs.
Some DIP switch settings prevent test steps from being executed
normally. Check that the DIP switches are in the correct positions
(see section "DIP switch settings").
Once banknotes have been placed
→
in the cash input unit, the mechani-
cal test mode starts (input reject).
0 2 Press the PSW2 button to return to
command input if you do not want to
insert banknotes or want to cancel
the test.
If no errors occur during the test, the
banknotes are positioned ready for
removal (output). After removal, the
device waits for additional
banknotes to be inserted.
Press the PSW2 button to return to
command input.
If errors occur during the test, the
error code appears on the display
_
XXXX XXX and the test is canceled.
command input.

RAS Commands RAS command 03
RAS command 03

cal test mode starts.
0 3
→ →
(Recognized banknotes:
Input escrow output
→ →
Not recognized banknotes:
Input reject output).

the test.
device waits for additional bank-
notes to be inserted.
command input.
_
XXXX XXX If errors occur during the test, the
and the test is canceled.
command input.

RAS command 04

in the cash input unit, the mechani
cal test mode starts.
0 4
→ →
Input escrow cash box
→ →
Not recognized banknotes:
Input reject output).

the test.
If no errors occur during the test,
press the PSW2 button after the test
is completed to return to command
_
XXXX XXX input.
and the test is canceled.
command input.

RAS command 05
This RAS command function is executed irrespective of whether
genuine banknotes or non genuine banknotes have been inserted.

cal test mode starts
0 5
→ →
Input escrow / reject output
(Banknotes are transported alter-
nately to the escrow or the reject
unit, irrespective of whether or not
the note is genuine).
the test.
device waits for additional bank-
notes to be inserted.
command input.
_ error code appears on the display
XXXX XXX and the test is canceled.
command input.

RAS command 07
Mechanical initialization is performed.
Any banknotes positioned in the transport paths are normally
transported to the reject unit.
Banknotes at the entrance to the escrow unit are transported to the
cash box.
If initialization is performed without

error, press the PSW2 key to return
to command input.
0 7
If errors occur during initialization,

the error code appears on the
_ display and initialization is canceled.
XXXX XXX Press the PSW2 button to return to
command input.

RAS command 08
Mechanical initialization is performed.
Any banknotes positioned in the transport paths are transported to
the reject unit.
Any banknotes that are positioned in the escrow unit are transported
to the cash box.
If initialization is performed without

error, press the PSW2 key to return
to command input.
0 8
If errors occur during initialization,

the error code appears on the
_ display and initialization is canceled.
command input.

RAS command 28
The ROM versions of the units are displayed.
This RAS command cannot be used for units that are not installed.
ROM version X of unit Y is

displayed.
_ Y : 1 = Transport unit
Y XXXXXX
2 = Reject unit
3 = Cash box
4 = Escrow unit
5 = Cash input unit
Press the PSW1 button to display
the ROM version of the next unit.
command input.
If errors occur during execution of

_ the RAS command, the error code
XXXX XXX appears on the display.
command input.

RAS command 3201

The reject codes of rejected banknotes are displayed.
The data of the last rejected banknote is displayed first.
The data of max. 254 rejected banknotes can be stored.
The data of accepted banknotes is not saved.
The consecutive number of rejected

banknotes ('001') and the reject
code ('FF10') are displayed.
0 0 1 F F1 0
the data of the next banknote.
If you press the PSW1 button when
the data of the last non authentic-
cated banknote is displayed, the
display shows the total number of
En d XXX non authenticated banknotes.
If you press the PSW1 button again,
the data for banknote number '001'
reappears.
command input.
If no data for non authenticated
banknotes was saved, 'No data'
No d a t a Press the PSW2 button to return to
command input.

Reject codes
Code Meaning
10 Incorrect note length
11 Color sensor 1 RED for banknote authentication
12 Color sensor 1 IR for banknote authentication
13 Color sensor 2 BLUE for banknote authentication
15 UV sensor for banknote authentication
16 Infrared sensor 1 for banknote authentication
18 Magnet sensor for banknote authentication
19 Metal thread sensor for banknote authentication
25 Incorrect banknote length difference (> 50 mm)
31 Not defined denomination
32 No denomination determinable
33 Incorrect feed from the transport unit
34 Escrow unit completely filled with banknotes
38 Data determined is not sufficiently reliable
39 No genuine banknote
40 Soiled banknote
50 Damaged banknote
61 Inadmissible transport clearance for banknotes 1 (note clearance < 10
mm)
62 Inadmissible transport clearance for banknotes 2 (note clearance <
defined value)
63 Inadmissible transport clearance for banknotes 3 (note clearance <
200 mm between the first edges of two banknotes)
65 Incorrect lateral shift for banknote (outside the defined value)
66 Skew banknote (turning angle > defined value)
70 Incorrect banknote length (in transport unit)
71 Incorrect transport rate
72 No information about the denomination
74 No information from the recognition unit

Code Meaning
75 Checksum error for the denomination
80 Error in edge recognition
81 Affinity error
82 Note rejected by several authentication sensors
88 Error in edge recognition of the recognition pattern
89 Affinity error in the recognition pattern
8A Note rejected by several authentication sensors
8A Incorrect note dimensions
90 Setting error for authentication data
9A Checksum error for authentication data
9A Edge abstraction error for authentication data
9E Incorrect data for infrared sensor 1
9F Incorrect data for infrared sensor 2
F4 Overflow of banknote monitoring data
F5 Incorrect banknote monitoring data

RAS command 3202

The data of the last banknote is displayed first.
The data of max. 254 banknotes can be stored.
The consecutive number of the

banknote ('01'), the position in which
the banknote was inserted ('A'), the
0 1 A0 20 1 country code ('02') and the
denomination ('01') are displayed.
the data of the next banknote.
If you press the PSW1 button when

the data of the last non banknote is
displayed, the display shows the
En d XXX total number of banknotes.
If you press the PSW1 button again,
the data for banknote number '01'
reappears.
command input.
If no data was saved, 'No data'

No d a t a appears on the display.
command input.

Display elements
Display element Meaning
Country code '00' – 'FE' (hexadecimal),
FF for a rejected banknote
Denomination '00' – 'FF' (hexadecimal)
Error code for a rejected banknote (see table "List of
error codes")
Position of the 'A', 'B', 'C' or 'D'
banknotes on Blank for a rejected banknote
insertion
Reject codes
Code Meaning
10 Incorrect note length
11 Color sensor 1 RED for banknote authentication
13 Color sensor 2 BLUE for banknote authentication
15 UV sensor for banknote authentication
18 Magnet sensor for banknote authentication
19 Metal thread sensor for banknote authentication
25 Incorrect banknote length difference (> 50 mm)
31 Not defined denomination
32 No denomination determinable
33 Incorrect feed from the transport unit
34 Escrow unit completely filled with banknotes
38 Data determined is not sufficiently reliable
39 No genuine banknote
40 Soiled banknote
50 Damaged banknote
61 Inadmissible transport clearance for banknotes 1
(note clearance < 10 mm)

Code Meaning
(note clearance < defined value)
(note clearance < 200 mm between the first edges of two banknotes)
65 Incorrect lateral shift for banknote (outside the defined value)
66 Skew banknote (turning angle > defined value)
70 Incorrect banknote length (in transport unit)
71 Incorrect transport rate
72 No information about the denomination
74 No information from the recognition unit
75 Checksum error for the denomination
80 Error in edge recognition
81 Affinity error
82 Note rejected by several authentication sensors
88 Error in edge recognition of the recognition pattern
89 Affinity error in the recognition pattern
8 A Note rejected by several authentication sensors
8 A Incorrect note dimensions
90 Setting error for authentication data
9 A Checksum error for authentication data
9 A Edge abstraction error for authentication data
9E Incorrect data for infrared sensor 1
9F Incorrect data for infrared sensor 2
F4 Overflow of banknote monitoring data
F5 Incorrect banknote monitoring data

RAS command 3301

If the number of all counted banknote is larger than 99999999,
'99999999' is displayed.
The data can be deleted with the RAS command 5001 (see section
"RAS command 5001").
The number of all counted

banknotes is displayed.
XXXXXXXX Press the PSW2 button to return to

command input.
RAS command 3302

If the number of all rejected banknotes is larger than 99999999,
'99999999' is displayed.
The number of all rejected

banknotes is displayed.

command input.

RAS command 3303

The data records are shown in the sequence as defined in the
system unit.
If the number of banknotes registered for a data record is larger than
99999999, '99999999' is displayed.
The number of the data record ('X'),

the country code ('Y') and the
denomination code ('Z') are
XXX YYZ Z displayed.

the number of banknotes ('A') for the
AAAAAAAA data record with the number 'X'.
the data of the next data record.
command input.
Once the data of all data records
has been displayed, 'Data end' is
Da t a e n d output to the display.
command input.
If no data is saved, 'No data' is
displayed.
command input.

RAS command 3304

The different error codes are saved in the sequence in which they
occur. A maximum of 50 different error codes can be recorded.
If the same error reoccurs, the counter for this error code is
incremented. The same error can be recorded a maximum of 65535
times.
The consecutive number ('X') and

the error code ('Y') are displayed.
XX YYYY

how often this error occurs ('A').
AAAAA Press the PSW1 button to display

the next error code.
command input.
When all error codes that have
occurred have been displayed, 'Data
Da t a e n d end' is output to the display.
command input.
displayed.
command input.

RAS command 3305

If the number of transactions is larger than 99999999, '99999999' is
displayed.
The number of transactions is

displayed.

command input.

RAS command 3306

The error codes that have occurred last are displayed (up to 100).
The last error code is displayed first.
The consecutive number ('X') and

the error code or the event ('Y') are
displayed.
XXX YYYY
The meanings of the error codes are
described in the chapter
"Malfunctions".
The following events may occur:
Power on: 'P-on'
Power off: 'P-off'
Reset: 'RST'
the next data.
command input.
When all the stored error codes
have been displayed, 'Data end' is
Da t a e n d output to the display.
command input.
displayed.
command input.

RAS command 5001

This command runs all memories through a setup process and
performs initialization. This command must be executed; if not,
device functioning cannot be guaranteed.
This command should be executed without banknotes.
This command cannot be used for units that are not installed.
The contents of the EEPROM in

each unit are deleted and the factory
settings are input.
5 0 0 1 The settings are made for all
sensors and units.
All main memories are cleared.
All logs are cleared.
command input if initialization is
performed without error.
If there is an error during
initialization, the error code will be
displayed (see chapter
"Malfunctions").
_
command input.

RAS command 5101

When you press the PSW2 button during this operation, the BCM
returns to command input and the date/time is not changed.
The data is entered in the decimal system. In case of an error the
PSW1 button is disregarded.
When the time is set, the seconds are set to '00'.
Set the year using rotary switches

RSW1 and RSW2 and press the
PSW1 button.
Y Y - MM - D D
Set the month using rotary switches

PSW1 button.
Y Y - MM - D D
Set the day using rotary switches

PSW1 button.
Y Y - MM - D D
The time setting is displayed.
Set the hour using rotary switches

PSW1 button.
H H - MM

Set the minutes using rotary

switches RSW1 and RSW2 and
press the PSW1 button.
H H - MM
command input.
If there is an error while you are

making the settings, the error code
_ will be displayed (see chapter
XXXX XXX "Malfunctions").
command input.

Changing Firmware
Downloading firmware
Overview of CPU board 01750047380
1 2 3 4 5 7 8
CN4 ON
OFF
LCD
DSW1
RSW1 RSW2 PSW1 PSW2
CN4 Slot for memory card

LCD Display element
DSW1 DIP microswitches
PSW1 'Confirm' key
PSW2 'Cancel' key

Sensors and electromechanical components Malfunctions
Cash input unit
Transport
unit
IR sensor
Recognition unit
MR sensor
PSBV (L / R) Reject unit
DRS sensor
IMS sensor
Escrow unit
UV sensor
Power supply
Cash box

Malfunctions Sensors and electromechanical components
Meaning of abbreviations and symbols
P Photosensor
M Motor
S Magnet
Transport unit
PS1 (L / R) Monitoring photo sensor
M1 Transport motor 1
M2 Transport motor 2
SD1 Redirect magnet
SD2 Redirect magnet
SD3 Redirect magnet
Reject unit
PSK1 (L / R) Monitoring photo sensor
PSK5 Counting sensor
PIK1 Lower lift position sensor
PIK2 Upper lift position sensor
MK1 Lift motor
MK2 Transport motor
SDK1 Stop magnet lift motor

Sensors and electromechanical components Malfunctions
Cash box
PSG1 Counting sensor
PSG2 Cash box full
PSG3 Cash box empty
PIG1 Lower lift position sensor
MG1 Transport sensor
Escrow unit
PSR1 Counting sensor
PSR2 Tape start detecting sensor
PIR1 Tape end detecting sensor
MG1 Transport motor
Cash input unit

PSM1 (L / R) Monitoring photo sensor
PSM5 Counting sensor
MM1 Transport motor
MM2 Reverse motor
MM 3 Feed in motor
SDM1 Feed in magnet
SDM2 Grip magnet

Malfunctions Sensors and electromechanical components
Recognition unit
PSBV (L / R) Color sensor
IR sensor Infrared sensor
MR sensor Magnetic sensor
DRS sensor Security thread sensor
IMS sensor Image sensor
UV sensor Fluorescent sensor

Malfunctions Status messages of the controller
Status messages of the controller

The status display of the controller informs you about the malfunctions of the
BCM.
Status message of the controller: XXXX ± XXX
The first four digits show the error code and the last three digits show the
processing code.
Switch the BCM off before replacing a component.
Perform a RESET every time you replace a component or the BCM

i itself. To perform a RESET, the BCM must be pushed back into the
device.
If the BCM needs to be replaced as a whole, remove the memory card

i for currency data from the old BCM and install it in the new BCM.
Code Meaning Reaction

OFF No power supply Switch the device on.

Status messages of the controller Malfunctions
The cause of the following error codes is that a banknote or foreign

object is stuck at the photosensor or that the photosensor is soiled.
Code Photosensor Reaction

Transport unit: Remove banknote or foreign
20 01 PS1L object.
02 PS1R Clean the photosensor,
03 PS2L Carry out a RESET.
04 PS2R
05 PS3L
PS3R If the error persists, replace the
06
PS4L CPU board. Carry out a RESET.
07
08 PS4R
09 PS5L If the error persists, replace the
10 PS5R BCM.
Reject unit: Remove banknote or foreign

20 21 PSK1L object.
22 PSK1R Clean the photosensor.
23 PSK2L
Carry out a RESET.
24 PSK2R
25 PSK3L
PSK3R If the error persists, replace the
26
PSK4L reject unit. Carry out a RESET.
27
28 PSK4R
29 PSK5 If the error persists, replace the
30 PIK1 BCM.
31 PIK2
Cash box: Remove banknote or foreign
20 41 PSG1 object.
42 PSG2 Clean the photosensor.
43 PSG3 Carry out a RESET.
44 PIG1
If the error persists, replace the
cash box. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


Escrow unit: Remove banknote or foreign
20 61 PSR1 object.
62 PSR2 Clean the photosensor.
63 PIR1 Carry out a RESET.

escrow unit. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
Cash input unit: Remove banknote or foreign
20 81 PSM1L object.
82 PSM1R Clean the photosensor.
83 PSM2L Carry out a RESET.
84 PSM2R
85 PSM3L
86 If the error persists, replace the
PSM3R
87 cash input unit. Carry out a
PSM4L
88 RESET.
PSM4R
89 PSM5
BCM.


30 01 Banknote or foreign object Remove banknote or foreign
remaining in the transport unit object.
at M1. Carry out a RESET.
02 Banknote or foreign object

If the error persists, check the
remaining in the transport unit
transport belts and replace them,
at M2.
if necessary. Carry out a RESET.

CPU board. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
remaining in the reject unit. object.
Carry out a RESET.

reject unit. Carry out a RESET.
remaining in the cash box. object.
Carry out a RESET.

remaining in the escrow unit. object,
Carry out a RESET.



remaining in the cash input unit. object.
Carry out a RESET.

cash input unit. Carry out a
RESET.
remaining in the transport unit object.
at M1. Carry out a RESET.
12 Banknote or foreign object If the error persists, check the

remaining in the transport unit transport belts and replace them,
at M2. if necessary. Carry out a RESET.


BCM.
remaining in the reject unit. object.
Carry out a RESET.

remaining in the cash box. object.
Carry out a RESET.



remaining in the escrow unit. object.
Carry out a RESET.

escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.
remaining in the cash input unit. object.
Carry out a RESET.

cash input unit.
Carry out a RESET.
30 21 Transport unit motor M1 error Replace the CPU board.
Carry out a RESET.
22 Transport unit motor M2 error

BCM.
30 23 Reject unit motor error Replace the reject unit.
Carry out a RESET.
30 24 Cash box motor error Replace the cash box unit.
Carry out a RESET.
30 25 Escrow unit motor error Replace the escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.
30 26 Cash input unit motor error. Replace the cash input unit.
Carry out a RESET.
30 31 Transport unit motor M1 error Replace the CPU board.
Carry out a RESET.
32 Transport unit motor M2 error If the error persists, replace the

BCM.
30 35 Escrow unit motor error Replace the escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.


31 01 PS1 object.
02 PS2 Clean the photosensor.
03 PS3 Carry out a RESET.
04 PS4
05 PS5 If the error persists, replace the
07 PSK5 CPU board.
08 PSR1 Carry out a RESET.
09 PSG1
31 21 PSK1L object.
23 PSK2L Carry out a RESET.
24 PSK2R
25 PSK3L If the error persists, replace the
26 PSK3R reject unit. Carry out a RESET.
27 PSK4L
28 PSK4R
29 PSK5
31 41 PSG1 object.

31 61 PSR1 object.
Clean the photosensor.
Carry out a RESET.



31 81 PSM1 object.
82 PSM2 Clean the photosensor.
83 PSM3 Carry out a RESET.
84 PSM4
85 PSM5
RESET.
32 01 Area PS1 - PSBV object.
02 Area PSBV - PS2 Clean the photosensor.
03 Area PS2 - PS3 or PS4 Carry out a RESET.
04 Area PS2 - PS4
05 Area PS3 - PS4
Area PS3 - PS5 If the error persists, replace the
06 CPU board.
07 Area PS3 - Escrow unit
Area PS4 - Reject unit Carry out a RESET.
08
Area PS5 - Cash box
09
Area PS1 - PS2 If the error persists, replace the
10
Area PS5 - PS4 BCM.
11
32 21 PSK5 object.
Carry out a RESET.

32 41 PSG1 object.
Carry out a RESET.



32 61 PSR1 object.
62 Clean the photosensor.
Carry out a RESET.

32 81 PSM5 object.
Carry out a RESET.

RESET.
33 01 PS1 object.
02 PS2 Clean the photosensor.
04 PS4 Carry out a RESET.
05 PS5
07 PSK5
09 PSG1 If the error persists, check the
11 PS2 transport belts and replace them,
12 PS3 if necessary. Carry out a RESET.
13 PS4
14 PS5 If the error persists, replace the
16 PSK5 CPU board. Carry out a RESET.
17 PSR1
18 PSG1 If the error persists, replace the
BCM.
33 21 PSK5 object.
Carry out a RESET.



33 44 PIG1 object.
Carry out a RESET.

33 61 PSR2 object.
Carry out a RESET.


34 01 Note transport faulty. Remove banknote or foreign
object.
Clean the sensors in the
recognition unit.
Carry out a RESET.


recognition unit for foreign
objects or dirt and replace the
complete recognition unit, if
necessary. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


36 21 Reject unit malfunction. Remove banknote or foreign
23 object.
24 Clean the photosensor.
Carry out a RESET.

remaining between one cash object.
input unit photosensor or Clean the photosensor.
photosensor is soiled. Carry out a RESET.

RESET.
remaining between one cash object.
input unit photosensor or Clean the photosensor.
photosensor is soiled. Carry out a RESET.

RESET.
39 01 The reject unit is not inserted Place the reject unit properly into
properly. the BCM.




39 02 The cash box is not inserted Place the cash box properly into
properly. the BCM.


39 03 The escrow unit is not inserted Place the escrow unit properly
properly. into the BCM.


39 04 The cash input unit is not Place the cash input unit properly
inserted properly. into the BCM.

RESET.

40 01 Device cover not closed or CPU Close the device cover.
of transport unit defective. Carry out a RESET.


BCM.


02 remaining in the transport path object.
03 or photosensor soiled. Clean the photosensor.
Carry out a RESET.
If the error persists,

check the transport belts and
replace them, if necessary.
Carry out a RESET.


necessary. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
Number of notes inconsistent Remove banknote or foreign
among the units: object.
52 01 Escrow → reject Clean the photosensor.
02 Escrow → cash box Carry out a RESET.
03 Transport unit → escrow
04 Escrow in → escrow out If the error persists, replace the
Check the respective unit and

Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


52 61 Number of notes inconsistent Replace the escrow unit.
on the escrow. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.

The cause of the following error codes is either a faulty photosensor

or a faulty CPU board.

Transport unit: Replace the CPU board.
70 01 PS1L Carry out a RESET.
02 PS1R
03 PS2L
04 PS2R
BCM.
05 PS3L
06 PS3R
07 PS4L
08 PS4R
09 PS5L
10 PS5R
Reject unit: Replace the reject unit.
70 21 PSK1L Carry out a RESET.
22 PSK1R
23 PSK2L If the error persists, replace the
24 PSK2R BCM.
25 PSK3L
26 PSK3R
27 PSK4L
28 PSK4R
29 PSK5
30 PIK1
31 PIK2
Cash box: Replace the cash box.
70 41 PSG1 Carry out a RESET.
42 PSG2
43 PSG3 If the error persists, replace the
44 PIG1 BCM.
Escrow unit: Replace the escrow unit.
70 61 PSR1 Carry out a RESET.
62 PSR2
63 PIR1 If the error persists, replace the
BCM.


Cash input unit: Replace the cash input unit.
70 81 PSM1L Carry out a RESET.
82 PSM1R
83 PSM2L If the error persists, replace the
84 PSM2R BCM.
85 PSM3L
86 PSM3R
87 PSM4L
88 PSM4R
89 PSM5

The cause of the following error codes is that a banknote or foreign

object is stuck at the photosensor or that the photosensor is soiled.

71 01 PS1L object.
02 PS1R Clean the photosensor.
04 PS2R
05 PS3L
06 PS3R If the error persists, replace the
07 PS4L CPU board. Carry out a RESET.
08 PS4R
10 PS5R BCM.

71 21 PSK1L object.
23 PSK2L Carry out a RESET.
24 PSK2R
25 PSK3L
26 PSK3R
27 PSK4L
28 PSK4R
29 PSK5
71 41 PSG1 object.



71 61 PSR1 object.

71 81 PSM1L object.
84 PSM2R
85 PSM3L
86 PSM3R
87 PSM4L
RESET.
88 PSM4R
89 PSM5
72 01 PS1L object.
04 PS2R
05 PS3L
07 PS4L CPU board. Carry out a RESET.
08 PS4R
10 PS5R BCM.
72 21 PSK1L object.
23 PSK2L
Carry out a RESET.
24 PSK2R
25 PSK3L
26 PSK3R If the error persists, replace the
27 PSK4L reject unit. Carry out a RESET.
28 PSK4R
29 PSK5


72 41 PSG1 object.

Escrow unit Remove banknote or foreign
72 61 PSR1 object.

escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.
72 81 PSM1L object.
83 PSM2L
Carry out a RESET.
84 PSM2R
85 PSM3L
86 PSM3R If the error persists, replace the
87 PSM4L cash input unit.
88 PSM4R Carry out a RESET.
89 PSM5
73 01 PS1L object.
03 PS2L
Carry out a RESET.
04 PS2R
05 PS3L
07 PS4L CPU board.
08 PS4R Carry out a RESET.
09 PS5L
BCM.


73 21 PSK1L object.
23 PSK2L
Carry out a RESET.
24 PSK2R
25 PSK3L
26 PSK3R If the error persists, replace the
27 PSK4L reject unit.
28 PSK4R Carry out a RESET.
29 PSK5
73 41 PSG1 object.

cash box.
Carry out a RESET.
73 61 PSR1 object.

escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.
73 81 PSM1L object.
84 PSM2R
85 PSM3L
PSM3R If the error persists, replace the
86
PSM4L cash input unit.
87
88 PSM4R Carry out a RESET.
89 PSM5


02 remaining at the photosensor of object.
03 the escrow unit or the Clean the photosensor.
photosensors are soiled. Carry out a RESET.
Check the escrow tapes and

Carry out a RESET.

escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.
02 remaining at the photosensors object.
of the reject unit or the Clean the photosensor.
photosensors are soiled. Carry out a RESET.

reject unit.
Carry out a RESET.
86 01 Transport unit error. Replace the CPU board.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
86 02 Reject unit malfunction. Replace the reject unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
86 03 Cash box error. Replace the cash box unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


86 04 Escrow unit error. Replace the escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
86 05 Cash input unit faulty. Replace the cash input unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
86 21 BCM error. Replace the CPU board.
to Carry out a RESET.
25
BCM.
properly or it is defective. the BCM.
Switch the BCM off and on again.



BCM.





BCM.
86 33 The reject unit is not inserted Place the escrow unit properly
properly or it is defective. into the BCM.



BCM.
inserted properly or it is into the BCM.
defective. Switch the BCM off and on again.

RESET.


BCM.





BCM.



BCM.



BCM.


inserted properly or it is into the BCM.
defective. Switch the BCM off and on again.

RESET.


BCM.
86 45 Recognition unit is defective. Check if the plug connections are
all tight in the recognition unit.
necessary.
Carry out a RESET.


BCM.





BCM.



BCM.



BCM.


inserted properly or the into the BCM.
corresponding CPU board is Switch the BCM off and on again.
defective.
RESET.


BCM.
86 55 Recognition unit is defective. Check if the plug connections are
all tight in the recognition unit.
necessary.
Carry out a RESET.


BCM.
87 06 BCM unit is defective. Replace the CPU board.
64
BCM.


11
necessary.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
88 50 Button on DSP board defective. Replace the CPU board.
Carry out a RESET.

necessary.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
89 00 Recognition unit is defective. If the error persists, check the
to recognition unit for foreign
52 objects or dirt and replace the
necessary.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


89 53 Memory card is empty or faulty. Check the contents of the
memory card or the memory card
itself.
Make a download on the memory
card or replace the memory card.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
89 54 Recognition unit is defective. If the error persists, check the
to recognition unit for foreign
F3 objects or dirt and replace the
necessary.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
92 X1 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the CPU board.
Transport unit control is Carry out a RESET.
defective.
BCM.
92 X2 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the reject unit.
Reject unit control is defective. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


92 X3 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the cash box.
Cash box control is defective. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
92 X4 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the escrow unit.
Escrow unit control is defective. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
92 X5 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the cash input unit.
Cash input unit control is Carry out a RESET.
defective.
BCM.
92 71 Transport unit control is Replace the CPU board.
72 defective. Carry out a RESET.
73
BCM.
92 81 Firmware faulty Transfer the new firmware.
Carry out a RESET.

firmware and the memory card
and repeat the firmware transfer.


BCM.


93 07 The transport unit buffer Remove the banknote.
memory is full, or a banknote Carry out a RESET.
remains in the transport path.

BCM.
94 01 Communication between BCM Check if the BCM is switched on,
and system unit is interrupted if not, switch the BCM on.
during a transaction (power
failure) If the error persists, check the
BCM power supply.
Carry out a RESET.


power supply unit.

BCM.
95 01 No 24 V for the transport unit. Replace the CPU board.
02 Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
95 03 No 24 V for the reject unit. Replace the reject unit. Switch
the BCM off and on again.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


95 04 No 24 V for the cash box. Replace the cash box unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
95 05 No 24 V for the escrow unit. Replace the escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
95 06 No 24 V for the cash input unit. Replace the cash input unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 01 Transport unit ROM is faulty. Replace the CPU board.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 02 Reject unit ROM is faulty. Replace the reject unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 03 Cash box ROM is faulty. Replace the cash box.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


96 04 Escrow unit ROM is faulty. Replace the escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 05 Cash input unit ROM is faulty. Replace the cash input unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 22 Reject unit is faulty. Replace the reject unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 23 Cash box is faulty. Replace the cash box.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 24 Escrow unit is faulty. Replace the escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 25 Cash input unit faulty. Replace the cash input unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


96 X2 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the reject unit.
Reject unit control is defective. Carry out a RESET.
X = 4: If the error persists,

replace the CPU board.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 X3 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the cash box.
Cash box control is defective. Carry out a RESET.

Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 X4 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the escrow unit.
Escrow unit control is defective. Carry out a RESET.

Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


96 X5 (X = 3 - 5) Replace the cash input unit.
Cash input unit control is Carry out a RESET.
defective.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
96 61 Memory card not detected for Switch the BCM off and check if
firmware download. the memory card is inserted
properly.
Switch the BCM on again.

memory card.


BCM.


96 62 Firmware loading error. Switch the BCM off and replace
the memory card.
Switch the BCM on again.

escrow unit, the cash input unit,
the reject unit or the cash box.
Carry out a RESET.


BCM.
97 01 Transport unit RAM is faulty. Replace the CPU board.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
97 02 Reject unit RAM is faulty. Replace the reject unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
97 03 Cash box RAM is faulty. Replace the cash box. Switch the
BCM off and on again.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.


97 04 Escrow unit RAM is faulty. Replace the escrow unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
97 05 Cash input unit RAM is faulty. Replace the cash input unit.
Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
97 11 External transport unit RAM is Replace the CPU board.
faulty. Carry out a RESET.

BCM.
98 01 Communication (GSPC-1) is Check if the V.24 cable is
to faulty. connected tightly.
22 Carry out a RESET.

escrow unit, the cash input unit,
the reject unit or the cash box.
Carry out a RESET.


BCM.


99 XX General firmware error Replace the escrow unit, the
cash input unit, the reject unit or
the cash box.
Carry out a RESET.


BCM.

Replacing the set of belts Removal/Installation of Components
Replacing the set of belts

The following illustration shows how the transport belts run.
Belt no. Number of belts Type Part number

1 2 493 SE-N-SBR 01750047383
2 2 680 SE-N-SBR 01750047389
3 2 349 SE-N-SBR 01750047385
4 1 919 SE-N-SBR 01750047384
5 1 704 SE-N-SBR 01750047390
6 1 190 SE-N-SBR 01750047386
7 1 332 SE-N-SBR 01750047387
8 1 214 SE-N-SBR 01750047388

Replacing the escrow tapes Removal/Installation of Components
Replacing the escrow tapes
Escrow tapes
Tape 1 01750047396
Tape 2 01750047397
• Remove the escrow unit (see section "Escrow unit").

Remove screws (1) to (4).
Push the cover (5) back (see arrow),
raise it in front and remove it.
Remove the four screws (1) and (2)

and remove the plate (3).
Remove screws (4) and (5).

Removal/Installation of Components Replacing the escrow tapes
Loosen the screws through the

holes (1) to (4).
Loosen screws (5) and (6).
Turn the escrow unit over on its

side.
Remove screws (1) and (3) and
remove the cover (2).
Remove the side cover with the
handle (4).
Turn the escrow unit back over.

Raise the escrow unit a little by the
drum (1) and push it out of the
housing (3) in the direction shown by
the arrow (2).

Replacing the escrow tapes Removal/Installation of Components
Unwind the tape by turning the drum

(1) in the direction of the arrow until
the adhesive tape shows.
Remove any adhesive tape from the
drum and roll up the tape.
Lift the cotter pins (2) and (3) up and
remove them. Remove the drivers
and the belts with the upper bearing.
• Remove the remaining tape from the escrow unit.

Insert the roll with the black tape (1),
the bearing (2), the driver (3) and
the cotter pin (4) one after the other.
Take the black tape around the

deflecting pin (1), through the hybrid
photosensor (2), past the brush (3)
and around the deflecting roller (4).
Attach the tape with an adhesive
strip to the drum (5).
Push the cotter pin down to secure
the roll with the black tape.

Removal/Installation of Components Replacing the escrow tapes
• Insert the roll with the transparent tape, the bearing, the driver and the
cotter pin one after the other.
Take the transparent tape through
the hybrid photosensor (1), around
the deflecting pin (2)through the
hybrid photosensor (1), and around
the deflecting roller (3).
Attach the tape with an adhesive
strip to the drum (4).
Make sure that the black tape (1)

and the transparent tape (2) are
secured as shown in the picture.
Push the cotter pin down to secure
the roll with the transparent tape.
Reinstall the other parts by following the same steps in reverse order.

Function Test
Test button
Test runs can be started and the CCDM can be reset by pressing the Test
button on the control panel.
i A test function can always be triggered unless an error has occurred

that prevents this (for example a defective CCDM controller).
Calling the function codes

i To call the function codes, the CCDM head module must be pushed
into position (safety switch closed).
Pressing and holding the test button causes the status display to switch to the
function code. Continuing to hold down the function button changes the
display of the function code to '00', '01', '02' and '03' in turn. The meaning of
the individual function codes is explained in the following table. To start a
particular function, let go of the button when the status display shows the
corresponding function code.
01750062112 C CCDM - Service Manual 7-1

Calling the function codes Function Test
Function code Function

Extended error Upon display of the extended error code
code (if available) the status display changes
to the current status of the device
(normal operation or error condition).
(See also the chapter "Faults", section
"Error codes / warning codes".)
RESET (warm
reset)
Diagnostic test The mechanical components of the
RESET CCDM are moved, one after the other.
A reset is performed if no error has
occurred.
If an error occurs, the diagnostic test is
terminated and the error code is
displayed.
You can cancel the diagnostics test by
pressing the test button briefly. A
RESET is then performed.
Photosensor The photosensors are synchronized
synchronization automatically.
Then the status display changes to the
current status of the device (normal
operation or error condition).
If an error message is displayed
following photosensor synchronization
after replacing a component, you must
first perform a 'factory synchronization'
(see section "Calling the service
function codes").
Reserved for
new functions
to
7-2 CCDM - Service Manual 01750062112 C

Function Test Calling the service function codes
Calling the service function codes

At present, photosensor synchronization (factory synchronization) and metal
sensor synchronization are implemented.
While the shutter is open, the metal sensor synchronization identifies new
points of operation for the metal detection. This synchronization is always
required after components have been replaced, since the replacement might
have caused a change in mechanical or electrical characteristics or in the coil
position.
i To call the service function codes, the CCDM head module must be
pulled out (safety switch activated).
Pressing and holding the test button causes the status display to switch to the
service function code.
To select photosensor synchronization and metal sensor synchronization, let
go of the button when the status display shows the function code '--'.
The synchronizations are performed when the CCDM head module is pushed
in again.
Function code Function
Photosensor Prerequisite:
synchronization – All media must have been removed
(factory from the transport paths.
synchronization) – All components must be in working
and metal sensor position.
synchronization
After pushing in the CCDM head
module, the photosensors and the
metal sensors synchronize
automatically.
Then the status display changes to the
current status of the device (normal
operation or error condition).
01750062112 C CCDM - Service Manual 7-3

Faults
Status messages
Status display
The current status of the CCDM, including any faults that may have occurred,
is shown on the status display.
The status display shows the following messages, depending on the type of
display:

No display Normal operation; no fault / no warning
(Green LED on)
< constant
Function code (see chapter "Function test")
> blinking
Error code
> permanent
Warning code
01750062112 D CCDM - Service Manual 8-1

Status messages Faults
Localizing the cause of the error

The numbers in the figure below represent the error and warning codes shown
on the status display. The numbers are positioned on the diagram in such a
way as to make it easier to locate the source of the error. The exact position of
the photosensors and motors referred to in the code tables can be found in the
section "Overview of sensors and actuators" in the appendix. The error codes
of the photosensors (codes 60 to 89) are not included in this figure.
8-2 CCDM - Service Manual 01750062112 D

Faults
10 40 31
11 32 28 24 25
01750062112 D
15 33 30
34 22 21 20 13 19
51
41 42 43
50 46 47 26 27
48
52
90 91
96
CCDM - Service Manual

94 92
95 93
55%
Status messages
8-3
Error codes / warning codes

Only check plug connections and only replace components when no
voltage is being applied!
– If components need to be replaced to clear a fault, please refer to

i
the relevant section in the chapter "Removal/Installation of
Components".
– When a component has been replaced, always synchronize the
photosensors.
– After clearing a media jam, always perform a reset.
How to execute measures
Remedy Note
Synchronize the Press the test button and select the function code
photosensors '03' (see chapter "Function Test").
Performing a RESET Press the test button and select the function code
'01' (see chapter "Function Test").
Restarting the Switch the device off and back on (for details see
system chapter "Basic Operation" in the operating manual).
Displaying the Press the test button and select the function code
extended error code '00' (see chapter "Function Test").
(EC) The extended error code is shown on the status
display as follows:
First high byte (2-3 seconds) (only in case of
4-digit error code), then low byte (2-3 seconds).
For details refer to the examples on the following
page.
Next, the two-digit error code is displayed again.

Faults Status messages
Examples of the extended error code display
Error code '17' / EC '23' as an Error code '24' / EC '102' as an

example of a 2-digit display of error example of a 4-digit display of error
code: code:
Error code Error code

display display
Automatic return to
Call Call
error code display
function code '00' function code '00'
Automatic return to
error code display
Display of Display of
EC for 2-3 s EC for 2-3 s
(low byte) (high byte)
Display of
EC for 2-3 s
(low byte)

Error messages in the area of the head module

Code EC Meaning Remedy
Boot up (electronic Wait for the system to finish booting
self-test) up.
Boot up (after Wait for the system to finish booting
reset) up.
Operating system – Restart the CCDM.
error, hardware – If necessary re-load the firmware.
error – If the error reoccurs, replace the
controller.
Operating system – Restart the CCDM.
error, internal – If the error persists, re-load the
firmware error firmware.
– If the error reoccurs, replace the
controller.
No connection to Permanent status display:
dispenser module Dispenser module 01750047708 is
installed which may cause incidents
in the dispensing area. Replacement
with an up-to-date dispenser module
is recommended.
Blinking status display:

– Check the cable connection
between the dispenser module
and the back panel.
– Restart the CCDM.
– Replace the dispenser module.
chassis of the CCDM.
No connection to – Check the plug connections
amplifier board between amplifier and controller
board.
– If necessary re-load the firmware.
controller.


No connection to – Check the plug connection
stacker board between amplifier board and
controller board.
– Check the configuration of the
controller.
– Re-load the firmware of the
CCDM.
distributor transport.
Battery on – Restart the CCDM.
controller board – Delete the cassette counters and
empty the CEX.
– Perform a reset.
– Restart the system
controller.
Device – Restart the system
configuration of – Load the appropriate configuration
controller incorrect using the product-specific test
or missing software.
– If the error reoccurs, reload the
firmware.
– If the error cannot be eliminated
by means of the above steps,
replace the controller.
Error on controller – Restart the system
– If necessary re-load the firmware.
– If the error cannot be eliminated,
replace the amplifier / controller
board.
No firmware – Restart the system
– If the error persists, re-load the
firmware.


Safety switch – Check whether the CCDM (head
active module and cassette module) is
pushed into the device correctly
(locking mechanism!) and whether
the safety switch is correctly
bridged.
– Check the connection cable
between the safety switch and the
back panel.
– If the red LED (DLOC) lights up,
too, reset the DLOC first, then pull
the device out and push it in
again. The device is only ready for
operation once this procedure was
carried out.
safety switch.
After the XSA module has
i been reconfigured, there is a
waiting period of up to 270
seconds until the CCDM is
ready for operation.
Retract documents Remove the documents from the
are stored in the input/output area.
input/output area.
Minimum Register the cassettes using the
configuration is product-specific software (e.g.
missing (at least 1 Service Operator Panel).
cash-in cassette +
retract cassette)
Operating system Wait for the system to finish loading
is loading new files the firmware.
on the CCDM
controller
Data transfer on Wait for the data transfer to finish.
RS232 interface


The application – Power down the PC / the
overloads the application.
CCDM hardware – Leave the CCDM switched on for
(too many reset five minutes.
commands per – Power up the PC / the application.
time unit)
Shutter blocked – Remove any foreign matter from
the shutter area.
– Make sure the plug of the shutter
is plugged in at the controller.
shutter.
– Mechanical blocking / foreign matter,
– Plug has not been plugged in,
– Shutter is defective.
Error of the metal – Check the plug connection on the
detection unit metal detection unit.
dispenser module.
Module is defective or plug has not been plugged in.


Error on swivel Swivel transport unit:
transport unit or in – Check the home position of swivel
the area of the transport units 1 and 2.
bundle alignment – Inspect photosensors VLS3 and
VLS4.
– Inspect motors VSM5 and VSM6.
– Replace the dispenser module, if
necessary.
Bundle alignment:
– Check whether the bundle
alignment is clear.
– Inspect photosensors VLS8 and
motor VSM7.
necessary.
– Swivel transport 1 / 2 is mechanically blocked.
– Home position photosensor is defective or soiled (VLS3 /
VLS4).
– Transport error: motor does not run properly (VSM5 /
VSM6).
– Swivel transport is mechanically blocked.
– Home position photosensor is defective or soiled (VLS3).
– Transport error: motor does not run properly (VSM5).
or
diagnostic test triggered by operator:
swivel transport 1 in dispenser module defective.
– Swivel transport is mechanically blocked.
or
swivel transport 2 in dispenser module defective.


– Drive is mechanically blocked.
or
diagnostic test triggered by operator: bundle width setting
in dispenser module defective.
Media jam in – Remove any jammed media from
dispenser module the dispenser module's paper
(feed error path.
detected prior to – Perform a reset.
dispensing) – Check the cam disk position.
– Check the dispenser module's
motors.
necessary.
– Paper jam in I/O transport area.
– Photosensor VLS2 or VLS5 is defective or soiled.
– Semi-rotary actuator motor does not run properly
(VSM1).
– Swivel transport is not lowered due to blocking etc.
(VSM6 / VLS4).
– Stacker table is not on top due to blocking or defect
(VSM8 / VLS9).
– or
diagnostic test triggered by operator: dispenser module
defective.
– A paper jam has occurred in the dispensing / I/O area.
– Photosensor VLS2 is defective or soiled.
– Motors VSM1/2/3 do not run properly.
See error code no. 0100 for details.


– Paper jam in I/O area -> paper feed rollers.
– Photosensor VLS2 / VLS6 is defective or soiled.
– Transport error: motors VSM1/2/3 do not run properly.
– Swivel transport is not lowered due to blocking etc.
(VSM6 / VLS4).
– Stacker table is not on top due to blocking or defect
(VSM8 / VLS9).
– Swivel transport 2 is defective (VSM1).
– Clock wheel in swivel transport (VLS5) is defective or
soiled.
– Dispensing comb is blocked.
– A paper jam has occurred in the paper path between
stacker and I/O transport, or paper is too long.
– Transport errors: motors (RSM1 / VSM1 / VSM2)
do not run properly.
– Incorrect cam disk position caused by jam or defect:
Transport rollers should plunge through stacker table I/O
transport (VSM8 / VLS9).
– Swivel transport 2 is not on top due to blocking etc.
(VSM6 / VLS4).


Paper jam detected – Check paper path in dispenser
during separation module.
process. – Clean the photosensors in the
dispensing area of the dispenser
module.
– Carry out a photosensor
adjustment / initialization.
– Reset the photosensors to the
default values, if necessary.
– Check the dispenser module's
motors, if necessary.
necessary.
– Foreign objects or dirt detected at VLS6 or VLS7 prior to
dispensing process.
– A paper jam has occurred in the paper feed roller area,
or paper is too long.
– Paper jam in paper feed roller area -> intermediate
transport.
– Photosensor VLS7 is defective or soiled
– A paper jam has occurred in the intermediate transport
and possibly also in the alignment station.
– Motor ASM1 of alignment station does not run properly.
– A paper jam has occurred in the dispensing area.
– Motors VSM1/2/3/4 do not run properly.


– Paper jam in dispensing area or intermediate transport.
– Paper too long.
Document jam in intermediate transport or at entrance to
alignment station.
Paper jam detected – Remove the media jam in the
during separation dispenser module and reset the D-
process. Loc using the product-specific
software.
necessary.
Media jam in front of VLS2 during bundle output from
intermediate transport to I/O box
Media jam under the VLS6 during bundle output from
intermediate transport to I/O box
intermediate transport to I/O box.


Error of hall – Check the plug connection on the
sensors dispenser's board (bottom of
dispenser module).
necessary.
– Hall sensor element 1 is defective or plug is not plugged
in.
– Soiled roller, or paper remaining in roller.
– Hall sensor element 2 is defective or plug is not plugged
in.
– Soiled roller, or paper remaining in roller.


Media jam in reject 0116, 0180, 0182
transport area – Remove any jammed media
between the reject transport and
the dispenser module.
– Make sure the rocker is
assembled in the correct position
in relation to the axis inside the
dispenser module (dispenser
module has to be removed for this
purpose).
– Check the motors of the dispenser
module and the reject transport.
– Replace the dispenser module
and/or the reject transport.
0171:
– Remove any jammed media
between the reject transport and
the dispenser module or in the
reject module.
– Check whether the belt of the
reject transport is laying on the
center of the guiding rollers.
– Replace the dispenser module
and/or the reject transport.
– Paper jam in reject path.
– Mechanical initialization of cam disk not correct due to
blocking.
– Mechanical initialization of swivel transport 2 not correct.
– Photosensor VLS6 / VLS2 is defective or soiled.
– Dispensing motors VSM2/3 do not run properly.
– Media jam stacker => I/O transport


– A paper jam has occurred in the paper path between
stacker and I/O transport.
– Transport errors: motors (RSM1 / VSM1) do not run
properly.
– Incorrect cam disk position caused by jam or defect: I/O
stacker should be lowered to ensure free reject path
(VSM8 / VLS9).
– Swivel transport 2 is not on top due to blocking etc.
(VSM6 / VLS4).
– Media jam found in front of VLS12 during reject box
clearing => I/O box.
Error of the cam – Restart the CCDM.
disk – Check the cam disk position
(release).
necessary.
– or
– diagnostic test triggered by operator: cam disk in
dispenser module defective.


Media jam in front – Clear the media jam in the
of or in the alignment station
alignment station – Check the photosensors and the
motors in the alignment station.
– Perform a reset
– Replace the alignment station, if
necessary.
Document in front of ASL1 or ALS1 is defective (keeps
detecting document) -> motor AMS1 possibly defective as
a result of which document is not removed from position in
front of ASL1.
or diagnostic test triggered by operator: alignment station
defective.
Document jam between alignment station and sensor
module or in AMG1 deflector.
No document jam. However, document transport caused
problems (too much slippage or too much friction).
Check transport path 'Intermediate Transport Exit' –
'Alignment Station' – 'Sensor Transport Entrance'.
Document jam in the alignment drum
(document remains in drum).
Document jam in front of ALS1 during transport of
document in the alignment drum
Media jam in front of ALS1 during transport of media from
alignment drum -> check transport path through drum.


Error magnetic – Check the plug connection with
character reader the magnetic character reader.
– Replace the magnetic character
reader, if necessary.
ADDMASTER electronic is defective or not properly
connected.
Error on check / – Restart the CCDM.
cash reader – Restart the system
– If necessary, reload check / cash
reader firmware.
– If necessary, reload Firewire
firmware (for check & cash
configuration).
– If the error reoccurs even after the
above steps have been taken,
replace the check / cash reader.
Only relevant for check processing:
– Check if the firewire cable is connected to the PC and
the BEB module.
– Check the PC's Firewire card.
BEB module is defective.
External light in – Check whether light is falling on
check / cash the check / cash reader.
reader – Clean the scanner lines of the
check / cash reader.
– External light in check / cash reader
– Banknote level detected (light level too high due to
soiled roller or document remaining under the reader).
– Transport pulse missing or outside of admissible
tolerance.
– Banknote level detected (light level too high due to
soiled roller or document remaining under the reader).


Communications – Re-load the firmware of the check /
problems with cash reader.
check / cash – Check and update the banknote
reader table.
– Re-load the currency data.
– Re-load the firmware.
– Replace the check / cash reader, if
necessary.
BEB firmware error.
BEB communication error ->
control logic RS232 data transfer problems.
BEB data error ->
configuration data faulty / corrupt.
BEB note table configuration not Ok.
BEB firmware error.
BEB syntax - context error ->
control logic RS232 data transfer problems.


Communication – Re-load the check / cash reader's
problems (time-out) firmware, the CCDM's firmware
(RS232 interface ) and/or the Firewire firmware.
with check / cash – Restart the system
reader – Replace the check / cash reader
and / or the back panel incl.
storage and sensor transport
(logic error).
No connection between RS232 interface and BEB
interface:
– Sensor transport not mounted or not properly connected.
– 'Back panel board' connector has interrupted
communication with sensor transport during operation.
– Module does not reply within specified time limit.
Communication errors from BEB to RS232 interface:
BEB module not mounted or not properly connected to
back panel.
BEB firmware and CCDM firmware not compatible.
Communication errors RS232 interface with BEB module:
back panel.
Communication with sensor transport interrupted during
operation.
Module does not reply within specified time limit.
back panel.
BEB firmware and CCDM firmware not compatible.


Media jam in – Clear the media jam in the sensor
sensor transport transport In particular, check the
area of the 3-way deflector.
Diagnostic test triggered by operator: sensor transport
defective.
– Document deflecting unit in alignment station is not
functioning; blocked.
– Photosensor SLS3 is defective or soiled
The three-way deflector has returned a document to the
alignment module during transport from escrow unit to
cassettes or reject tray.
Document jam in entrance area of sensor transport:
Clear the media jam in the area of the MIC reader and up
to the entry of the sensor transport. If the error occurs
frequently, replace the MIC reader.
Only until version 11xx!
Slippage during transport of documents from ALS1
alignment to BEB sensor, or BEB sensor document
message issued at the wrong time, so that the document
message can no longer be allocated to a specific
document.
Note could not be identified due to various reasons (event
message from BEB sensor during banknote processing).
Deflector in wrong position.
Jam between sensor transport (paper deflecting units) and
in front of RLS1.


Media jam in – Clear the media jam in the sensor
sensor transport transport In particular, check the
area of the 3-way deflector.
– Check functioning of deflectors in
sensor transport unit.
– If the deflectors cannot be
addressed correctly, replace the
back panel including deposit
transport and sensor transport, if
necessary (logic error).
Document jam between ALS1 and SLS1.
Malfunction of three-way deflector (during transport from
alignment station).
Malfunction of three-way deflector (during transport from
the escrow unit).
Document jam in area SLS1-> document deflecting units ->
escrow unit / reject transport.


Media jam in – Clear the media jam between
sensor transport sensor and deposit transport.
&
– Check functioning of deflectors
and motors in sensor transport
unit.
– If the deflectors cannot be
addressed correctly, replace the
back panel including deposit
transport and sensor transport, if
necessary (logic error).
– Media jam in sensor transport unit at three-way
deflector.
– SSM2 motor defective / not connected.
– SSM2 sensor defective / not connected.
or
3-way deflector (SSM2) in sensor transport defective.
– Media jam in sensor transport unit at reject deflector.
– SSM3 motor defective / not connected.
– SLS4 sensor defective / not connected.
or
reject deflector (SSM3) in sensor transport defective.


Document jam – Clear the jam between sensor and
between sensor reject transport.
transport and reject – Perform a reset.
transport
Document jam between sensor transport and cassettes /
reject transport under RSL1 sensor.
Document too short (smaller than 25 mm (0.98")).
Jam between sensor transport (paper deflecting units) and
behind RLS1.
Initialization error – Check the reject transport's plug
of reject transport connection. To check it first
remove the check / cash reader.
– Check the basic position of shaft /
axis and the screw in the reject
transport unit.
– Replace the reject transport, if
necessary.
– Home position photosensor is defective or soiled
(RLS3).
– Transport error: motor does not run properly (RSM2).
or
Diagnostic test triggered by operator: reject transport
defective.
Document jam – Clear the media jam between
between sensor sensor and storage or reject
transport and transport.
storage / reject – Restart the CCDM.
transport
Document jam between sensor transport and cassettes /
reject transport under RSL1 sensor.
Banknote does not quit RLS1 photosensor using specified
path and tolerance.RLS1.
After passing RLS1, the banknote does not reach KLS2 to
cassette module using specified path and tolerance.


Document jam at – Perform a reset.
the escrow unit – Clear the media jam in the escrow
area.
– Replace the drum module, if
necessary.
Document jam at escrow unit ELS1 or
Diagnostic test triggered by operator: escrow unit defective.
Malfunction of deflector.
Document has over 2 cm transport slippage / document is
jammed under ELS1.
During unwinding one document is missing due to external
intervention.
Jam during unwinding; distance is greater than twice the
maximum length of banknotes.
Drive blocked, ESM1 motor not connected, motor logic
defective, ELS3 fails to detect beginning of tape.
Escrow error: A media jam with subsequent initialization
has caused documents to be shifted behind the last
reachable position on the SCROW drum and can only be
removed manually.
CAUTION: Do not turn the ESCROW further than the
last visible note/check, as the ESROW will otherwise be
destroyed!
– Remove the documents in the ESCROW and reset the
D-Loc.
– Carry out a photosensor adjustment / initialization.
– Replace the dispenser module, if necessary.
Banknote from escrow unit does not reach RLS1
Escrow tape – Check the tape of the escrow unit.
defective – Perform a reset.
&
– Replace the escrow unit.
Torn band or full drum; tape no longer under ELS2.

Band torn; tape no longer under ELS2.

Error messages of photosensors
i Photosensors VLS7, ALS1 and SLS3 can only be checked when the
CCDM components are closed.

Error photosensor – If you can get to the photosensor, try
in dispenser to clean it.
– Check the photosensor using
KDIAG.
– Synchronize the photosensors.
– If the error persists, replace the
dispenser.
– Blinking: VLS10 out of service
– Constant: VLS10 in dispenser soiled
– Constant: VLS11 soiled


Error photosensor – If you can get to the photosensor, try
in alignment station to clean it.
– Check the photosensor using
KDIAG.
alignment station.
– Blinking: ALS3 out of service
– Constant: ALS3 soiled
– First check whether the cover of the alignment station is
closed properly.
Magnetic character First check whether the magnetic
reader not closed: character reader is closed properly.
Blinking: SLS3 out – If you can get to the photosensor, try
of service to clean it.
Constant: SLS3 – Check the photosensor using
soiled KDIAG.
magnetic character reader.


Error at – If you can get to the photosensor, try
photosensor SLS1: to clean it.
Blinking: SLS1 out – Check the photosensor using
of service KDIAG.
Constant: SLS1 – Synchronize the photosensors.
soiled – If the error persists replace the back
panel incl. sensor and storage
transport.
photosensor ELS1: to clean it.
Blinking: ELS1 out – Check the photosensor using
of service KDIAG.
Constant: ELS1 – Synchronize the photosensors.
soiled – If the error persists, replace the
escrow.
photosensor ELS5: to clean it.
Blinking: ELS5 out – Check the photosensor using
of service KDIAG.
Constant: ELS5 – Synchronize the photosensors.
escrow.
photosensor RLS1: to clean it.
Blinking: RLS1 out – Check the photosensor using
of service KDIAG.
Constant: RLS1 – Synchronize the photosensors.
soiled – If the error persists replace the back
panel incl. sensor and storage
transport.


photosensor RLS2: to clean it.
Blinking: RLS2 out – Check the photosensor using
of service KDIAG.
Constant: RLS2 – Synchronize the photosensors.
reject transport.
photosensor KLS2: to clean it.
Blinking: KLS2 out – Check the photosensor using
of service KDIAG.
Constant: KLS2 – Synchronize the photosensors.
cassette module.
of service KDIAG.
cassette module.
of service KDIAG.
cassette module.


photosensor to clean it.
KLS11: – Check the photosensor using
Blinking: KLS11 out KDIAG.
of service – Synchronize the photosensors.
Constant: KLS11 – If the error persists, replace the
soiled cassette module and/or cassette 1.
KLS1_5: – Check the photosensor using
Blinking: KLS1_5 KDIAG.
out of service – Synchronize the photosensors.
Constant: KLS1_5 – If the error persists, replace the
KLS2_5: – Check the photosensor using
Blinking: KLS2_5 KDIAG.
out of service – Synchronize the photosensors.
Constant: KLS2_5 – If the error persists, replace the

Error messages in the cassette module section

Deflector in sensor – Clear the media jam between
transport has wrong transfer transport and cassette
position. module.
– Remove the media jam in the
cassette module - retract /
banknote / check cassette
(cassettes have to signed on
again).
– Replace the cassette module, if
necessary.
Deflector in sensor transport has wrong position.
or
Diagnostic test triggered by operator: cassette module
defective.
Banknote does not quit KLS2 photosensor near module
entrance using specified path + tolerance.
Banknote detected near module entrance (KLS2) does not
reach KLS3 to retract cassette using specified path +
tolerance.
reach KLS8 to cassette 1 using specified path + tolerance.
reach KLS11 to cassette 2 using specified path +
tolerance.


Incorrect position of – Check position of deflector in
deflector in cassette module.
cassette module – Check function of deflector in
cassette module.
necessary.
– There is some paper left inside the deflector.
– Motor not connected.
– Hybrid photosensor before reset is defective.
or
deflector (KSM5) in cassette module defective.
Deflector (cassette 1 / cassette 2) is not functioning
or
deflector (KSMx) in cassette module defective.


Incorrect position of – Remove the media jam in the
deflector in direction of cassette 1 (standard -
cassette module check cassette).
necessary.
Incorrect position of deflector in cassette module
Banknote does not quit KLS8 photosensor near entrance to
cassette 1 using specified path + tolerance.
Error in cassette 1 Permanent status display:
– Remove the cassette 1 and empty
it.

– Check proper fit of cassette 1 and
re-insert cassette 1 properly, if
necessary.
– Check the plug connection
between the controller and the
cassette module.
– Replace cassette 1 or replace the
entire cassette module, if
necessary.
– Stacker logic not connected (plug X1).
– Stacker wheel in banknote cassette / check cassette
blocked.
– Banknote cassette / check cassette is not fully inserted
(magnet on stacker wheel does not trigger hall sensor).
– Belt between stepper motor and stacker wheel has come
off / is torn.
– Home position magnet on stacker wheel is missing / has
fallen off.
– Hall sensor is defective / not connected.


Incorrect position of – Clear the media jam in the
deflector in direction of cassette 2 (cash box).
cassette module – Restart the system
necessary.
Banknote does not quit KLS11 photosensor near entrance
to cassette 2 using specified path + tolerance.
Error in cassette 2 Permanent status display:
– Remove the cassette 2 and empty
it.

– Check proper fit of cassette 2 and
re-insert cassette 2 properly, if
necessary.
– Check the plug connection
between the controller and the
cassette module.
– Replace cassette 2 or replace the
entire cassette module, if
necessary.


Incorrect position of – Check position of deflector in
deflector in cassette module.
cassette module – Check function of deflector in
cassette module.
necessary.
Banknote does not quit the photosensor near KLS33
entrance of retract cassette using the specified path +
tolerance.
Switching between retract cassettes is not functioning
or
deflector (KSMx) in cassette module defective.

Faults Sensors and actuators
Sensors and actuators
Description of sensors / actuators
Structure of brief designations

These elements are named in accordance with the following principle:
Position 1: Functional unit or function
Positions 2 to 3: Element type
Positions 4 to 5: Sequential number of the element
Example: KHS10 Designation of the 10th Hall sensor in the cassette module
Exception:
For the deflectors in the transport paths taken by the media, there is no
encoding of functions or functional units. Instead, they are designated by a
sequential number (e.g. W1).
Abbreviations for functional units or functions

A Alignment
D Print
E Escrow (storage on a drum)
K Cassette module
R Reject transport unit
S Sensor
V Dispenser module

Sensors and actuators Faults
Abbreviation for element types

CE Scan line
HS Hall sensor
LS Photosensor; The technical variant is not distinguished in
the abbreviation, but it can precede the designation in text
form. Example: Hybrid photosensor KLS8
MG Electromagnet
MS Microswitch
SM Stepper motor
UDS Ultrasound sensor for double dispensing
W Deflector
Overview of sensors and actuators

The following illustrations provide an overview of the CCDM sensor and
actuator positions. The meaning of each of the sensors / actuators are
described in the following sections.

CCDM head module

Chassis II and VM2
C
B
A




Chassis P and VM3



CCDM cassette module

Cassette module for plastic cassettes
KLS 11 KLS 3 KLS 2
KSM 2
3 W4
KSM 4
KSM 5
KLS 4 KSM 7
KSM 6
W5
KLS 6
KSM 3
KLS 8
KLS 2_5 KLS 5
KLS 10
KLS 2_4 KLS 1_5 KLS 1_4
KLS 2_2 KLS 1_2
KLS 2_1 KLS 1_1
KSM 1
KSM 2
2 1
KLS 2_3 KLS 1_3
KDC 2
KDC 1

Cassette module ProCash 3100(xe)
Cassette 1
Controller
Safety switch
Cassette 2

Shutter
Sensor Function
LS1,LS2 LS1 Shaft in the positions 'Open' and 'Closed'.
LS2 Partly open and in combination with the hybrid
photosensor LS1 it detects which of the two possible
final positions has been reached.
LS3 Checks if flap is closed.
i You will find more detailed descriptions in the respective system

manuals.
Dispenser module
Actuator Function
VMG1 Retaining shaft magnet;
presses retaining shaft against the counterrotation shaft
VMS1 Sender coil for metal detection
VMS2 Receiver coil for metal detection
VSM1 Stepper motor input/output transport; drives the transport rollers
in swivel transport unit 1 and the transport belt in swivel
transport unit 2.
VSM2 Stepper motor for driving transport rollers;
transport roller shaft / pressure shaft
VSM3 Stepper motor for driving the counterrotation shaft
VSM4 Stepper motor for driving the transport belts in the intermediate
transport;
the motor is located on the chassis behind the motor RSM2 of
the reject transport unit.
VSM5 Stepper motor for lowering/raising the hinged drive unit 1
VSM6 Stepper motor for lowering/raising the hinged drive unit 2
VSM7 Stepper motor for width setting
VSM8 Stepper motor for driving the hinged mechanism of the
counterrotation shaft and activating the pinch rollers for
separation
VSM9 Stepper motor for the lower bundle transport unit

Sensor Function
UDS Ultrasound sensor for double document
VHS1 Hall sensor foreign object detector (operator side)
VHS2 Hall sensor foreign object detector (rear panel side)
VLS1 Photosensor bundle input/bundle output
VLS2 Photosensor between input/output transport for separator unit
('Detection of last medium')
VLS3 Hybrid photosensor for monitoring lowering of hinged drive unit
1; 'Home position sensor'
VLS4 Hybrid photosensor for monitoring lowering of hinged drive unit
2; 'Home position sensor'
VLS5 Hybrid photosensor for timing disk in hinged drive unit 2
VLS6 Photosensor, empty dispensing sensor (LAM)
VLS7 Photosensor 'medium in intermediate transport'
VLS8 Hybrid photosensor for width setting; 'Home position sensor'
VLS9 Hybrid photosensor at cam for the motion of the counterrotation
shaft
'Home position sensor'
VLS10 Photosensor in input / output unit for controlling removal
VLS11 Photosensor in input / output unit for controlling insertion and
removal
VLS12 Photosensor for monitoring documents in the input/output area
VLS13, Photosensors for monitoring document edges in the
VLS14 input/output area

Alignment station
Actuator Function
AMG1 Electrical solenoid plunger for deflector 1
ASM1 Stepper motor for driving transport rollers
ASM2 Stepper motor for driving alignment rollers
Sensor Function
ALS1 1st photosensor for recognizing a medium in the transport path
ALS2 1st photosensor with slit stop for monitoring the alignment of
checks on the surface of the drum
ALS3 2nd photosensor with slit stop for monitoring the alignment of
checks on the surface of the drum
ALS4 2nd photosensor for recognizing a medium in the transport path
Deflector Function
W1 Deflector check alignment/further transport

Magnetic ink character reader

Actuator Function
SMG1 Electric lifting magnet for raising the magnetic head assembly
when banknotes pass.
Sensor Function
SMIC Magnetic read head and permanent magnetic head for
premagnetization
SLS3 Photosensor for magnetic read head
Check / cash reader

Sensor Function
CCE1 Scanner line for the bottom of the medium
CCE2 Scanner line for the top side of the medium
Sensor / deposit transport

Actuator Function
SSM1 Stepper motor for driving the transport rollers and belts in the
magnetic character reader, check/cash reader and sensor
transport
SSM2 Stepper motor for controlling deflector W2
SSM3 Stepper motor for controlling deflector W3
VSM4 Stepper motor for driving the transport belt in intermedia
transport
KSM1 Stepper motor for driving the transport belt in deposit transport

Sensor Function
SLS1 Photosensor for recognizing a medium in sensor transport
RLS1 Photosensor for recognizing a medium between the sensor
transport and storage or reject transport;
beginning and end detector for entering and exiting medium
DLS1 only chassis P: Photosensor for recognizing a medium between
the sensor transport and storage or reject transport. This
photosensor is parallel to the RLS1.
SLS2 Hybrid photosensor for recognizing the position of deflector 2
SLS4 Hybrid photosensor for recognizing the position of deflector 3
Deflector Function
W2 Redirection escrow unit / reject compartment or cassette
storage
W3 Redirection reject compartment / cassette storage
Escrow unit
Actuator Function
ESM1 Drive motor escrow unit;
Stepper motor inside the drum for driving the drum and the tape
winding mechanism
Sensor Function
ELS1 Beginning and end photosensor;
Photosensor, beginning and end detector for entering and
exiting medium
ELS2 Hybrid photosensor for monitoring the upper tape; the
photosensor serves to recognize the beginning and end of the
tape or a rip in the tape.
ELS3 Hybrid photosensor for monitoring the lower tape; the
photosensor serves to recognize the beginning and end of the
tape or a rip in the tape.
ELS4 Hybrid photosensor for determining the tape speed
ELS5 Photosensor; prenotification for ELS1 when documents are
unwound

Printing station
Actuator Function
DSM1 Stepper motor for ribbon transport
Print head
Sensor Function
DLS1 Reflective photosensor in front of the print head (as seen from
the escrow unit) (only chassis II)
DLS2 Reflective photosensor behind the print head for checking print
function (before/after) (only chassis II)
Reject transport
Actuator Function
RSM1 Stepper motor for driving the transport belt
RSM2 Stepper motor for bundling in reject compartment; for moving
reject storage sideways, for lifting and lowering the belt drive
and for moving the note stop.
Sensor Function
RLS1 Photosensor recognizing beginning/end of medium;
Photosensor for recognizing a medium between the sensor
transport and stacker or reject transport;
photosensor, beginning and end detector for entering and
exiting medium
RLS2 Photosensor collecting compartment
RLS3 Hybrid photosensor for camshaft;
photosensor for controlling the rotation of the camshaft
'Detection of home position'

Cassette module
Actuator Function
KDC1 DC motor for adjusting the plate in the cassette 1 (right
cassette)
KDC2 DC motor for adjusting the plate in the cassette 2 (left cassette)
KSM2 Stepper motor for driving the separator transport and driving
the check/cash transfer mechanism
KSM3 Stepper motor for driving the stacking wheel in cassette 1 (right
cassette)
KSM4 Stepper motor for driving the stacking wheel in cassette 2 (left
cassette)
KSM5 Stepper motor for controlling the retract deflector and the media
deflector
KSM6 Stepper motor for controlling the cassette 1 or cassette 2
deflector
KSM7 Stepper motor for activating the counterfeit notes compartment
Sensor Function
KHS1 Hall sensor for stacking wheel position cassette 1 (right
cassette) for monitoring the stacking wheel position (every 120°)
KHS2 Hall sensor cassette 1 'Plate up'
for detecting position 'Plate up'
KHS3 Hall sensor cassette 1
'Plate down' for detecting position 'Plate down' (cassette full)
KHS4 Hall sensor for stacking wheel position cassette 2 (left cassette)
for monitoring the stacking wheel position (every 120°)
KHS5 Hall sensor cassette 2 'Plate up'
for detecting position 'Plate up'
KHS6 Hall sensor cassette 2
'Plate down' for detecting position 'Plate down' (cassette full)
KHS7 Hall sensor for cassette 1 (right cassette) present
KHS8 Hall sensor for retract cassette present
KHS9 Hall sensor for cassette 2 (left cassette) present

Sensor Function
KLS2 Photosensor in transport path at start of cassette module
KLS3 Photosensor in transport path before retract cassette
KLS4 Hybrid photosensor for detecting the retract cassette
KLS5 Hybrid photosensor for recognizing the position of deflector W4
(and deflector W5)
KLS6 Hybrid photosensor for recognizing the position of deflector W5
KLS8 Photosensor in transport path before cassette 1
(right cassette)
KLS9 Photosensor for monitoring the touch activation force exerted by
stack against stacking wheel 'Cash'
KLS10 Hybrid photosensor for recognizing the position of the
counterfeit notes compartment
KLS11 Photosensor in transport path before cassette 2 (left cassette)
KLS12 Photosensor for monitoring the touch activation force exerted by
stack against stacking wheel 'Cash'
KLS1_1 Hybrid photosensor for recognizing the stacking wheel position
cassette 1 for monitoring the stacking wheel position (every
120°)
KLS1_2 Hybrid photosensor in cassette 1 for detecting 'Lifting plate up'
for reporting 'Lifting plate up' position.
KLS1_3 Hybrid photosensor in cassette 1 for reporting 'Cassette 1 full'.
KLS1_4 Hybrid photosensor, digital: The hybrid photosensor inside the
cassette reports: The cassette
contains checks / banknotes
Sharp GP1A71A: The switch is activated by the
operator, outward optical marking
(green/black) and electrically to the
system.
KLS1_5 Photosensor in the plastic cassette 1 for message 'Cassette full'
KLS2_1 Hybrid photosensor for recognizing the stacking wheel position
cassette 2 for monitoring the stacking wheel position (every
120°)
KLS2_2 Hybrid photosensor in cassette 2 for detecting 'Lifting plate up'
for reporting 'Lifting plate up' position.
KLS2_3 Hybrid photosensor in cassette 2 for reporting 'Cassette 2 full'.

Sensor Function
KLS2_4 Hybrid photosensor, digital: The hybrid photosensor inside the
cassette reports: The cassette
contains checks / banknotes
Sharp GP1A71A: The switch is activated by the
operator, outward optical marking
(green/black) and electrically to the
system.
KLS2_5 Photosensor in the plastic cassette 2 for message 'Cassette full'
KMS1 Cassette 1:
The microswitch is located in the cassette. If the cassette is in
the device and the cassette door is opened, the switch also
opens and reports: 'Door open'.
If the cassette is removed - plug connection interrupted -
message the same as if door is opened.
KMS2 Cassette 2:
The microswitch is located in the cassette. If the cassette is in
the device and the cassette door is opened, the switch also
opens and reports: 'Door open'.
If the cassette is removed - plug connection interrupted -
message the same as if door is opened.
Deflector Function
W4 Deflector for directing medium into the retract cassette or in
cassettes 1 or 2
W5 Deflector for directing medium into cassette 1 or in cassette 2

Firmwares to be loaded for CCDM
Controller
1. Firmware for all mechanical parts
CCDM_STD.MOD
Versions Nombre Zip Nombre Fichero
2106std.mod ccdm_std_2106.zip CCDM_STD.MOD
2104std.mod 23.11.06
2102std.mod 10.07.06
2101std.mod 17.05.06
1.1 Binary data file for programmable gate array (PROM) or FPGA firmware
CCDM_PGB.PGA
There is an older version of FPGA firmware whitch is named CCDM_PGA.PGA
Version Nombre Zip Nombre Fichero

1208 ccdm_pgb_1208.zip ccdm_pgb.pga
1207 11.09.06
1205 01.02.06
Beb reader
2. Firmware for XSALine Module (ceques and cash reader)

XSAAA.FDT
Version Nombre zip Nombre Fichero
8090 XSAAA08090.zip XSAAA08090.FDT
7300 XSAAA07300.zip XSAAA.FDT 01750105544 Parts Numbers de BEB
01750105555
01750105533
6280 XSAAA06280.zip XSAAA06280.FDT Use only with data sets vers. 02/xx
2.1. Firmware for firewire interface of the XSALine Module (for transmiting cheques images to PC)
XSAAB.FDT
1220 XSAAB01220.zip XSAAB01220.FDT
XSAABBE.CDT
0203 XSAABEE0203.zip XSAABEE.CDT y XSAAABEE.dll
3.1. Currency data file (denomination file)

XSAA.CDT
0209 XSAAEUR0209.zip XSAAEUR.CDT
6280 XSAAEUR0203.zip XSAAEUR.cdt
621 XSAAEUR0107.zip XSAAEUR.CDT In the name of the file there is
the name of the country for which the file is for and the version of the currency data file
XSAAEUR0200.CDT – this is EURO cuurrency file and the version is 200
If the scaner firmware version is under 6280, it MUST be used a version of the currency file as 01xx. If the
version is equal or newer than 6280, it must be loaded a version of currency file as 02xx.
Impresora
4. There can be loaded also a font for the Magnetic Character Recognition and for printer
CCDM_FNT.FNT
TOPCOIN Module
The TOPCOIN module consists of coin hoppers, the main controller, the CAN
bus controller with the ccTalk adapter, and hopper supports.
Component Part number
Coin hoppers see section "Coin hopper"
Main controller 01750109862
CAN bus controller and
ccTalk adapter 01750109871
Hopper supports 01750109869
Components
Coin hopper
Version Part number
TOPCOIN hopper 0.01 € 01750109858
TOPCOIN hopper 0.05 € 01750109859
TOPCOIN hopper 0.20 € 01750109860
TOPCOIN hopper 1.00 € 01750109861
01750111122 A ProCash 2100xe - Supplement to the Service Manual 2-1

Components TOPCOIN Module
Coins are dispensed from a coin hopper. The coins in the coin hoppers are
ejected on to the coin chute and transported to the coin output tray.
There are various coins hoppers which differ in the size of the coins
dispensed. The coin hoppers are preconfigured for the respective coin size.
Positioning of the coin hoppers in the TOPCOIN module is independent of the
coins that are dispensed.
Any errors that occur are reported via the application.
Placing other coins in a hopper than those that have been configured can
result in the following states (also see section "Troubleshooting and
maintenance"):
– too small coins: Multiple coins are blocking the coin output.
No coins are dispensed.
– too large coins: One coin is blocking the coin output.
No coins are dispensed.
2-2 ProCash 2100xe - Supplement to the Service Manual 01750111122 A

TOPCOIN Module Components
Main controller 01750109862

The main controller is addressed by the system unit (PC) via an RS232
interface. The coin hoppers are controlled by the main controller, the CAN bus
controller and the ccTalk adapter. In addition, power for the coin hoppers is
switched off by the CAN bus controller via the ccTalk adapter when the door to
the TOPCOIN module is opened. This makes sure that a coin hopper can only
be removed when it is not receiving power.

Overview of main controller
1 Connector P22 CAN bus 5 Connector P5 power supply

CAN bus controller connection (inputs)
2 D-Sub connector (no function) 6 Battery (no function, not used)
3 RS232 connector 7 Connector P26 Digital In
4 Connector P6 (outputs) Door switch connection
Power supply connection
CAN bus controller and coin
hoppers
i Jumper 1101 has been removed at the factory so the battery (6) does
not need to be checked or replaced.

TOPCOIN Module Components
CAN bus controller ccTalk 01750109871

The coin hoppers are controlled by the main controller, the CAN bus controller
(1) and the ccTalk adapter (2). This is a two-part controller. The two
components are available as a combined module under the specified order
number.
If replacement is necessary, the CAN bus controller (1) and the ccTalk adapter
(2) must be replaced together. ccTalk is a protocol for a serial bus. It is not
possible to load firmware or the like.
1 CAN bus controller 2 ccTalk adapter

Overview of CAN bus controller
1 Connector P3 CAN bus 3 Connector P11 power supply

2 Connector P7 CC-Talk bus (to (inputs)
the coin hoppers)

TOPCOIN Module Connection diagram
Connection diagram
P1
CAN bus ccTalk Coin hopper 1
controller adapter
ccTalk
P3 24 V
Coin hopper 2
CAN
P22 P21 P20 P19 P18 P17
Printer
P23
CAN Display MMC
Ethernet
P24
P14 P15
Main controller P16
P31
MPUCOM
Coin hopper 3
P25
P12 P13
Door
P32 P34
switch
P26
P27
IN1
IN2
P33
P28
P29
IO1
IO2
P10 P11
Power
Coin hopper 4
P30
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4

supply POUT1 POUT2
P8 P9
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
24V
RS232
The TOPCOIN module is connected to channel CH 10 via the 16-channel V.24

distributor.

Device views Removal/Installation of Components
TOPCOIN module open
1 SOP door switch 4 Coin hopper no. 3

2 Coin hopper no. 1 5 Coin hopper no. 4
3 Coin hopper no. 2

Opening / closing the device Removal/Installation of Components
Pulling out / pushing in the coin module
i The coin hoppers (1) to (4) are pulled out or pushed in in the same
way. The pulling-out procedure is shown using coin hopper (1) by way
of example. The procedure is the same for the other coin hoppers.
• Open the door of the TOPCOIN module (see section "Opening / closing the
coin module").
Pulling it out:
Grasping the gripping edge (5), pull
out the coin module. Hold the coin
module with one hand below it.
Pushing it in:
Insert the coin module (1) into the
device in the direction of the arrow.
Make sure that ...

Removal/Installation of Components Opening / closing the device
... the lugs (1) and (2) are seated

correctly in the mounts (3) and (4).
Push the coin module into the device
as far as possible.

Opening / closing the device Removal/Installation of Components
Emptying / filling the coin hopper
• Remove the coin hopper from the device (see section "Pulling out / pushing
in the coin hopper").
Emptying it
When you want to empty a coin
hopper, you must use the opening (1).
Turn the coin hopper until the coins in
it fall from out through the opening (1)
into a suitable container. You may
have to shake the coin hopper when it
has been turned to empty it
completely.
Filling it
Place the coin hopper on a horizontal
surface and fill it with the required
coins through the opening (1).
In every filling operation, make

i sure that any foreign objects or
coins that do not match the
configuration of the hopper in
question do not get into the
hopper.

Removal/Installation of Components CAN bus controller ccTalk
CAN bus controller ccTalk

i Be sure to remember the position of the connectors on the CAN bus
controller ccTalk. Mark them if necessary.
• Remove the coin hoppers from the device (see section "Pulling out /
pushing in the coin hopper").
• Open the operating unit door (see chapter "Basic Operation", section
"Opening / closing the device doors" in the operating manual).
Undo the screws (1) and (2) beneath
the case cover.
The CAN bus controller is located

behind the coin hoppers and the coin
chute.
Raise the holder (1) with the controller
over the coin chute (2).

Coin hopper supports Removal/Installation of Components
Detach all connectors from the CAN

bus controller (1), undo the screws (2)
to (5) and remove the controller. This
is a two-part controller. If replacement
is necessary, the CAN bus controller
and the ccTalk adapter must be
replaced together (also see chapter
"TOPCOIN Coin Module", section
"CAN bus controller ccTalk
01750109871").
Reinstall it by following the same

steps in reverse order.
Coin hopper supports

• Remove the coin hoppers from the device (see section "Pulling out /
pushing in the coin hopper").
i The coin hopper supports (1) to (4) are removed in the same way.
If a coin hopper support is defective,

all four supports must be replaced.
Removal is shown using coin
magazine support (1) by way of
example.
The procedure is the same for the
other supports.

Removal/Installation of Components Coin hopper supports
Undo the screws (1) to (4) for all coin

hopper supports.
Detach the connector (1), and remove

the coin hopper supports.

i You can remove the holder for
the CAN bus controller ccTalk
in order to get at the connector
(1) more easily. Raise the
holder over the coin chute, and
detach the connector (1) (also
see section "CAN bus
controller ccTalk").

TOPCOIN main controller Removal/Installation of Components
TOPCOIN main controller

i Be sure to remember the position of the connectors on the TOPCOIN
main controller. Mark them if necessary.
• Open the coin module (see section "Opening / closing the coin module").
Undo the screws (1) and (2), push the
cover (3) slightly to the left and
remove it in the direction of the arrow.
If you are unable to remove the cover,
you must undo the additional screw on
the opposite side.
To do this, you must raise the holder
(4) slightly, remove it in the direction of
the arrow, ...
... undo the screw (5) on the opposite

side, and remove the cover (6).
Then detach the connector as shown
in the following illustration.

Removal/Installation of Components TOPCOIN main controller
Undo the screw (1), and detach the

connector (2) of the PC COM cable.
If you have not removed the holder (3)
yet, then you must raise it slightly and
remove it together with the controller
in the direction of the arrow.
Detach all connectors from the

TOPCOIN main controller (1), undo
the screws (2) to (5) and remove the
controller.


Door switch Removal/Installation of Components
Door switch
Detach connectors (1) and (2). Press
the plastic tabs at the top (3) and
bottom (4) together. Push the door
switch in the direction of the arrow and
remove it.

Switching contact
Undo the screws (1) and (2), and
remove the switching contact (3).


View of printing cassette Printing Cassette (TH60)
View of printing cassette
1 24 V power supply
2 USB interface
3 Locking lever
4 Handle used to remove/insert the printing cassette
7-134 ProCash 2050xe USB - Service Manual 01750112189 A

Printing Cassette (TH60) Components and controls
Components and controls
1 Thermal print unit with paper cutter

2 Paper low receiver
3 Paper roll holder
4 Paper low transmitter
5 Key panel
01750112189 A ProCash 2050xe USB - Service Manual 7-135

Pulling out the printing cassette Printing Cassette (TH60)
Pulling out the printing cassette

• Activate the product-specific software (see the chapter "Basic Operation,"
section "Calling the product-specific software" in the operating manual).
• Open the safe door (see the chapter "Basic Operation,", section "Opening /
closing the safe door (with factory setting)" or "Opening / closing the safe
door (with customized lock)" in the operating manual).
Press the green release lever down

(see arrow) and pull the printing
cassette out of the CMD-V4 by the
green handle (1).

Printing Cassette (TH60) Key panel
Key panel
1 Status LED (yellow) 4 F1 key - Paper Feed

2 Status LED (red) 5 F2 key
3 Status LED (green) 6 RESET key
Problems
If an error occurs, the status LEDs blink (yellow or red). This does not include
errors that lead to controller failure.

Problems Printing Cassette (TH60)
Messages on the status display

When an error occurs, the status LEDs blink (yellow or red), e.g. twice in rapid
succession. They then switch off for 0.5 seconds and the cycle is repeated
(see diagram "Example of blink display 2").
Example of blink display 2
0,3 s
Status of Yellow LED

This LED indicates the data communication status.
Blink rate n Reason Remedy
1 Receiving data
2 Communication
error
3 Data
communication
not complete
4 Error in the USB
interface
Status of Green LED

This LED indicates the general device status.
0 Printer is ready
2 Document in Remove document
output unit

Printing Cassette (TH60) Problems
Status of Red LED

This LED indicates the general error status in the printing cassette.
1 End of paper Insert a new paper roll (see chapter
"Printing Cassette," section "Replacing the
paper roll" in the operating manual).
2 Paper low The paper roll will soon need replacing.
3 Paper jam Remove the paper jam. (see chapter
"Printing Cassette," section "Removing a
paper jam" in the operating manual).
4 Error in cutter Check the cutter. If the error persists,
replace the printing cassette (see section
"Installing/deinstalling components").
5 Thermal head Close the thermal head (see chapter
lifted "Printing Cassette," section "Removing a
paper jam" in the operating manual).
6 Error in the Check the power supply unit or the
power supply controller. If the error persists, replace the
printing cassette (see section
7 Overheating Switch the "evice off and leave it to cool
down.
8 Memory error Replace the printing cassette (see section
9 EEPROM error Replace the printing cassette (see section

Key functions Printing Cassette (TH60)
Key functions
The following key functions are available for you to check the print unit:
− Paper feed - press F1 key
− Test printout (fonts) – press F1 key and RESET key, then release RESET
key and keep F1 pressed.
− Setup menu and printout of the setup reports – press F2 key and RESET
key, then release RESET key and keep F2 pressed.
Paper feed
• Press the paper feed key (F1 key), the printer transports paper and cuts it
off.

Printing Cassette (TH60) Key functions
Test printout
• Press the RESET and the F1 keys at the same time. Let go of the RESET
key and keep the F1 key pressed for several seconds, The printer then
outputs a test printout with the printer fonts.
i It is advisable to use normal thermal paper with a width of 150 mm for

the test printout.

Setup menu Printing Cassette (TH60)
Exiting the key functions
• Press the RESET key to exit the key functions.
Setup menu
i Only print the setup menu out on thermal paper, since it would print
beyond the margin on labels.
The status report is activated as follows.

F2 key (1)
Press the RESET and the F2 keys at

the same time. Let go of the RESET
key and keep the F2 key pressed for
several seconds.

Printing Cassette (TH60) Setup menu
• Use the F2 key to select and change the menu items.
i The settings are saved at once automatically, it is therefore not

possible to 'discard' the settings. If you make an input error, you must
call up and change the menu item once more.

Setup menu Printing Cassette (TH60)
• The F1 key takes you to the next menu item.
• The RESET key is used to exit the menu settings at any time.
Menu structure

Printing Cassette (TH60) Adjusting the paper low sensor
Adjusting the paper low sensor

• Pull the printing cassette out from the CMD-V4 module (see section
"Pulling out the printing cassette").
Release the screw (1) to the right of

the paper low sensor (2).
Move the paper low sensor upwards
or downwards.
Up = trigger later
Down = trigger sooner
Status LEDs
LEDs:
Green (1) on = OK, enough paper

available.
Yellow (2) also on = paper supply is

low.
A message will be sent to the
application.

Description of Function Groups The mechanic of passbook module PM-3
The mechanic of passbook module PM-3

i In the following pictures the passbook module PM-3 is mounted on a
rack to show its components more clearly.
Version PM01-3 (side view)
1 Control panel 6 Front upper passbook guide PM-3

2 Input slot of auxiliary transport 7 OMR sensor
PM-3 8 Power supply unit
3 Auxiliary transport PM-3 9 Page-turning module PM-3
4 Print head
5 Ribbon cartridge
01750100947 A Passbook Module PM-3 - Service Manual 7-9

Control panel Operating the Passbook Module
Key functions
Key functions in the power-on phase

EJECT key At power-on:
Selection of test printout 'Print function'; activation by
pressing the EJECT key again (described in the chapter
"Testing and Diagnostics", section "User test routine").
VALID key At power-on:
Selection of service menu with extended functions for the
service technician; activation by pressing the VALID key
(described in the chapter "Testing and Diagnostics", section
"Service menu").
3-4 Passbook Module PM-3 - Service Manual 01750100947 A

Operating the Passbook Module Control panel
Key functions when the passbook module is switched on

Stop key
READY LED green ONLINE status

Changes from ONLINE into the STOP status.
Operation interrupted by the operator.
READY LED yellow STOP status
Changes from STOP into ONLINE status.
READY LED flashing STOP / ERROR status
red Changes from error status to STOP status. The
cause of the fault must be eliminated.
Afterwards the passbook module is initialized. After
this, it is in home position.
EJECT key
READY LED green ONLINE status

Pressing this key ejects an inserted passbook.
Pressing this key has no effect:
– while the unit is printing
– if data is left in the print buffer while the passbook
module is ONLINE.
READY LED flashing LOAD PAPER is displayed
green The EJECT key deletes the print data in the print
buffer prior to printing.
+/- key (only with 'PAPER JAM' on LC display)
i This key function is only valid in conjunction with the LCD display
PAPER JAM (see section "Messages on the LCD panel").
Press the keys '+' and '-' to start the transport motors briefly in the feed or
eject direction. Jammed paper or a passbook can be moved through the
printer by pressing the keys several times, and possibly even completely
removed from the printer without the paper path having to be opened
mechanically.

Control panel Operating the Passbook Module
Meaning of the LEDs

The control panel LED indicates the internal status of the passbook module.
The following situations may occur:
Status of Description
READY LED
Off Passbook module is off, or a serious error has occurred
during power-on.
Yellow STOP/INITIALIZING
The passbook module is in the stop status or in the
initializing phase after power-on. The device interface is
locked. Operation is interrupted.
Green ONLINE The passbook module is online.
It is ready to receive data or to transfer data to the device.
This status is also reached after the initializing phase
following power-on.
Flashing green SOFT ERROR This status of the passbook module
indicates that its operation has been interrupted, and that
this interruption was not triggered by the STOP key. The
cause of the interruption is indicated on the LCD panel. The
device interface is locked for the duration of the service
interruption.
Flashing red ERROR The passbook module is in the ERROR status. The
LCD panel indicates the cause of the error. The device
interface is locked, transferred data is ignored.

Operating the Passbook Module Messages on the LCD panel
Messages on the LCD panel

The LCD panel displays information on internal states, error messages and
operator prompts. The display depends on the current internal status of the
passbook module.
The status is indicated in connection with the READY LED.
Error messages during initialization

During operation, a red flashing READY LED indicates error messages.
Error message Cause Possible action
NO MESSAGE Electronic fault, firmware Replace the control board.
fails to start up.
ELECTR. ERROR Error found during power- Replace the control board.
on test of the control
board.
FIRMWARE No firmware or checksum Reload the firmware or
ERROR error in the loaded mount a new font module,
firmware or in the loaded or replace the control
font or control board faulty.
board.
FLASH ERROR Error when loading a new Reload the firmware or
firmware or font. mount a new font module,
or replace the control
board.
SHUTTER ERROR Shutter controller faulty. Check the connections
and the shutter area,
replace the auxiliary
transport PM-3 if
necessary.
TIMEOUT EXT PM-3 electronics or control Replace the PM-3
CARD board faulty. electronics or the control
board.

Messages on the LCD panel Operating the Passbook Module

COVER OPEN Photosensor lever open. Press the tab above the
display to close the
photosensor.
LS 1 / 2 / 4 ERROR One or several Replace the PM-3.
photosensors LS 1 / 2 or 4
are faulty.
Error messages during operation

During operation, a red flashing READY LED indicates error messages.
PAPER Transportation of paper Check the programming.
into a module of the
printer, which already
contains paper (e.g.
attempt to park a
passbook although there
is one already in the
parking unit / parking and
retract unit PM-3).
PAPER JAM Paper jam, paper feeding Check the paper transport
error, defective cable(s) or paths and photosensors
drives, mechanical (see also pages 3-5).
components defective or
difficult to operate,
photosensors blocked.
PAPER LENGTH Vertical paper transport Feed in a larger passbook
beyond end of passbook and check the
(single-ply form too short programming.
for the application).
PAPER Print job exceeds right Feed in a larger passbook
WIDENESS edge of passbook. and check the
programming.
PARITY ERROR Parity error found at the Check the printer or the
serial interface. interface parameters.


OVERRUN ERROR The input buffer is full, the Check the data cable or
data stream is not adjust the handshaking
interrupted. protocol in the printer or in
the device.
NO PAPER No printable paper in the Insert a valid passbook or
printer. a single-ply form in the
printer. If a passbook or a
single-ply form is already
in the printer, it cannot be
processed and must be
ejected or retracted.
FRAMING ERROR Incorrect data format of Adjust the interface
the serial interface. parameters in the device
or printer.
WRONG IF TYPE The interface type set in Set the correct interface
the parameter menu type.
cannot be activated.
FIRMWARE Wrong, unknown Load a new firmware or
ERROR parameter or firmware check the driver software.
command that is logically
not executable or not
executable in terms of the
timing.
TRANSP ERROR Error at initialization or Check the mechanical
when driving the cam disk. components or replace the
Photosensor for resetting control board.
the cam disk is faulty,
electronics error,
mechanical components
defective or difficult to
operate.
CARRIER ERROR Error when initializing the Check the phototransistor
carrier motor. at the carrier, the cables
Carrier motor or carrier and the control board.
mechanism defective or
difficult to operate.


SHUTTER ERROR Shutter cannot be opened Check the connections
or closed. and the mobility of the
shutter, replace the
auxiliary transport PM-3 if
necessary.
PTU ERROR Error in the page turning Close the page-turning
module PM-3 or page module PM-3 or close the
turning module PM-3 not locking lever of the page-
closed turning module PM-3.
DETECT ERROR Error while the printer is Remove the dirt in the
being initialized, or while in area of the platen or the
operation during a width light chute.
measurement process. Check the mechanical
Defective phototransistor components or replace the
at the carrier or infrared control board.
LED on the control board
defective.
Dirt in the area of the
platen or the light chute.
Obstruction of the carrier
movement, e. g. by the
film carrier or by the front
upper guide chute PM-3.
HEAD HOT The print head Check ventilation of the
temperature has exceeded print unit, the print head
100º C, printing is and the connection cables,
interrupted; printing is or replace the control
resumed as soon as the board.
temperature has dropped
to 90º C.
TIMEOUT EXT PM-3 electronics or control Replace the PM-3
CARD board faulty. electronics or the control
board.
COVER OPEN Photosensor lever open. Press the tab above the
display to close the
photosensor.


SEMANTIC Electronic or firmware is Replace the control board
ERROR faulty. or load the firmware again.
MSR ERROR Error in the MSR. Replace the MSR.
MSR HEAD Error in the MSR. Replace the MSR
POSITION
M WRONG ORDER Error in MSR control Check the programming.
sequence.
M WRONG PARM. Error in MSR control Check the programming.
sequence.
M WRONG CHAR Error in MSR control Check the programming.
sequence.
M CHAR LENGTH Error in MSR control Check the programming.
sequence.
RETRACT FULL The retract box or the Empty the retract box
parking and retract unit resp. the parking and
PM-3 is full. retract unit PM-3 and reset
the retract counter.

Messages during operation
STOP status messages

During messages in STOP status the Ready LED shines yellow.
Message Cause
STOP NO PAPER STOP status, input buffer empty, no passbook
presented.
STOP PAPER STOP status, input buffer empty, passbook presented.
DATA NO PAPER STOP status, data in input buffer, no passbook
presented.
DATA PAPER STOP status, data in input buffer, passbook presented.

ONLINE status messages

During messages in the ONLINE status the Ready LED shines green.
Message Cause Reaction
ONLINE NO Online status, no passbook Present a passbook.
PAPER presented (the passbook has If the printer is in the
been withdrawn after an eject ready status, the
or successfully driven to the shutter will open if a
parking unit / parking and passbook or single-
retract unit PM-3 or there was ply form is presented.
no document in the printer
(during power up)).
ONLINE PAPER Online status, passbook is
pulled in and can be processed.
ONLINE BREAK BREAK found on V.24
interface, displayed for 3
seconds. A status message is
sent to the device.
WRONG ORDER Non-decodable control Check the system
command in the data stream or driver or the
non-displayable printer application.
character indicated for 3
seconds.
SOFT error messages

During messages in the SOFT error status the READY LED flashes green
(STOP status).
LOAD PAPER Passbook requested by data in Present a passbook.
the print buffer.

Adjusting the passbook width Operating the Passbook Module
Adjust the passbook module to the

passbook width required with the right
edge of the document stop (1) .
To do this, push the document stop
along the scale until you reach the
required passbook width.
The scale allows + 5mm on the
specified passbook width in order to
prevent passbooks jamming.
Example: The adjusted passbook
width in the picture is
143 mm.
Secure the two screws and the cover

again.

Operating the Passbook Module Adjusting the OMR sensor
Adjusting the OMR sensor
General
To read the page code the OMR sensor must be adjusted to the passbook
width.
Possible values
4-bar double- 5-bar 2 out of 5 2 out of 6
track single-track barcode barcode
horizontal horizontal
Passbook Recommended Recommended Recommended Recommended
width up scale index scale index scale index scale index
to
121 mm 2 4 4 3
124 mm 3 5 5 4
126 mm 4 6 6 5
128 mm 5 7 7 6
131 mm 6 8 8 7
134 mm 7 9 9 8
136 mm 8 10 10 9
138 mm 9 11 11 10
140 mm 10 12 12 11
143 mm 11 13 13 12
146 mm 12 14 14 13
149 mm 13 15 15 14
152 mm 14 16 16 15
154 mm 15 17 17 16
i Diagrams of the codes are shown in the chapter "Appendix", section

"Paper specification".

Adjusting the OMR sensor Operating the Passbook Module
Changing the setting

Position of the OMR sensor holder.
Loosen the screws (1) and (2) of the

OMR sensor holder (3).
Push the sensor holder to the correct
scale index for the passbook width
used and tighten the screws of sensor
holder again.
The picture shows the adjustment for

4 stroke double track horizontal with a
passbook width of 124 mm (3 range
strokes).

Operating the Passbook Module Setting the device parameters
Setting the retract chute
i This setting is absolute necessary.

The complete menu structure is shown in the chapter "Parameter
Menu Service", section "Service menu".
Depending on the system, the retract direction backwards, downwards and

upwards can be selected.
• Switch off the passbook module by pressing the power key on the control
panel.
During power-on, keep the VALID key
pressed (for more than 5 seconds),
until STOP NO PAPER appears on
the LCD panel.
Release the VALID key.
Pressing the VALID key again displays
the message SERVICE: on the LCD
panel.
Press the VALID key several times

until Test appears on the LCD panel.

Setting the device parameters Operating the Passbook Module
Press the PLUS key or the MINUS key

several times until Retract appears on
the LCD panel.
Press VALID key to confirm.
The current setting (here for example

Retract backw. ) is displayed.
If necessary, switch with the PLUS key

forward or with the MINUS key
backwards to the right retract direction
(e.g. Retract downw.).

Operating the Passbook Module Setting the device parameters
Press the VALID key to confirm.

The LCD displays ACCEPTED.
Press the STOP key 3 times to
confirm your setting.
Wait until the printer has reset itself.
The retract chute setting is now
completed.
To exit the setup menu, switch the unit

off and on again by pressing the
POWER key on the control panel.
The passbook module is ready for
operation.
i The current settings will be shown in the test printout 'Print function'
part 1 (see chapter "Testing and Diagnostics", section "Test
printouts").

Testing and Diagnostics
i The PM-3 features device-specific test functions described below. For
further test functions please refer to the chapter "Parameter Menu
Service".
The KDIAG test program is available on Wincor Nixdorf's intranet /
extranet.
User test routine
Starting a test printout
i Use a piece of paper which has the width of the customer's passbook
for the test printout: minimum width 120 mm, minimum length 150 mm,
maximum length 178 mm.
i The passbook module PM-3 can produce the 'Print function' test
printout without being activated by the device. This test is used to
check the operation of the passbook module PM-3 and the setting of
the parameters. The data cable may be connected to the device, but it
is not mandatory.
Switch the passbook module PM-3 off

to start the test and wait until the ready
indicator is dark.
Now switch the passbook module PM-
3 back on to trigger the test printout.

User test routine Testing and Diagnostics
While switching it on, press the EJECT

key and keep it pressed until STOP
NO_PAPER appears on the LCD.
Start the test printout by pressing the

EJECT key.
The message LOAD PAPER appears
on the LCD.
i Use a piece of paper which has the width of the customer's passbook:
minimum width 120 mm, minimum length 150 mm, maximum length
178 mm.
Feed the paper into the input slot (1).

The passbook module PM-3 will pull it
in automatically and the first part of
the test printout will be started.
For the second part of the test printout
turn the ejected paper over and feed it
back into the auxiliary transport (1)
until it is pulled in automatically.

Testing and Diagnostics Test printouts
Aborting or restarting the test printout
• Press the STOP key to abort the test printout.
• Press the EJECT key to restart the test printout after abortion or
completion.
Leaving the test mode

In order to leave the test mode, switch
the device off and on again by
pressing the POWER key twice.
The passbook module PM-3 is now

ready for operation.
Test printouts
Sample test printouts 'Print function'
i Use a piece of paper which has the width of the customer's passbook
(minimum width 120 mm, minimum length 150 mm, maximum length
178 mm).

Test printouts Testing and Diagnostics
Sample 'Print function' test printout part 1

(not true to scale)

Alignment:
Printhead:
Sample 'Print function' test printout part 2

(not true to scale)

Description of the test printouts

The distance from the reticule to the paper edges in the corners of the 'Print
function' test printout part 1 must be always 10 mm (± 1 mm).
i If the distance deviates from that, first perform a test and if necessary
adjust the passbook start position and/or backward displacement (see
chapter "Parameter Menu Service", section "Test Adjust Printer"). The
basic module must be replaced if the positions of the reticules are still
not correct after this procedure.
Print function part 1

Options
Displays the passbook module PM-3 components it recognizes in the following
sequence:
− Model version, e.g. 'PM 21’ (see chapter "Introduction", section "Version
overview").
− No. of feeder boxes, e.g. '1 feeder' (is only displayed if at least one feeder
box is available).
− OMR (Optical Mark Reader).
− Type of parking unit, e.g. 'Park'.
− Park stands for parking unit and P&R stands for parking and retract unit
PM-3.
− MSR (Magnetic Stripe Reader).
Program
Displays the material number, the revision number (version number) and the
checksum of the loaded printer firmware.
Internal Font
checksum of the loaded fonts.

Fontcartridge
checksum of a inserted chip card with additional character set. If such a card is
not inserted ' – not available –' will be displayed.
PM-Electronic
Displays the revision number (version number) of the PM electronics firmware.
OMR-Electronic
Displays the revision number (version number) of the OMR electronics
firmware.
Fonts
Displays all existing character sets of the 'Internal Font' and the 'Fontcartridge'
(if inserted).
Loaded Font
The file name and the revision number (version number) of the loaded font is
displayed.
Interface
Displays the adjusted values of the parameter menu interface (see chapter
"Operating the Passbook Module", section "Parameter menu Interface").
Special Parameter
Displays the adjusted values of the parameter menu service (see chapter
"Parameter Menu Service").

Print function part 2

Alignment
This function is used to adjust the forward/backward displacement when
printing bidirectionally. With correct adjustment all lines are displayed without
any displacement. If there is an displacement recognizable, the printer must be
adjusted anew (see chapter "Parameter Menu Service", section "Test Adjust
Printer").
Printhead
Displays the function of the 24 printer pins.

Parameter Menu Service
Service menu
Using the extended menu control function, you can run test programs and
perform special settings. These functions are not available to the operator.
When switching the passbook module PM-3 on, press the VALID key and keep
it pressed until STOP NO PAPER is displayed. Then press the STOP key. The
passbook module PM-3 cannot be switched ONLINE in this mode.
The keys are used as follows to navigate in the menu:
Valid Go to next menu level or accept value
+ Page forward;
Next value or menu item on the same level
- Scroll backwards;
Previous value or menu item on same level
Stop One menu level back or accept parameter

Service menu Parameter Menu Service
Test Adjust Printer

This test printout is used to detect mechanical non-standard conditions of the
printing unit. The passbook top-edge (TOP EDGE) function and the
forward/backward displacement (ALIGNMENT) during bi-directional printing
are checked.
On new equipment, this mechanical tolerances are compensated in the final
assembly stage by setting the appropriate parameters. The values are written
into an EEPROM area which is not reset.
i If the service technician replaces the control board or the printer

mechanism, the equipment must be readjusted.
Activation
The ADJUST.PRINTER test program is selected by pressing the VALID key in

the test program. Exit the parameter menu by pressing the STOP key; the LCD
panel displays STOP, NO PAPER. Activate the test by pressing the STOP key
again. LOAD PAPER and the flashing green READY LED prompt the operator
to present a passbook. .
Adjustment of the top-edge function

A staircase pattern is printed to determine the correct top-edge position.
Determine the 'step' which has a distance of one inch (25.4 mm) to the top
edge of the passbook. The numerical value for this step is the correction factor
for the TOP EDGE service item. The correction range is from + 5 to - 5 in
1/180" steps.

Parameter Menu Service Service menu
Adjusting forward/backward displacement
The ALIGNMENT test line contains pairs of vertical staggered lines whose
degree of alignment varies in 1/360" steps. The printed test range is from - 5 to
+ 5, whereas the values in the ALIGNMENT service menu range from - 7 to +
7. The numerical value under the line pair that is perfectly aligned is the
correction factor to be entered.
Testing the magnetic stripe reader

A test card or a passbook with a magnetic stripe must be used for testing the
magnetic stripe reader (MSR). A check pattern will be written in DIN format on
the magnetic stripe and afterwards it will be read. The test results will be
printed on a control sheet.
i Never use a passbook for printing out the control sheet since this may
cause damage to the print head or the ribbon cartridge.
The TEST MSR test program is selected by pressing the VALID key in the
service menu. Exit the parameter menu by pressing the STOP key; the LCD
panel then displays STOP_NO PAPER. Activate the test by pressing the
STOP key again. LOAD PAPER and the flashing green Ready LED prompt
the operator to present a passbook.

Service menu Parameter Menu Service
During the MSR test the LCD panel displays DATA PAPER. After ejecting the
passbook the control document will be requested by the LOAD PAPER
prompt.
The service menu can only be exited by switching the printer off and on.
Always two data blocks are written on the magnetic stripe.

The number of repeats should correspond to the numbers in parentheses.

Description of Function Groups
This chapter describes the elements of the passbook module PM-3.
Block diagram PM-3

Sensors Feeder Stepper motor
box for parking Sensors
Motors and sensors 8 8 position
of dispensing arm 4 34 4 8
Stepper motor 4
vertical transport
34 4 8
Sensors Feeder Parking and
box Retract
Motors and sensors 8 8 Interface to 16
of dispensing arm control the Sensors of
4 34
12 customer- print module
specific LEDs LS1 and LS2
14 8 Stepper motor of
auxiliary transport
4
Page-turning module 34 14 16 8
Motor, sensors
Magnet of Retract 4
switch 26 26 Auxiliary transport
Distributor board
Photosensor 26
Retract chute LS3 5 5
16 6 20 20 20
4 22
Sensor
Sensors Sensors
Retract box
20 20 20
Sensor
OMR 6 PM control card Power supply 3 Mains
unit
16
32
+38 V
+24 V
+12 V
+5V
OSS V.24 -12 V
(+38 V) (+/- 12 V) NT
32 25 16
Stepper motor STE Stepper motor
Control drive M 4 BEL M Passbook drive
4
(+38 V) (+38 V)
LSK
Opt. sensor Stepper motor
5 5 CAR M Carrier drive
cam disk 4
(+38 V)
DC motor
Pressure
(+24V) MSR ZEK
logic Control logic
M 2
(+24V)
20 20
MOTZ 21 NADA Needle print head
(+12V)
26 (+38 V)
NADB (+12 V)
ZEKL 21
26 Opt. sensor
2 Passbook width
MSR
measurement
mechanics
(+24V) 17 2 4
(+12V) BED DLS TLS
17 2 4 2 2
Control panel Opt. sensor Opt. sensor Opt. sensor
Transmit diodes
incl. Passbook Right Passbook Passbook
Passbook
photosensor
feed stop LSA edge LSR footer LSF

7-2
Block diagram PM-3
Page-turning module PM-3 Document feed PM-3 Auxiliary transport PM-3

and print module Magnet (MG_3)
Motor (SM_2)
Motor (GM_2) Magnet (MG_2)
LS_5
LS_4 LS_2 Motor (SM_1) LS_1 LS_10
LS-A LS-F LS_11
Document stop
LS_9
Magnet (MG_1)
LS_13 LS_12
LS_8
LS_3
Passbook Module PM-3 - Service Manual

Overview of motors and sensors in the basic module
01750100947 A
01750100947 A
Parking and retract unit PM-3 Page-turning module PM-3 Document feed PM-3 Auxiliary transport PM-3
and print module Magnet (MG_3)
Motor (SM_2)
LS_5
LS_15 LS_14 LS_4 LS_2 Motor (SM_1) LS_1 LS_10
LS-A LS-F LS_11
Document stop LS_9
Magnet (MG_1)
the passbook module (PM10-3 / PM101-3)
LS_13 LS_12
LS_8
LS_3
Motor (SM_4)

Overview of motors and sensors with the parking and retract unit behind
Block diagram PM-3
7-3
7-4
(PM11-3)
Block diagram PM-3
Parking and retract unit PM-3 Page-turning module PM-3 Document feed PM-3 Auxiliary transport PM-3
and print module
Magnet (MG_3)
Motor (SM_2)
LS_5
LS_15 LS_14 LS_4 LS_2 Motor (SM_1) LS_1 LS_10
LS-A LS-F LS_11
Document stop
LS_9
Magnet (MG_1)
LS_8 LS_13 LS_12
LS_3
Motor (SM_4) Motor (GM_2) LS_6
Paper end (LS_7)
Motor (SM_3)
Cassette case -
Feeder 1x PM-3
Cassette pushed in (KENN_0) right side

Document - Passbook (KENN_1) left side

module and the parking and retract unit behind the passbook module
Overview of motors and sensors with a feeder box below the passbook
01750100947 A
01750100947 A
Page-turning module PM-3 Document feed PM-3 Auxiliary transport PM-3
and print module
Magnet (MG_3)
Motor (SM_2)
Motor (GM_2)
Magnet (MG_2)
module (PM20-3 / PM120-3)
LS_5
LS_10
LS_4 LS_2 Motor (SM_1) LS_1

LS-A LS-F LS_11
Beleganschlag
LS_9
Magnet (MG_1)
LS_8 LS_13 LS_12
LS_3
Motor (SM_3)
Cassette case -
Retract PM-3

Overview of motors and sensors with a retract box below the passbook
Block diagram PM-3
7-5
7-6
Parking unit PM-3 Page-turning module PM-3 Document feed PM-3 Auxiliary transport PM-3
Motor (SM_4) and print module
Magnet (MG_3)
Motor (SM_2)
LS_5 module (PM21-3)
LS-14 LS_10
LS_4 LS_2 Motor (SM_1) LS_1
LS-A LS-F LS_11
Block diagram PM-3
Document stop
LS_9
Magnet (MG_1)
LS_8 LS_13 LS_12
LS_3
Motor (GM_2)
LS_6
Paper end (LS_7)
LS_8
Feeder box

Motor (SM_3)
Retract box

Cassette case -
Feeder 1x and
Retract PM-3
Overview of motors and sensors with a feeder box and a retract box
below the passbook module and a parking unit behind the passbook
01750100947 A
Motor (SM_4)
and print module
Magnet (MG_3)
Motor (SM_2)
01750100947 A
LS_5
LS-14 LS_2 Motor (SM_1) LS_1 LS_10
LS_4
LS-A LS-F LS_11
Document stop
module (PM22-3)
LS_9
Magnet (MG_1)
LS_13 LS_12
LS_8
LS_3
Motor (GM_2)
LS_6
Paper end (LS_7)
LS_8
Feeder box

Motor (GM_2)
LS_6´
Paper end (LS_7)
LS_8´
Feeder box


Motor (SM_3)
R e tr a c t b o x
Cassette case -
Feeder 2x and
Retract PM-3
below the passbook module and a parking unit behind the passbook
Overview of motors and sensors with two feeder boxes and a retract box
Block diagram PM-3
7-7
7-8
Motor (SM_4) and print module
Magnet (MG_3)
Motor (SM_2)
LS_5
LS-14 LS_2 Motor (SM_1) LS_1 LS_10
LS_4
Block diagram PM-3
LS-A LS-F LS_11
Document stop
LS_9
passbook module (PM32-3)
Magnet (MG_1)
LS_13 LS_12
LS_8
LS_3
Motor (GM_2)
LS_6
Paper end (LS_7)
Feeder box

Motor (GM_2)
LS_6´
Paper end (LS_7)
Motor (SM_3)
Feeder box

Cassette case -
Feeder 2x PM-3
Overview of motors and sensors with two feeder boxes and a retract
deposit on top of the page-turning module and a parking unit behind the
01750100947 A
Adjustment of the document direction Removal/Installation of Components
Adjustment of the document direction

To make it easier to check
adjustments to the document
direction, there are bars (shown in
black in the illustration) on the cone
wheels (1) and (2), which must
engage when turned (tongue/groove).
If this is not the case, the position can
be adjusted by twisting (1) and moving
(2) the cone wheel.
Control board
Always observe the ESD guidelines and use ESD protection
equipment when handling electronic components and boards.
• Remove the parking unit PM-3 or the parking and retract unit PM-3 (see
section "Parking unit PM-3" or "Parking and retract unit PM-3").
• Remove the page turning module PM-3 (see section "Page turning module
PM-3").
• Remove the corresponding auxiliary transport PM-3 (see section "Auxiliary

transport PM-3").
• Remove the 'cable cover assembled' (see section "Covers").

Removal/Installation of Components Page-turning module PM-3
Page-turning module PM-3

Always observe the ESD guidelines and use ESD protection
equipment when handling electronic components and boards.
• Switch the passbook module PM-3 off (see section "Switching off passbook
module PM-3").
• Remove the parking unit PM-3 or the parking and retract unit PM-3 (see
section "Parking unit PM-3" or "Parking and retract unit PM-3").
• Remove the distributor board (see section "Distributor board").

If the device has a parking and retract unit PM-3, you must also perform the
following:
Loosen the screw (1) of the belt press
and remove the drive belt (2) if it has
not yet been removed in one of the
preceding steps.

SYSMAN PM – ANÁLISIS PAPER JAM
L E V A N T E
INDICACIONES DE LOS BITS EN EL DISPLAY LCD DE

PM.
Después de un Paper Jam, pulsar Valid.

No está permitido copiar este documento, entregarlo a otras personas ni comunicar o hacer uso de su contenido sin autorización expresa de Sysman Levante. Todos los derechos quedan reservados.
LCD SENSOR DESCRIPCIÓN DESCRIPCIÓN

UP ADJUNTA
1 LS_9 Fotos Shutter entrada E*
2 LS_12 Foto bajo rodillo Shutter delantero SH2
3 LS_13 Foto bajo rodillo Shutter trasero SH1
4 LSF Foto placa hueso centro H2
5 LSR Foto placa hueso derecha H1*
6 LSA Foto placa hueso tope documento H3
7 LS_1 Foto bajo carrier LSW1
8 LS_2 Foto bajo fuente alimentación LSW2
LCD SENSOR DESCRIPCIÓN DESCRIPCIÓN

DOWN ADJUNTA
1 LS_4 Foto entrada paso página LSW4
2 LS_8 Foto tamaño libreta paso página PP*
3 LS_14 Foto módulo Parking P1
4 LS_15 Foto entrada Park + Reject PM 10
5 LS_3 Foto entrada trampilla rechazo TR
6 LS_6 Foto salida Feeder 1
7 LS_6´ Foto salida Feeder 2
8 LS_8´ Foto transporte vertical cajetines TVR
Código: FOTOPMXX
DOCUMENTOS Versión: 160403
TÉCNICOS
ANÁLISIS FOTOSENSORES PMXX
Página 1
L E V A N T E
Todos los marcados con * debemos forzarlos con otro fotosensor si

queremos verificar su estado.
Carrier error, si provocamos éste error y anteriormente hemos tenido

un Paper Jam, en el display nos seguirá indicando el error anterior del

Paper Jam.
Fotosensores verticales de trampilla shutter, si tenemos los dos tapados

nos devuelve Shutter Error.
En el apartado adjunto “Actuación ante un PAPER JAM” se pue-

den observar en fotografías los fotosensores del apartado “DES-
CRIPCIÓN ADJUNTA” de las tablas superiores.
Actuación ante un PAPER JAM:
Cuando nos encontremos ante un PAPER JAM la forma de actuar ha

de ser la siguiente:
1 – Con el PAPER JAM en pantalla pulsar

el botón “Valid”.
2 – Identificar los 1 en el display fijándose en la

posición que ocupan en la misma.
3 – Según la Tabla de “Relación de fotosensores” identificar el foto-

sensor responsable del PAPER JAM y actuar de forma adecuada.
Código: FOTOPMXX
TÉCNICOS
Página 2
L E V A N T E
Relación de fotosensores:
E* SH2 SH1 H2 H1* H3 LSW1 LSW2
LSW4 PP* P1 TR TVR
LEYENDA:
P1 Fotosensor parking
PP Fotosensor del modulo de paso de página
TVR Fotosensor transporte vertical de rechazo
SH1 Fotosensor de debajo de la rueda del shutter cercano a la
placa hueso
SH2 Fotosensor de debajo de la rueda del shutter lejano a la
placa hueso
E Los dos fotosensores detectores de libreta que abren el
shutter
LSW1 Fotosensor de debajo del carrier
LSW2 Fotosensor de debajo de la fuente de alimentación
LSW4 Fotosensor entre la fuente de alimentación y el fotosensor
PP
H1,H2,H3 Fotosensores de la placa hueso
TR Fotosensor trampilla rechazo
*Nota : Hay que forzarlo con otro fotosensor para ver su estado
Código: FOTOPMXX
TÉCNICOS
Página 3
L E V A N T E
FOTOSENSORES DE LA PLACA
HUESO(H1, H2 y H3)
FOTOSENSOR DEL PASO DE

PAGINA (PP)
FOTOSENSORES DEL SHUTER

(SH1, SH2 y E)
Código: FOTOPMXX
TÉCNICOS
Página 4
PrDo(- ln3t¡u6¡on€3 de comDrobacióndel nlvsl dó É€ñátd€ LSWII2I¡Icon b.2
Eléñárto6 n.ésdG laE L comDrobactón:

. Maptador, bltlméiro. papetblaó6 simirárál d. @pia d€ 00 9/h¡ y d.st\.mi[ádor lod l0
..t.s1,tr"Pl4-- t\f ft to2\-\')

reL
Coede la álireñta.ión de ¡os
módulosy spee su inlciali¿ción
M¡da@n6l bltlmel¡Delnivelde
s€ñál€n losjac*s Gño y LsWl del
ádaptador- si¡ pápeld€baiodel
sensorópd6 (fotos6fÍa4)
El niveldeséñalhade *¡ >4.6V
Rep¡tade hu@ h medada
@n Lsw2
En6le eo, el ni@lde eñd há de
l¡r.odue ú€ liÉ d€ pate¡(de40

mñ de anchoy 237m de l&go)
debajode ¡06sñsE ópü@stSW
1 y LSW2 (ro1€6l¡a 5)
At nclón: No muevala ttñ
ds papol m¡erlrá¡ mlde la
niveldeseñalhádá er <113V
El nivel de señal dél sGor ópt¡6

LSW4 pvede mediFe diÉciarenle
en el P¡ndel tepld del .en&r
{véás las turogElras 6 y 7)
- lmüüccio¡€. dé comprobactón
PM)O( d3tntFt.t6sóñatd. LSWfru¿t
con b.r
. El ntusld. silal dn p.p€t ha dé slr
. El n¡veld6 $lÉl d p€p€tbtan6 ha

At nclón: No Nm t. ün
d. p¡p€l rbnt s dd6 ta
Ar.oclúx rs ra<rtctrc ái LSW1

tn d.dbór¡,.@o., par.te,
ObeNadón: L¡ lensión €ñ d p¡ndgl
€mlsdo LSW4rcndaaDu. t.3V
t Si s hallatu€€ de h tol€iánciael ntv€td. señat,,Ímpi6

ot séns óOt o y mida€t niwl
do séñslnuMmrt
. Si @ndnúeéñ@iténd@ €r niwt tu@ d€ rárotdncia. €mb¡6 .t s* ó0ú6
Proceso de medida de sensores de PLACA HUESO
A continuación se detalla el proceso de cómo medir la suciedad o mal funcionamiento de los

sensores de la placa hueso. Este proceso es válido para PM01, PM02 y PM03.
Unos sensores sucios originan el mensaje PAPER JAM, expulsando inmediatamente las
libretas tras insertarlas, o sencillamente provoquen un atasco bajo la placa hueso.
En primer lugar, retire el cable de las sujecciones de la placa hueso como se indica en la
foto 1 y deje el cable como en la foto 2
Foto 1 Foto 2
El siguiente paso consiste en sujetar la tapa superior de la placa hueso como se indica en
la foto 3 para liberar dicha tapa como se aprecia en la foto 4.
Foto 3 Foto 4
Iñaki Fernández Iturrioz
Zona Norte
Proceso de medida de sensores de PLACA HUESO
Una vez hemos eliminada la tapa superior de la placa hueso, se aprecian los 3 sensores de la
placa hueso con claridad, y es posible medir el grado de suciedad en cada uno con un POLÍMETRO.
En concreto, sitúe el polímetro en la escala de 20 V de corriente continua (DC),
mida entre los 2 terminales de los extremos de cada uno de los sensores, como se
aprecia en la foto 5 y 6.
Foto 5 Foto 6
IMPORTANTE:
o Sensor OK: aproximadamente 0.15V entre los 2 terminales extremos de cada sensor.
o Sensores recuperables mediante limpieza: entre 0.15V-0.6V (con estos valores la PM
puede funcionar bastante bien, pero debe limpiarlos para evitar problemas.
o Sensor MAL: valores en polímetro entre 0.6V-1.5V (los valores hasta 1V son también
recuperables, pero a partir de 0.6V la PM da un error de PAPER JAM). Si tras limpiar los
sensores sigue dando valores altos, sustitúyalos, y si los valores son idénticos, sustituya
también los sensores de la base transparente (bajo placa hueso)
Foto polímetro midiendo sensores
Iñaki Fernández Iturrioz

Zona Norte
ERRORES ACTUALIZADOR LIBRETAS
Los códigos de error se componen de 2 letras (LB, GB, etc) cuyo significado se detalla
mas abajo y un numero que representa la función de arquitectura que devuelve el error.
- LB --- Leer Banda Magnética

- IB --- Son los mismos que los LB (son errores que devuelve la maquina al leer la
banda)
- GB --- Grabar Banda Magnética
- CM --- Crear Mensaje
- EM --- Escribir elementos en el Mensaje
- LM --- Leer elementos en el Mensaje
- EJ --- Problemas al ejecutar operacion con Host
La mayor parte de los errores son o mecánicos (LB relacionados con la impresora) o bien de
Host (EJ relacionados con los datos de la banda magnética) por lo que solo se detallan estos dos
tipos.
CODIGOS DE ERROR DE HOST
Se trata de errores relacionados con el Ordenador Central al leer la banda magnetica de las
libretas.
CODIGO DE DESCRIPCION EN MOTIVO

ERROR PANTALLA PARA EL
CLIENTE
EJ=100 No hay movimientos pendientes Libreta sin movimientos
EJ=605 Operacion Rechazada. Consulte Error al leer en los datos de la
con el personal de la oficina banda magnetica
EJ=604 Operacion Rechazada. Consulte Los datos leidos en la banda y
con el personal de la oficina los de Host son distintos,
puede haber sido actualizada
la ultima vez en una impresora
sin lector de banda
EJ=603 Operacion Rechazada. Consulte Error en los datos de la
con el personal de la oficina aplicación
EJ=606 Demasiados movimientos para Libreta completa
imprimir en esta libreta.
Consulte con el personal de la
oficina
EJ=602 Operacion Rechazada. Consulte Error tecnico en el acceso a
con el personal de la oficina alguna tabla o rutina
EJ=607 Operacion Rechazada. Consulte Caida por tiempo en el acesso
con el personal de la oficina a DB2
CODIGOS DE ERROR MECANICOS
Se trata de errores motivados los temas tecnicos relacionados con la impresora del actualizador.
COD. DESCRIPCION ACCION A SEGUIR

ERROR
LB=1 Impresora inoperativa Problemas con la impresora, quitar atasco y resetear equipo
y si persiste el problema, o pasa a menudo pasar aviso a
CUSUR.
LB=2 No hay libreta No se detecta libreta. Posible error de software.
Si persiste pasar aviso a Cusur.
LB=3 Atasco de libreta Quitar atasco libreta y resetear equipo.
LB=4 Error leer banda magnética Probar a actualizar la libreta en impresora financiera de la
oficina.
Si la banda de la libreta esta correcta y sucede a menudo,
pasar aviso a Cusur.
LB=5 Error grabar banda Si sucede a menudo pasar Aviso a Cusur.
LB=6 Nº de Pág. fuera de rango. Se ha escaneado Comprobar el código de barras de la libreta.
un número de pagina menor que 1 o mayor Si todo OK , pasar Aviso a Cusur.
que 7.
LB=7 La impresora detectó que la libreta está llena. Demasiados movimientos para imprimir en la libreta, abrir
una nueva.
LB=8 La función de impresión manda un número de Error software. Pasar Aviso a Cusur.
línea erroneo.
LB=11 Error al abrir fichero configuración Error de configuración software. Pasar Aviso a Cusur.
(Banesto.pbk).
LB=12 Error leer parámetros del fichero de Error de configuración software. Pasar Aviso a Cusur.
configuración.
LB=21 Error al enviar parámetros Si persiste pasar aviso a Cusur.
a la impresora.
a la impresora.
a la impresora.
a la impresora.
a la impresora.
LB=26 Error parámetros impresora Si persiste pasar aviso a Cusur.
LB=27 Ya hay una libreta insertada. Comprobar si hay libreta dentro de la impresora, en caso
contrario Pasar Aviso a Cusur (posible error de software).
LB=28 Libreta capturada Recuperar libreta del interior del actualizador.
LB=97 Timeout Comprobar que la impresora esta encendida (ONLINE en el
display de la impresora) y el cable bien conectado.
Si todo OK, pasar aviso a Cusur.
LB=98 La impresora no responde Comprobar que la impresora esta encendida (ONLINE en el
LB=99 Error de hardware Comprobar que la impresora esta encendida (ONLINE en el
ACTUALIZADOR DE LIBRETAS AUTOMÁTICO
CÓDIGOS DE ERROR DEL ALA
Los códigos producidos tanto por la aplicación software de la impresora, serán

mostrados por pantalla concatenados a un código de dos letras que representan la
función de arquitectura. Que nos devuelve el error. Quedara de la forma:
LB-0-----Que significa que al leer la banda ha ido todo correctamente.

Siendo:
-IB ------Insertar libreta.

-LB -----Leer banda magnética
-GB ----Grabar banda magnética.
-CM ----Crear mensaje.
-EM ----Escribir elementos en el mensaje.
-LM ----Leer elementos del mensaje.
-EJ -----Ejecutar operación del Host.
Códigos de error de Hardware:
COD. DESCRIPCIÓN ERROR SIGNIFICADO PANTALLA

0 ALA OK Retorno correcto ALA_ACTU.BMP
*1 ALA_OOS Impresora inoperativa ALA_MPRT.BMP
*2 ALA_NO_MEDIA No hay libreta ALA_MPRT.BMP
3 ALA_PAPER_JAM Atasco de libreta ALA_ERRB.BMP
4 ALA_READ_MS_ERR Error leer banda magnética ALA_ERRB.BMP
5 ALA_WRITE_MS_ERR Error grabar banda magnética ALA_ERRB.BMP
6 ALA_PAGE_OORANGE Nº de pagina fuera de rango ALA_MALP.BMP
7 ALA_PB_FULL Libreta llena ALA_LLEN.BMP
8 ALA _PRPG_LN_ERR Error nº de línea ALA_NEGA.BMP
11 ALA_INIT_FILE Error al abrir fich. configuración ALA_MPRT.BMP
12 ALA_INIT_NO_PARAM Error leer parámetro de fichero ALA_MPRT.BMP
21 ALA_INIT_BARCODE Error al enviar param.cod. barras ALA_MPRT.BMP
Error al enviar param. escaneo
22 ALA_INIT_SCANLINE lin ALA_MPRT.BMP
23 ALA_INIT_STRIPE_TYPE Error al enviar tipo banda. ALA_OPRE.BMP
24 ALA_INIT_SENSITIVITY Error al enviar param. sen. OMR ALA_MPRT.BMP
25 ALA_PRINT_PARAMS Error param. en el formato ALA_MPRT.BMP
26 ALA_PARAM_ERR Error param. alaPrintPage. ALA_MPRT.BMP
27 ALA_MEDIA Libreta insertada ALA_MPRT.BMP
28 ALA_PASSBOOK_CAPTURE Libreta capturada ALA_MPRT.BMP
Banda no se ajusta al formato
30 4B ALA _ERRB.BMP
Banda no se ajusta al formato
31 4B ALA _ERRB.BMP
32 Error al pasar pagina nuevo
33 Error tapa paso pagina abierta nuevo
35 Impresora desconectada nuevo
36 Impresora local nuevo
37 Tapa abierta nuevo
38 Impresora sin lector banda nuevo
39 Impresora no soportada nuevo
40 Puerto ocupado nuevo
41 Error tecnico, falta open nuevo
42 Error en puerta serie nuevo
43 Tamaño libreta no valido nuevo
44 Error volteador nuevo
97 ALA_TIME_OUT Time out ALA_MPRT.BMP
*98 ALA_NO_ANSWER La impresora no responde ALA_MPRT.BMP
*99 ALA_HW_ERR Error de hardware ALA_MPRT.BMP
(*)---Se hace hasta 4 reintentos de lectura de la banda magnética para intentar

solucionar el problema.
En los demás casos en los que se visualiza la pantalla:”Operación incompleta,

terminal en recuperación” (ALA_MPRT.BMP), se quedara el puesto bloqueado ya que
hay un problema de hardware. Mostrándose seguidamente la pantalla:”Fuera e servicio”
(ALA_FUER.BMP), con el aspa roja.
Códigos de error devueltos por Host: (EJ=)
100 No hay datos.

605 Error en los datos de la banda.
604 Verificar libreta (traspasada, llena)
603 Error datos aplicativos.
606 Libreta completa. Solicita una nueva.
602 Diríjase a ventanilla.
607 Sentimos no poder atenderle.
Códigos de Error de la Tarjeta:
0 Correcto.
801 Dispositivo fuera de línea.
802 Tarjeta insertada.
803 Tarjeta no insertada.
804 Dispositivo ocupado en otra sesión.
805 Time Out, dispositivo no contesta.
806 Fichero inicialización no encontrado.
807 Path no encontrado.
808 Contenido del fichero erróneo.
809 Acceso denegado.
811 No hay datos en la banda magnética.
812 Error de lectura de la banda magnética.
814 Falta abrir sesión.
815 Parámetro no valido.
817 Error interno.
818 Error hardware.
819 Dispositivo apagado.
823 Falta inicialización.
Forms Printer ND/TH97 Printer operating panel
Printer operating panel

The operating panel of the printer consists of a two-digit indicator, 3 LEDs and
3 keys.
The printer operating panel contains the following elements:

− Status
Two-digit, 7-segment indicator for error and status messages
(see section "Tables with error messages")
− Test
Test print key
− Eject
Paper eject key
− Service
Key for setting the system off-line
− Ribbon
3 LED for ribbon status indicator
(not relevant for thermal printing units)

Tables with error messages Forms Printer ND/TH97
Tables with error messages

Status information, warnings and error messages are displayed on the
7-segment indicator of the printer. When error messages are displayed, the
7-segment indicator flashes.
The 7-segment indicator can also be used to indicate errors on other
integrated components. The application transfers the number of the error to
the printer.
This section contains an overview of possible error messages.
Structure
The error codes are arranged in groups. Groups 1 to 16 refer to the printing
unit and are displayed without system support. All other groups are displayed
by the relevant operating systems or applications via the operating panel
channel of the printer.
Priorities of the status indicator:

The following priorities are taken into account when the error codes are
displayed (0 = highest priority):
Priority Error Display Display type
0 Printer controller hardware error 10
1 External error codes 20 to 99 flashing
2 Printing unit error codes 1 to 16 flashing
3 PC not yet powered up 30 permanent
4 Printing unit warnings 1 to 16 permanent
5 External warnings 20 to 99 permanent
6 Incorrect control sequence on 11 temporary
channel 0 0.5 sec.
7 No error 0 permanent
If several errors with the same priority occur, the last error situation is
displayed.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Tables with error messages
Reactions in the event of an error

Warnings are displayed on the status indicator by a permanently lit message
(i.e. without flashing) and do not affect operation. Errors that have caused the
current operation to be aborted are indicated by means of a flashing display.
After the cause of the error has been eliminated, you can delete the error
message of the displayed priority level by pressing TEST or EJECT.
In case of error messages referring to the printing unit, the printing unit may be
initialised after a key is pressed.
Warnings and error messages of the printer
a b c Meaning Explanation/action
off No power supply Switch the device on
8.8. Printer power-up phase
-- Printer power-up phase
0 x No error
1 x Weekend limit reached Replenish paper if necessary

in supply 1
x End of paper or end of Remove left-over paper and
stack in supply 1 insert a new stack
2 x Weekend limit reached Replenish paper if necessary
in supply 2
x End of paper or end of Remove left-over paper and
stack in supply 2 insert a new stack
a Two-digit code on the status indicator

b Lights up permanently
c Flashing

Tables with error messages Forms Printer ND/TH97
4 x Paper mark not Paper incorrectly inserted, wrong
recognised paper inserted, no mark, margin
sensor incorrectly positioned
Re-insert paper, check margin
sensor, make a test printout
5 x Document transport Eliminate paper jam

error
(paper jam in feed
channel)
6 x Reset/cutting error in Remove any scraps of paper,
cutter or carrier check that the print head cutter
module is running smoothly
7 x Reset error in stacker Check the stacker; remove scraps
and documents
Stacker cover open?
9 x Shutter of output slot Check whether the shutter has
does not open been tampered with
10 x x Hardware error in Call Service
printer CPU
11 x Software error in Call Service
printer controller
12 x External light when Eliminate direct sunlight
adjusting photo sensor

c Flashing
’11’ may light up momentarily when you power up the system. This is
i not an error message.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Tables with error messages
13 x Printer software Firmware error
missing FW on hard disk and in the controller
do not match
14 x Character generator -> Loader system error
not loaded
15 x Output slot busy Software error
An attempt was made to transport
documents to the output slot
although this was busy.
16 x Wrong control via Software error
printer channel An attempt was made to transport
more than 10 documents to the
stacker; the system has changed
print station incorrectly; the system
has exceeded the format
30 x PC power-up phase PC has no connection to the
controller yet, wait until the power-up
phase has ended
PC switched on?
PC operating system installed?
PC defective?
Connection PC ←→ printer
Call service if necessary

c Flashing

Key functions Forms Printer ND/TH97
Key functions
TEST key
The TEST key has several functions:
1. A test printout is activated if the TEST key is pressed when the printer is in
home position (no document is being printed or offered). The test printout
contains information about the modules loaded and a print head test. The
test document is sent to the reject box.
Below is a sample of a test document printed by the needle printer PR1x
(not to scale):

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Key functions
Below is a sample of a test document printed by the thermal printing unit

PR2x:
2. If there is a fault on the printer (7-segment indicator flashes or print data

pending) then this key activates a reset procedure that returns the printer to
home position. The receive buffer is cleared, any document which is being
printed is cut off and transported to the reject box. Any documents in the
stacker are also sent to the reject box.
3. If an external device error is displayed (flashing 7-segment indicator), the
display of the external device error is deleted by pushing the test key.
EJECT key
The EJECT key will be ignored if documents are being printed or offered.
The EJECT key causes the continuous paper supply to be ejected. In the case
of a printer with two continuous paper supplies, the paper of the first,
uncovered supply is ejected first. The paper of the second supply is ejected if
the button is pressed again.
If an error occurs, pushing the EJECT key will activate the same reset
procedure which is activated by pushing the TEST key.

Key functions Forms Printer ND/TH97
SERVICE key
The SERVICE key has several functions:
1. If the service key is pressed for a time, the status indicator changes to value
1. The printer changes to the mode for adjusting the contrast on the LC
display. The TEST key increases the contrast, while the EJECT key
decreases it. The setting changes by a single step each time a button is
pressed. If the SERVICE key is pressed a second time, then the set
parameters are saved and the printer returns to home position. The
displayed text does not change while the contrast is being adjusted.
2. If the SERVICE key is pressed during a POWER-ON procedure until the
print head is reset, then the printer changes to a Service mode in which
additional settings can be made.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Service settings of the printing units
Service settings of the printing units

If the SERVICE key is pressed during POWER ON until the print head is reset,
it is subsequently possible to select additional Service settings. For this
purpose, the SERVICE key is pressed a second time and held down. The
numbers 0 to 7 appear in succession on the 7-segment indicator. Each
number stands for a particular menu:
(0) for sending a power off request to the system (here, without any
function),
(1) for contrast settings of the LC display connected to it (here, without
any function),
(2) for hexdump mode,
(3) - (6) for setting mechanical adjustment parameters after components
have been replaced,
(7) internal test for setting mechanical adjustment parameters.
Release the SERVICE key when the required number appears; the TEST and
EJECT keys can now be used to change the parameters.
If you press the SERVICE key again, or after a longer period of time in which
no settings were changed by means of the EJECT or TEST keys, the printer
returns to home position.

Load function (printer) Forms Printer ND/TH97
Load function (printer)

The printer can be loaded with new firmware versions, different (country-
specific) character generators and form parameters via the interface.
Data may be transferred for the following reasons:
− initial operation (production),
− installation of new controller logic (e.g. for Service purposes),
− loading new firmware,
− loading a country-specific character generator,
− loading new form parameters.
Loader files are supplied by the manufacturer. They cannot be

i generated by the user.
The loading process is tested by the system configuration or by
KDIAG.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Margin setter
Margin setter
Margin setter position for WN paper
(1) catch of upper margin setter

(2) catch of lower margin setter
Margin setter position for IBM paper

Not applicable for thermal printing units.
i
(1) Catch of upper margin setter

(2) Catch of lower margin setter
Setting the margin setter

In order to set the margin setter to a new paper type proceed as follows:
• Push the black catches up to loosen the margin setters.
• Push the lower margin setter to the right or to the left until it clicks in place.
• Push the upper margin setter to the right or to the left as far as possible (it
will not click in place).
• Push the black catches down to fix the margin setters.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Sensors and paper paths (needle printing unit)
Sensors and paper paths (needle printing unit)
Side view of standard version
Sensor document output
Safety switch drum
Basic position
print head
Document start
Basic position
paper supply 1
drum
Sensor reject path
Document start
Sensor reject tray Mark detection paper supply 2
WN-IBM identification

Sensors and paper paths (needle printing unit) Forms Printer ND/TH97
Side view -60° version
Safety switch drum
Basic position
print head
Document start
Basic position
paper supply 1
drum
Sensor reject path
Document start
Sensor reject tray Mark detection paper supply 2

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Sensors and paper paths (needle printing unit)
Top view
Safety switch drum Sensor reject tray Sensor reject path
Sensor gripper path
Home position drum
Mark detection
Home position
print head
WN-IBM identification Document start paper supply 1
Monitoring the paper paths

The correct movement of the paper is monitored by several sensors.
A photo sensor situated at the form feed opening recognises the advance of
new paper as well as an end-of-paper condition.
A sensor situated at the output tray has a dual monitoring function:
− The sensor monitors whether or not the forms have arrived properly in the
output tray (e.g. in order to recognise a paper jam).
− The sensor also recognises whether or not the customer has removed the
forms.

Service settings for the needle printing unit Forms Printer ND/TH97
Service settings for the needle printing unit

In the following, those menu options are described which are activated by
pressing the SERVICE button (also refer to the section "Service settings for
printing units").
(2) Hexdump-mode
All the data received is displayed in two blocks. The left block contains the
data in hexadecimal form separated by a blank. The right block shows the
ASCII character for the characters that can be printed. Characters that cannot
be printed are represented as dots.
Example:
0A 0D 0A 0D 20 41 20 42 20 43 44 45 46 47 0A 0D .... A B CDEFG..
48 49 4A 20 4B 4C 4D 18 0C 6E 6F 70 0A 0D 7A 00 HIJ KLM..nop..z.
Press the SERVICE button again to quit hexdump mode.

Control points are not acknowledged in hexdump mode.
i
(3) Setting the displacement

The buttons TEST (+) and EJECT (-) are used to set the value within a range
from -5, -4, ... 0, ... 4, 5. This corresponds to a setting range of ± 5 / 720 inches
(± 1.8 mm).

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Service settings for the needle printing unit
(4) Setting the standardisation position of the carrier

The buttons TEST (+) and EJECT (-) are used to set the value within a range
from -F, -E, ... 0, ... E, F. This corresponds to a setting range of ± 15 / 360
inches (± 1 mm). Positive values shift the printed image to the right, negative
values to the left.
(5)/(6) Setting the vertical print position for continuous

paper supply 1 / 2
(Vertical start of printing/cutting position)
The TEST (+) and EJECT (-) buttons can be used to set values in the range
-F ,-E , ... 0, ... E, F. This corresponds to a setting range of + 15 / 180 "
(+ 2 mm). Positive values shift the cutting position and printing downwards,
while negative ones shift it upwards (relative to the printed position mark). The
distance between the cutting edge and the printing position remains
unchanged.
These parameters are adjusted in order to balance mechanical
i tolerances between the mark sensor and the cutter position (or the
print head) and not to adjust the print position to a pre-printed mask. If
the print position is to be adapted to a pre-printed mask or if the
cutting position is to be changed, then this can be achieved by means
of form parameters (see "ND97 programming manual").

(7) Internal test for setting the mechanical adjustment

parameter
This function initiates a test printout, which outputs two blank documents and
one printed document from the printer’s paper supplies, where paper has been
loaded. On the third document a character box is printed in the first printed line
(in columns 1 and 40).
The parameter ’alignment’ is always set to zero.
Cut edge
Mark in the upper left

edge of the test printout
X, Y = values from paper specification
In order to set the horizontal and vertical position of the character box,
the comparison values must always be taken from the current paper
specifications. As these specifications may vary, it is not possible to
provide absolute values in these instructions.
The third page of continuous paper 1 is the test page for the horizontal and
vertical positioning (see menu options 4 and 5) and the forward/backward
deviation (menu 3).

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Service settings for the needle printing unit
Observe the following setting procedure:

• Select menu option (7).
• If necessary, select menu options (4), (5) and (6).
• Initiate a test printout by pressing the TEST key.
After the internal test, do not select function (7) again immediately.
This would reset the printer to the default values. Make your settings
first (menu options 3 to 6).
After the test pages have been printed, proceed as follows:
• Check the forward/backward deviation of the printer on the test printout,
choose menu option 3 and adjust the deviation. The printout of the value
scale is effected in two steps due to the limited space. However, the
adjustment can be done with interim values.
As this parameter value is adjusted before the test printout is printed,
the setting always has to be updated in case one of the menu options
3 to 6 is selected.
• Measure the horizontal distance of the character box from the left paper
edge, compare this with the values in the paper specifications and, if
necessary, perform an adjustment in menu option 4.
• Measure the vertical distance of the character box from the perforation,
from the mark and/or from the cut edge, and compare the values with the
data in the paper specifications. If necessary, perform an adjustment in
menu option 5.
• For continuous paper 2, it is only necessary to compare the vertical position

of the character box. Use menu option 6 and proceed as for continuous
paper 1.

In order to check the setting, a modified internal printout (via the TEST key)
can be used which is only activated after selection of the menu option (7).
This internal test printout changes emulation parameters. In order to
i reset the system interface, the device must be switched off and then
on again after the settings have been made.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Monitoring the ribbon status
Monitoring the ribbon status

Since in the majority of cases a used up ribbon is the reason for poor print
results, ink intensity is measured at regular intervals.
For this purpose a mark is printed on every 50th form which is then measured
by a sensor and evaluated. After the measurement, three different conditions
of the ribbon are possible.
Ribbon status indicators

The status indicators are a green, yellow and red LED. If there is no LED
active, no intensity measurement has been performed yet.
Status 1/1 (green):

− The print contrast is OK.
− The green LED on the printer operating panel is ON.
− The warning message ’print contrast is OK’ is issued to the system.
Status 1/2 (yellow):

− Print contrast is weak, but the text is still legible.
− The yellow LED on the printer operating panel is ON.
− The warning message ’weak print contrast’ is issued to the system.
Status 0 (red):
− The print contrast is inadequate.
− The red LED on the printer operating panel is ON.
− The warning message ’inadequate print contrast’ is issued to the system.
The printer continues to be operable even after an inadequate print contrast

has been determined and does not enter error status.

Features of the thermal printing unit Forms Printer ND/TH97
Features of the thermal printing unit

− Automatic recognition of document length
− Thermal print head with 2560 dots (resolution 300 * 300 dpi)
− Print mode LQ
− Semi graphic
− Max. printing speed 1920 cps (at 15 cpi / 8 Ipi)
− Optional second continuous paper supply
− Reject function
The printing speed is constant, i. e. it depends on the selected character font.
Printing unit
Resolution: 300 * 300 dpi (horizontal * vertical)

Technology: Thermal direct printing process
Print speed: LQ = 1280 cps at 10 cpi / 8 Ipi
LQ = 1536 cps at 12 cpi / 8 Ipi
LQ = 1920 cps at 15 cpi / 8 Ipi
Paper feeding speed: 50 mm/s
Collecting function
Capacity of the output drum: max. 10 documents
Retract/reject function
The printer can collect documents that have not been removed as well as
documents from aborted print jobs in a reject box.
For reasons of data protection, it must be possible for documents that
i have not been removed from the output slot to be transported to the
reject boxes. In this special case, the printer is disabled only after the
transaction has taken place.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Sensor positions of the thermal printing unit
Sensor positions of the thermal printing unit
Side view of the standard version
Safety switch drum
Home position
drum
Sensor lifting
Document start
mechanism Mark detection paper supply 1
Sensor reject path
Document start
Sensor reject tray paper supply 2

Sensor positions of the thermal printing unit Forms Printer ND/TH97
Side view -60° version
Safety switch drum
Home position
drum
Sensor lifting Document start
mechanism Mark detection paper supply 1
Sensor reject path
Document start
Sensor reject tray paper supply 2

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Sensor positions of the thermal printing unit
Top view
Safety switch drum Sensor reject path
Sensor gripper path
Home position drum
Home position left cutter
Mark detection WN Home position right cutter
Mark detection NCR
Document start paper supply
Monitoring the paper paths

The proper movement of the paper is monitored by several sensors.
A photo sensor situated at the form feed opening recognises the advance of
new paper as well as an end-of-paper condition.
A sensor situated at the output tray has a dual monitoring function:
− The sensor monitors whether or not the forms have arrived properly in the
output tray (e.g. in order to recognise a paper jam).
− The sensor also recognises whether or not the customer has removed the
forms.

Service settings for the thermal printer Forms Printer ND/TH97
Service settings for the thermal printer

In the following, those menu options are described which are activated by
pressing the SERVICE button (also refer to the section "Service settings for
printing units").
(2) Hexdump-mode
All the data received is displayed in two blocks. The left block contains the
data in hexadecimal form separated by a blank. The right block shows the
ASCII character for the characters that can be printed. Characters that cannot
be printed are represented as dots.
Example:
0A 0D 0A 0D 20 41 20 42 20 43 44 45 46 47 0A 0D .... A B CDEFG..
48 49 4A 20 4B 4C 4D 18 0C 6E 6F 70 0A 0D 7A 00 HIJ KLM..nop..z.
Press the SERVICE button again to quit hexdump mode.

Control points are not acknowledged in hexdump mode.
(3) Setting of the print intensity

The buttons TEST (+) and EJECT (-) are used to set the value for the print
intensity in a range of 0..7. The value 7 corresponds to the max. intensity of
black. This setting allows for adjusting to several grades of paper sensitivity.
The default value is 4.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Service settings for the thermal printer
(4) Setting of the DOT-0 position

The buttons TEST (+) and EJECT (-) are used to set the value for the setting
for the position of the first dot within a range from -F, -E, ..=, ..E, F. This
corresponds to a setting range of ± 15 / 300 inches (± 1.2 mm). The default
value is 0.
(5)/(6) Setting the vertical print position for continuous

paper supply 1 / 2
(Vertical start of printing/cutting position)
The TEST (+) and EJECT (-) buttons can be used to set values in the range
-F ,-E , ... 0, ... E, F. This corresponds to a setting range of + 15 / 180 "
(+ 2 mm). Positive values shift the cutting position and printing downwards,
while negative ones shift it upwards (relative to the printed position mark). The
distance between the cutting edge and the printing position remains
unchanged.
These parameters are adjusted in order to balance mechanical
tolerances between the mark sensor and the cutter position (or the
print head) and not to adjust the print position to a pre-printed mask.
If the print position is to be adapted to a pre-printed mask or if the
cutting position is to be changed, then this can be achieved by
means of form parameters (see "TH97 programming manual").

Service settings for the thermal printer Forms Printer ND/TH97
(7) Internal test for setting the mechanical adjustment

parameter
This function initiates a test printout, which outputs two blank documents and
one printed document from the printer’s paper supplies, where paper has been
loaded. On the third document a character box is printed in the first printed line
(in columns 1 and 40).
Cut edge
X
H Mark in the upper left
edge of the test printout
X,Y = values from paper specification
In order to set the horizontal and vertical position of the character box,
the comparison values must always be taken from the current paper
specifications. As these specifications may vary, it is not possible to
provide absolute values in these instructions.
The third page of continuous paper 1 is the test page for the horizontal and
vertical positioning (see menu items 4 and 5) of the intensity setting and for the
assessment of uniform printing quality and printing intensity.

Forms Printer ND/TH97 Service settings for the thermal printer
Observe the following setting procedure:

• If necessary, select menu options (4), (5) and (6).
• Initiate a test printout by pressing the TEST key.
After the internal test, do not select the function (7) again immediately.
This would reset the printer to the default values. Make your settings
first (menu options 3 to 6).
After the test pages have been printed, proceed as follows:
• Check the printing intensity on the test printout and, if necessary, adjust it
by selecting menu option 3.
• Measure the horizontal distance of the character box from the left paper
edge, compare it with the values in the paper specifications and, if required,
perform an adjustment in menu option 4.
• Measure the vertical distance of the character box from the perforation,
from the mark and/or from the cut edge, and compare the values with the
data in the paper specifications. If necessary, perform an adjustment in
menu option 5.
• For continuous paper 2, it is only necessary to compare the vertical position

of the character box. Use menu option 6 and proceed as for continuous
paper 1.
In order to check the setting, a modified internal printout (via the TEST key)
can be used which is only activated after selection of the menu option (7).
This internal test printout changes emulation parameters. In order to
i reset the system interface, the device must be switched off and then
on again after the settings have been made.

Feed Wiring plan control electronics ND 97 LCD
Drum home position display
Reject tray photosensor
Reject path photosensor
Drum cover Fan
mixed up.
SNP: 01750030891 A
ID for IBM/WN paper
Gripper motor
Forms Printer ND/TH97
Motor for document 1 Home position gripper

X5
X6
Mark photosensor X27
Drum motor
X19
X16
Control electronics X15
Print head ND 97 Power supply
X10
X2
IDCU
Photosensor for start of
X1
X12
X13
document, paper supply 1 Power supply unit
X3
X9
Motor for document 2 X14
X20 Printer operating panel
X17 Carriage home position
X11 X7 X4
X8

Photosensor for start of
document, paper supply 2 Motor carrier
Paper end sensor Operating panel- ProPrint

(weekend sensor) Door switch
PIN keyboard
BBA / directing signs
Paper low messages Motor shutter
paper supply 2 Centronics Home position shutter
Please note that connectors X8 (photo sensor for beginning of
document - paper supply 1) are not coded and can therefore get
Wiring plan for control electronics ND97/TH97
document - paper supply 2) and X9 (photo sensor for beginning of
7-43
7-44
Feed LC
Drum home position Wiring plan control electronics TH 97 display
Reject tray photosensor
Reject path photosensor Fan
Drum cover
ID for IBM/WN paper Cutter motor
Gripper motor
Motor for document 1
X5 X27 Drum motor
X24
X6
Mark photosensor X19 Power supply
X15 IDCU
Thermal line
X16
Control electronics
X2
signals Power supply unit
TH 97
X10
X1
Photosensor for start of Lifting mechanism motor
document, paper supply 1 X??
X23
Power supply unit printer
X12
X3
X14 Power supply unit
X9
X13
Motor for document 2 X20
for the thermal line

X17

X8 X11 X7 X4 Printer operating panel
Photosensor for start of Carriage home position
document, paper supply 2
Platen motor
Paper end sensor Operating panel - ProPrint

(weekend sensor) Door switch
PIN keyboard
BBA / directing signs
Paper low messages Motor shutter
paper supply 2 Centronics Home position shutter
Forms Printer ND/TH97
SNP: 01750030891 A
Escáner de cheques (CTS)
Vista general
1 Entrada de cheques 4 Cubierta del cartucho de tinta

2 Panel de mando 5 Salida de cheques (hacia abajo)
3 Tornillo de fijación para la tapa 6 Cubiertas de las líneas de escaneo
de la hoja de papel 7 Laminita de fieltro
01750034330 E Módulo de ampliación con caja fuerte ProCash 2100 - Instrucciones de manejo 63
Panel de mando Escáner de cheques (CTS)
Panel de mando
La siguiente imagen muestra el panel de mando del escáner de cheques.
1 Tecla PULDIA
2 Tecla PULING
3 Tecla PULESP
El panel de mando del escáner de cheques está formado por las teclas PULDIA (1),
PULING (2) y PULESP (3). Estas teclas no son importantes para el funcionamiento
normal correcto del escáner. Sirve para que el técnico o el operario puedan chequear el
escáner (véase el apartado "Modo técnico o de operario").
64 Módulo de ampliación con caja fuerte ProCash 2100 - Instrucciones de manejo 01750034330 E
Escáner de cheques (CTS) Colocar un cheque
Colocar un cheque
En el funcionamiento normal, el escáner trabaja como sigue:
• Inserte un cheque por la tapa de cierre del escáner, tal como muestra la imagen en
dirección de la flecha. Al hacerlo mantenga hacia arriba el lado impreso de la página.
Los cheques son alimentados, escaneados, impresos y recogidos en una caja

automáticamente.
En el apartado "Modo técnico o de operario", podrá informarse cómo funciona el escáner

de cheques en el modo operario o el modo técnico.
Cambiar las cubiertas plásticas de las líneas de escaneo Escáner de cheques (CTS)
Cambiar las cubiertas plásticas de las líneas de escaneo

Las líneas de escaneo del escáner de cheques (CTS) llevan dos cubiertas plásticas (1) y
(2). Estas cubiertas pueden ocasionar suciedades y con ello pueden afectar la calidad del
escaneo (la calidad de la imagen).
Si el resultado del escaneo empeora, debería cambiar las cubiertas plásticas.
1 Cubierta plástica para la línea de escaneo del escáner del anverso

2 Cubierta plástica para la línea de escaneo del escáner del reverso
Escáner de cheques (CTS) Modo técnico o de operario
Modo técnico o de operario

• Abra el programa específico del producto (véase el capítulo "Manejo básico",
el apartado "Abrir el programa específico del producto").
• Extraiga el escáner de cheques (véase el capítulo "Manejo básico", el apartado "Abrir /

cerrar las puertas del aparato").
El panel de mando del escáner de cheques está formado por las teclas PULDIA (1),
PULING (2) y PULESP (3) (véase el apartado "Panel de mando").
Pulsando la tecla PULING o la tecla PULESP, usted arranca el motor de transporte del
papel. El mismo gira entonces en dirección de la entrada o de la salida de documentos.
Pulse las teclas en este orden para acceder al modo técnico u operario:
• Pulse la tecla PULDIA (1) y manténgala pulsada.
• Pulse la tecla PULING (2) y manténgala pulsada.
• Suelte la tecla PULING (2).
• Suelte la tecla PULDIA (1).
Un zumbido continuo de dos segundos le indica que el escáner de cheques se encuentra

en el modo diagnóstico (= modo técnico u operario). Para salir del modo técnico u
operario, tiene que desconectar del suministro el escáner de cheques por la fuente de
alimentación externa (véase el apartado "Eliminar los atascos de papel").
Modo técnico o de operario Escáner de cheques (CTS)
En el modo diagnóstico o en el modo técnico / operario, las teclas del panel de mando
tienen las siguientes funciones:
Tecla PULDIA
Cuando usted pulsa la tecla PULDIA (1),

arranca el escáner de cheques. Es decir, se
fijan los ajustes de todos los electroimanes que
sirven para controlar el sello (opcional), los
rodillos de presión (opcionales) y el paso de
transporte de documentos.
Además, la tecla PULDIA controla los ajustes
que sirven para abrir y cerrar la tapa de cierre.
Tecla PULING
Cuando usted pulsa la tecla PULING (2),

después de haber alimentado un documento,
se realizan las siguientes acciones:
− la tapa de cierre se abre para que tenga
lugar el arrastre de un cheque,
− el documento alimentado es transportado,
− el cheque es sellado (opcional) y
escaneado,
− el documento es llevado al escáner de
cheques.
En caso de un error de lectura se emite un zumbido. Si pulsa dos veces la tecla

PULING (2), después de haber insertado un documento, al documento se le
añade un sello de inválido.
Escáner de cheques (CTS) Modo técnico o de operario
Tecla PULESP
Si pulsa la tecla PULESP (3), después de

haber pulsado la tecla PULDIA, el documento
insertado es expulsado nuevamente.
• Inserte nuevamente el escáner de cheques en el aparato y cierre el sistema (véase el

capítulo "Manejo básico").
• Desactive el programa específico del producto (véase el capítulo "Manejo básico",

el apartado "Abrir el programa específico del producto").
Instalación del Dispositivo Anti-Skimming
1.- Descripción
2.- Componentes
3.- Funcionamiento básico
Modo calibración
Modo operativo
4.- Instalación
Instalación del sensor
Instalación del modulo de control
Instalación del cable de datos
Instalación del módulo de calibración
Conexión de los módulos de control y calibrado
5.- Calibración
Cajeros de carga trasera
6.- Configuración Software

Incidencia de las puertas en el funcionamiento del
dispositivo
7.- Comprobación de funcionamiento
8.- Puesta en marcha
9.- Recomendaciones de uso
10.- Variantes del modulo Anti-skiming
11.- Preguntas y Situaciones mas frecuentes
Instalación Dispositivo Anti-Skimming V3.3

2
1.- Descripción
El dispositivo “anti-Skimming” permite la detección de objetos ajenos a la
morfología de los propios cajeros en el área situada en los alrededores de la
embocadura del lector de tarjetas.
El objetivo de este módulo es detectar, y por tanto prevenir, la colocación de

“skimers”. Nombre con que se denomina a dispositivos que colocados en los
cajeros, acceden de forma fraudulenta a los datos grabados en las tarjetas de
banda magnética.
La ubicación del dispositivo anti-skimming es transparente, tanto para el

cliente habitual del cajero como para aquel que pretenda colocar un skimmer.
Los sensores se colocan alrededor de las embocaduras de los lectores de

tarjetas adaptandose a la forma de estas últimas proporcionando un area de
detección más completa.
En caso de detectarse un objeto extraño sobre la boquilla con una masa

mayor de la regulada y durante un tiempo mayor del establecido, el sensor
levantará la alarma de manipulación. A efectos prácticos, hemos regulado el
sensor de fábrica para detectar una masa equivalente al 50% del skimmer
más pequeño durante 120 segundos.
En caso de desaparecer el objeto extraño, el sensor lo detecta y baja la

alarma. En el caso de posible malfuncionamiento del sensor, rotura de
cables, avería… el sistema lo detecta levantando también una alerta.
El dispositivo anti-skimming ha sido desarrollado para que pueda interactuar

con la aplicación de autoservicio que gestiona el cajero automático y
proporciona información al sistema de gestión remota de cajeros.
Paralelamente y de forma complementaria existe una variante que permite

derivar una situación de alarma hacia la caja de alarmas del cajero y por tanto
a la central de alarmas de la Entidad
El aplicativo de los cajeros debe contemplar el manejo del sensor “anti-

skimming” y necesita de alguna pequeña modificación.
Alternativamente y para el caso de cajeros Wincor Nixdorf y en un entorno

wosa, podemos mediante el driver correspondiente, deshabilitar el lector de
tarjetas dejandolo fuera de servicio, como medida de emergencia mientras se
dispone del aplicativo modificado, o se dan las alertas correspondientes.
Este dispositivo tiene una característica especial y es que está ligado al

estado de las puertas del cajero. El dispositivo anti-Skimming funcionará
correctamente si todas las puertas de acceso al cajero están cerradas.

3
2.- Componentes
Conjunto de sensores
Modulo de control
Cable de datos
Módulo de calibración

4
3.- Funcionamiento básico
El dispositivo “anti-Skimming” opera mediante la medición continúa del
entorno de la embocadura del lector de tarjetas. Estos datos son comparados
internamente con unos datos de referencia que permiten determinar un
potencial ataque con “skimmers”.
El dispositivo funciona en dos modos: operativo y de calibración. El modo de

funcionamiento se determina por el estado de las puertas de acceso al cajero.
Si las puertas del cajero están cerradas el dispositivo estará operativo. Si
alguna de las puertas se encuentra abierta, el dispositivo se encuentra en
modo test.
Las medidas del entorno de la embocadura del lector de tarjetas se toman a

través de las señales que envía el sensor al módulo de control. Estas señales
son analizadas para determinar si hay una situación de “normalidad”, de
“pre-alarma” o de “alarma”.
Modo test
El modo test permite comprobar el estado del dispositivo y también permite
realizar manualmente una acción de calibración. Acción por la que se realiza
la toma del valor de referencia. Valor que permite crear el umbral que
permitirá al sistema determinar las situaciones de normalidad o de alarma.
Modo Operativo
Es el modo normal de funcionamiento. En este modo, el dispositivo anti-
Skimming realiza medidas consecutivas del entorno de la embocadura del
lector de tarjetas y las compara con las medidas de referencia tomadas
durante la calibración. Toda medida que supere el rango determinado por
estos valores de referencia supone la existencia de elementos ajenos al
cajero situados en los alrededores del lector de tarjetas. Esta situación se
denomina de “pre-alarma”.
Si la situación de “pre-alarma” se mantiene durante 2 minutos, la situación

cambia y se convierte en una situación de “alarma”.
Estas situaciones se pueden reconocer

visualmente porque en el modulo de calibración
existe un led que toma un color verde si la
situación es de “pre-alarma” y de color rojo
cuando la situación es de “alarma”.
EL led apagado supone una condición de
normalidad.
4.- Instalación
Descripción de los pasos para la instalación del dispositivo anti-Skimming en

los cajeros modelos Procash 2yyy (xe y no xe)

5
1.- Apagar el cajero automático. Esta operación se debe realizar desde el
interruptor general del cajero, realizando un apagado ordenado si fuera
requerido.
Instalación del sensor
1.- Acceder al cajero por la parte anterior abriendo

la puerta superior
2.- Retirar el modulo shutter del lector de tarjetas.

Como se ve en la figura, desde el interior del
cajero la embocadura se ve libre de obstáculos.
3.- El sensor esta dispone de un material adhesivo

de doble cara. Para colocar el sensor hay que
quitar la el papel protector.
4.- Colocar el sensor en la embocadura de lector de tarjetas tal y como se

aprecia en la figura, ajustándolo a la izquierda de
la ventana de la misma (ver fig.)
5.- Colocar de nuevo el shutter del lector de

tarjetas prestando atención para no dañar y dejar
libre el cable de conexión al modulo de control.
Instalación del modulo de control
1.- El modulo de control es un caja que tiene en

una de sus cara un adhesivo (velcro) para su colocación.
2.- Colocar la caja en uno de los laterales del shutter del lector de tarjetas.
Seleccionar la posición comprobando que al cerrar el frontal no impida un
anclaje correcto al cerrar frontal.
3.- Conectar sensor

El sensor está compuesto por una serie de placas
dispuestas de forma longitudinal con una cara
adhesiva y un cable de dos polos que terminan en
dos conectores tipo “banana”. Estos conectores
se introducirán en los orificios que hay situados en
el modulo de control. El cable de color rojo en el
orificio adyacente a la pegatina del mismo color y
el otro cable en el que queda libre.
El cable del sensor debe quedar correctamente embridado para impedir

cortes o tirones,

6
Instalación del cable de datos
El cable dispone de dos conectores RJ-45 que

servirán para conectar el modulo de calibración y
el modulo de control.
Antes de conectar el cable en ambos módulos se

debe alojar en la canaleta móvil del cajero.
Prestar atención en la colocación para dejar una

longitud de cable suficiente para poder conectarlo al modulo de control que
se acaba de instalar en uno de los laterales del shutter del lector de tarjetas.
Instalación del módulo de calibración
Este modulo dispone de un conector RJ-45 y un

cable con dos polos para su conexión en la
electrónica especial del cajero. Estos polos están
identificados con los números 8 y 27 para su
exacta colocación en la regleta. Para facilitar la
conexión se debe colocar este modulo en la
cercanías de la electrónica.
La conexión a la electrónica especial se realizará

introduciendo los dos pines en la regleta (ver regleta en figura).
1.- Desconectar la regleta de la electrónica especial
2.- Identificación huecos.

La identificación de los huecos hay que hacerla teniendo en cuenta la
colocación de la regleta y tomando como referencia el apéndice existente tal
y como se muestra en la figura. La figura muestra la cara de la regleta por
donde se introducen los cables.

7
3.- Colocación de los pines en los huecos.
a) Procash 2xxxx
Los cables están identificados con los números 8 y 27,
para que sean colocados en los huecos 8 y 27 del
conector de la regleta de la electrónica especial. Esta
configuración HW está relacionada con la configuración
SW de CSCW32 en la que se indica que las puertas de
control del modulo anti-Skimming son “MAGDOOR3” y
“RSRVI2” (ver apartado de configuración SW)
b) CompactBank
En el caso particular de este cajero no se utiliza la puerta “RSRVI2” y se
sustituye por “DOOR3”, esto significa que no se utiliza el hueco 27 y se
sustituye por el 19.
Introducir el pin, de forma que la

cara correspondiente al fleje quede
al exterior de la regleta.
Se introduce de esta forma porque

cada uno de los huecos de la regleta
dispone de una pestaña que sirve
para sujetar los pines e impedir que
se salgan de la regleta.
4.- Colocación del modulo de calibración.

Situar el modulo en un lugar de fácil acceso y visibilidad puesto que dispone
del interruptor de calibración y del led que nos permitirá ver el estado del
dispositivo (no alarma/apagado, pre-alarma/verde y alarma/rojo).
Conexión de los módulos de control y calibrado
Una vez se instalados físicamente el sensor en la zona de la embocadura del

lector de tarjetas, el módulo de control, el módulo de calibrado y su conexión
a la electrónica especial, únicamente queda conectar el cable datos. En un
extremo se conecta al módulo de control, y en el otro extremo al módulo de
calibrado.

8
5.- Calibración
Esta operación es fundamental para que el dispositivo anti-Skimming realice
correctamente su función.
Es la operación en la que se toman los valores que dará lugar al rango que
permitirá evaluar las situaciones de normalidad o de alarma.
La operación de calibración se ha de realizar una vez haya arrancado

completamente la aplicación financiera del cajero y por tanto con todos los
dispositivos alojados correctamente y las puertas cerradas.
Cajeros de carga trasera
1.- Comprobar la instalación y conexión de todos los componentes.
2- Anclar debidamente todos los dispositivos móviles del cajero: puerta

superior delantera, lector de tarjetas, impresora de libretas, impresora de
recibo/diario, etc.
3.- Situarse en la parte delantera del

cajero y comprobar que no hay nada en
la embocadura del lector de tarjetas.
4.- Situarse en la parte trasera del

cajero y tomar el módulo de calibración.
5.- Introduzca un objeto punzante en el

agujero y pulse (Modo calibración)
La calibración se realiza desplazando el

interruptor en la dirección que se muestra la figura, para después soltarlo.
Dirección opuesta a la situación del led.
Después de esta operación el led deberá estar apagado. Si no fuera así,

repetir el procedimiento una vez más. Si el led permanece encendido significa
que hay un problema técnico.
7.- La operación de calibrado ha finalizado.
8.- Introduzca nuevamente un objeto punzante en el agujero y pulse (Modo

Operativo)
El cajero puede ponerse en servicio.

9
6.- Configuración Software
El dispositivo anti-Skimming precisa de la siguiente configuración para su
funcionamiento en un entorno Windows, donde hay que reseñar 3 áreas:
CSCW32, DLLs y WOSA.
Configuración CSCW32
Variables de “Register”
a) Cajeros de la familia Procash 2xxxx
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wincor Nixdorf\
CSC-W32\CurrenteVersion\CSCSEL
“MAGDOOR3”=”ANTI_SKIMMING”
“RSRVI2”=“ANTI_SKIMMING”
b) Procash CompactBank
CSC-W32\CurrenteVersion\CSCSEL
“MAGDOOR3”=”ANTI_SKIMMING”
“DOOR3”=“ANTI_SKIMMING”
Incidencia de las puertas en el funcionamiento del dispositivo
Las variables de CSC situadas en:

CSC-W32\CurrentVersion\CSCSEL
“DOOR1”
“DOOR2”
“DOOR3”
Inciden en el funcionamiento del dispositivo “anti-Skimming” de la siguiente

manera.
Si las puertas definidas en esas variables no están cerradas, el dispositivo

anti-Skimming no se pondrá operativo nunca.
Por ejemplo:
Si la variable “DOOR1” tiene el valor “REAR_TOP”, el dispositivo anti-
Skimming no estará operativo mientras tengamos la puerta trasera abierta.

10
Configuración DLLs
Las versiones mínimas para que el dispositivo pueda funcionar en un entorno

Windows son:
Procash 2yyyy
CSCWSEL.DLL 1124
PSSIU20.DLL 2.0/026
PSIDC20.DLL 2.0/018
CompactBank
CSCWSEL.DLL 1170
PSSIU20.DLL 2.0/026
PSIDC20.DLL 2.0/018
Configuración WOSA
Existe una alternativa que permite poner fuera de servicio el lector de tarjetas
cuando se produce una alarma. Esta situación se consigue poniendo a 1 el
valor de la variable “CheckSkimming”.
Ubicaciones de la variable:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\XFS\PHYSICAL_SERVICES\SSI\
o
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\WOSA\XFS_ROOT\PHYSICAL_SERVICES\SSI\
Si se produce una alarma de Skimming y esta variable esta activada (con un

valor 1), el sistema genera un error genérico USER ERROR de manipulación
en el lector. Y además la variable “SIU_TAMPER” cambia a un valor SIU_ON.
Cuando la alarma desaparece el error USER_ERROR y la variable

“SIU_TAMPER” cambia a un valor “SIU_OFF”.

11
7.- Comprobación de funcionamiento
Hay dos maneras de comprobar el funcionamiento del dispositivo anti-
Skimming.
a) En modo test
b) En modo operativo.
Modo calibrado
1.- Resetear el cajero

2.- Abrir la puerta de acceso al modulo de calibración.
3.- Comprobar que el led del módulo de calibración se encuentra apagado
4.- Colocar una pieza en la embocadura de tarjetas que simule un “skimmer”
y comprobar que el led del módulo de calibración se pone en verde (estado
de pre-alarma, indicando que se ha detectado algo en la embocadura del
lector de tarjetas)
5.- Comprobar que al retirar la pieza, el led se apaga (indicando estado de
normalidad)
Modo operativo

2.- Acceder al sistema operativo del PC del cajero para comprobar la
configuración software del equipo
3.- Comprobar los valores y la existencia de la configuración SW adecuada.
5.- Comprobar que el led del módulo de calibración se encuentra apagado
6.- Colocar una pieza en la embocadura del lector de tarjetas que simula un
“skimmer” y comprobar que el led del módulo de calibración se pone en verde
(estado de pre-alarma)
7.- Para comprobar que el dispositivo cambia a un estado de alarma, led en
rojo, hay que mantener la pieza en la embocadura del lector de tarjetas
durante al menos 2 minutos.
8.- Retirar la pieza y comprobar que el led se apaga.

12
8.- Puesta en marcha
2.- Esperar hasta que arranque la aplicación SW del cajero
3.- Comprobar que el led está apagado
9. Recomendaciones de Uso
El dispositivo Anti-Skimming es un sistema electrónico de seguridad que

requiere una serie de condiciones especiales de mantenimiento.
* Toda manipulación y sustitución de piezas y dispositivos del cajero

automático puede influir en el funcionamiento de este sistema de seguridad.
Es imprescindible realizar una operación de Calibración y Prueba de

Funcionamiento del dispositivo Anti-Skimming después de realizar cualquier
tipo de tarea de mantenimiento y reparación.
10.- Variantes del modulo Anti-Skimming

El modulo anti-Skimming dispone de dos variantes, estándar y estándar con
conexión externa.
Variante estándar
Los componentes, funcionamiento y descripción de esta variante es la que se
ha realizado en el contenido de este documento.
Variante con conexión externa

La incorporación de esta conexión al modulo se ha realizado para
independizar la gestión de las alarmas generadas de la aplicación sw de
autoservicio que gobierna el cajero automático.
Se trata de una modificación HW que consiste en la incorporación de un relé

de bucle cerrado en el modulo de calibración.
La conexión a este relé se realiza mediante los dos cables que están
conectados a la modulo de calibración. Estos cables permiten la conexión a la
Central de alarmas. Cuando se produce una alarma, el relé de bucle cerrado
se abre, produciendo el aviso correspondiente.

13
11.- Situaciones y preguntas frecuentes
a) Una vez instalado el dispositivo en modo operativo, no detecta los
artilugios colocados en la embocadura de tarjetas. El led del modulo de
calibración permanece siempre apagado.
Comprobar su funcionamiento
Abrir la puerta y acceder al modulo de calibración.
Si el dispositivo opera y detecta la colocación de objetos en la embocadura
de tarjetas:
- Comprobar que las pruebas de funcionamiento del dispositivo se han
hecho con todas las puertas del cajero cerradas.
Las puertas del cajero, identificadas en el registry, afectan al
funcionamiento del dispositivo. Si alguna de estas puertas está abierta,
el dispositivo queda deshabilitado.
- La electrónica especial tiene algún problema y no reconoce el
dispositivo anti-Skimming
Si el dispositivo no opera.
- Comprobar que el cajero está encendido
- Comprobar las conexiones de alimentación, del sensor en la caja de
control y de latiguillo RJ45
- Comprobar la conexión latiguillo RJ45 en el modulo de calibración
- Comprobar la conexión del modulo de calibración hasta la electrónica
especial
b) Una vez instalado el dispositivo en modo operativo el dispositivo funciona

correctamente pero la aplicación SW no actúa ante la colocación de objetos
colocados en la embocadura de tarjetas. El led del modulo de calibración si
funciona cambia a color verde cuando se colocan los artilugios y pasados 2
minutos cambia a color rojo.
Comprobar que las variables (CSCW32 y WOSA) de control y gestión del

dispositivo Anti-Skimming son correctas
c) El dispositivo está en alarma.

El cajero tiene todas las puertas cerradas y el modulo de calibración tiene el
led en rojo.
Comprobar la existencia de algún objeto extraño en la embocadura del lector
de tarjetas.
- Hay objeto extraño en la embocadura
Retirar y comprobar que el led del modulo de calibrado se apaga.
-La embocadura esta limpia
Realizar una operación de calibración.
Comprobar funcionamiento del dispositivo.
El dispositivo se ha podido descalibrar porque se ha realizado una
intervención de mantenimiento y reparación del cajero que ha
modificado el entorno del sensor y no se ha hecho una operación de
calibración.

14
d) El dispositivo no está en alarma pero la aplicación SW está detectando una
situación de alarma por “skimer”
- Comprobar que el dispositivo está en modo “operativo”, si está en

modo “calibración” el cajero asume que el dispositivo está inoperativo
provocando una situación de alarma
- Poner el sistema en modo calibración y comprobar el funcionamiento

del dispositivo. Si el dispositivo no responde hay que hacer una
revisión de la instalación para comprobar que alguno de los
componentes está desconectado o estropeado.

15
Components Anti-Skimming Module
Components
Our ASKIM consists of the anti-skimming base unit, the ASKIM sensor and the
ASKIM button (see the section "Function elements").
Component Order number
Anti-skimming base unit
Sensors:
ProCash 1500 01750079304
ProCash 2xxx 01750078467
ProCash 3100 01750079728
Anti-skimming base unit
28 Anti-Skimming Module - Service Manual

Anti-Skimming Module Principle of functioning
Principle of functioning
The sensor is mounted at the rear of the ATM's customer panel in the direct
vicinity of the magnetic card input slot.
The ASKIM board checks the environment of the card input slot for untypical
changes caused by certain objects that are generally part of a skimmer. An
alarm is triggered via the alarm output if such a change exceeds the alarm
threshold for 3 minutes without interruption. The alarm delay is necessary to
prevent an alarm from being triggered by changes that occur during normal
use of the ATM.
i To operate the ASKIM module specific dependencies between the

ASKIM and the product-specific software (e.g. CSC-W32) need to be
observed.
ASKIM module up to revision level 3

The alarm is stored, and can only be reset by pressing the ASKIM button.
ASKIM module up to revision level 4

With the upgrade to revision level 4 the alarm output function can be set to
either 'saving alarm' (factory setting) or 'not saving alarm'.
If the ASKIM module is set to 'saving alarm' the alarm can only be reset by
pressing the ASKIM button.
ASKIM module revision level 5 and 6

Internal changes
ASKIM module revision level 7 and 8

From revision level 7 on calibration is no longer possible while the door is open
and the application running. Calibration only starts at the moment the door or
the customer panel is closed. After the door or the customer panel has been
closed, it needs to be kept closed 45 seconds.
Anti-Skimming Module - Service Manual 31

Principle of functioning Anti-Skimming Module
Connection to SE III (internal inputs/outputs I)
Block diagram
ASKIM
Sensor
Special electr. III
4x
Internal in-/
outputs I
ASKIM
base
unit
Signal cable ASKIM
ASKIM button/
distributor
status LED
power
12 V
The alarm output is connected to a spare input 2 on the special electronics

module III.
Depending on the type of application, it can put the ATM out of service, trigger
a silent alarm, switch on a camera or send a message via ProView.
The ASKIM board is monitored via an output (door switch 3) on the special
electronics module III. This function detects if the ASKIM board is defective or
not ready, or if the cable connection to the special electronics module is not in
order.
Suppression of the alarm (see also section "Functions - Suppression of alarm
evaluation") is also controlled via this output.
When the ASKIM board, or the entire device, is switched on, calibration takes
place automatically.

Circuit diagram and pin assignment of ASKIM base unit to

SE III
ST 7
ST 6
ST 5
ST 4
Power supply
Female connector ST 3
View litz wire side 12 V 1
2
1 2
View litz wire side GND 3
8 ST 8
1 Alarm 1
16 2 GND 2
GND 3 Alarm Enable 3
4 GND 4
27
24 ST 2
29 30 1
Status LED 2
3
ASKIM button 4
5
ST 2 Connector 2, ASKIM button / status LED

(ASKIM signal cable)
ST 3 Connector 3, power supply connection
(ASKIM/Touch power cable)
ST 4 ASKIM sensor
ST 5 ASKIM sensor
ST 6 ASKIM sensor
ST 7 ASKIM sensor
ST 8 Connector 8, Alarm output / enable
i View of contacts from litz wire side!

Pins 1, 2, 29 and 30 are not on the special electronics module!

Principle of functioning Anti-Skimming Module
Connection to the customer panel special

electronics (connector X9) (USB systems)
Block diagram
ASKIM
Sensor
special electronics
special electronics
Customer panel
4x
Central USB
Connector X7
Connector X9
I2C port
ASKIM
base
Connector X8
unit
Signal cable
ASKIM
ASKIM button/
Status LED
distributor
12 V
Power
The ASKIM base unit is connected to connector X9 of the customer panel

special electronics via connector X8.
In case of an alarm, the alarm output (pin 1 of connector X8) sends a signal to
the input of connector X9 (pin 1 - ASKIM response).
The response of customer panel special electronics (connector X9, pin 3 -
ASKIM switch signal) is sent to connector X8 of the ASKIM base unit (pin 3 -
alarm enable).
Depending on the type of application, it can put the ATM out of service, trigger
a silent alarm, switch on a camera or send a message via ProView.
The ASKIM logic is monitored by the special electronics via the feedback
(connector X9, pin 3). This function detects if the ASKIM board is defective or
not ready, or if the cable connection to the special electronics module is not in
order.
place automatically.

Circuit diagram and pin assignment of ASKIM base unit

on customer panel special electronics (USB)
ST 7
ST 6
ST 5
ST 4
Power supply
ST 3
USB customer panel 12 V 1
special electronics 2
GND 3
ST X9 ST 8
1 Alarm 1
2 GND 2
3 Alarm Enable 3
4 GND 4
ST 2
1
Status LED 2
3
ASKIM button 4
5
ST 2 Connector 2, ASKIM button / status LED

ST 3 Connector 3, power supply connection
(ASKIM/Touch power cable)
ST 4 ASKIM sensor
ST 5 ASKIM sensor
ST 6 ASKIM sensor
ST 7 ASKIM sensor
ST 8 Connector 8, Alarm output / enable

Functions Anti-Skimming Module
Functions
Suppression of alarm evaluation

The ASKIM will only work properly when the device is closed and an
application is running. Alarm evaluation is therefore suppressed while a door is
open. However, an alarm that has been set will remain.
Resetting the alarm delay

The alarm delay can be reset from 3 minutes to zero for test purposes (see
section "Function testing").
Switch-on/switch-off characteristics
(autocalibration)
place automatically in order to obtain precisely defined start parameters.
During this process it is essential to make sure that there are no foreign
objects in the vicinity of the magnetic card input slot.
Autocalibration during operation

The module calibrates itself automatically during operation. However, these
parameters are cleared when the ASKIM board or the entire device is switched
on again.
Manual calibration
If automatic calibration cannot take place in special circumstances, this is
indicated by a steady red status LED next to the ASKIM button. In this case it
is necessary to press the ASKIM button to obtain newly defined start
parameters (see the section "Calibration").

Anti-Skimming Module Functions
Setting the alarm output function

The alarm output function can be set to 'saving alarm' or to 'not saving alarm'
in an ASKIM module with revision level 4 and higher.
Saving alarm (factory default)

With the 'saving alarm' function an alarm is saved on the ASKIM module which
can only be reset with the ASKIM button (see section "Resetting an alarm").
Not saving alarm (selectable)

With the 'not saving alarm' function an alarm is not saved on the ASKIM
module. The alarm output stays set only as long as a skimming module is
attached. If the skimming module is removed, the alarm output is reset
immediately without calibration.
For information on the display of the current setting and on changing the
setting please refer to the section "Saving alarm / not saving alarm".
Resetting an alarm
An alarm that has been set is indicated by a blinking status LED next to the
ASKIM button. The alarm can only be reset via the ASKIM button.
Revision level 4:
The device has to be open in order to press the ASKIM button, and it has to be
closed immediately when this has been done since calibration takes place
after 30 seconds.
If the device is not closed within 30 seconds, the system will calibrate itself for
the environment that exists at that moment. If the device is then closed without
recalibration, a false alarm can be triggered immediately or later.
Before calibration it is essential to make sure that no skimmer or other object is
in the vicinity of the magnetic card input slot.
After calibration the status LED should be checked again to see that it is off
(normal state: LED off).

Functions Anti-Skimming Module
Revision level 7 and 8

From revision level 7 on calibration is no longer possible while the door is open
and the application running. Calibration only starts at the moment the door or
the customer panel is closed. After the door or the customer panel has been
closed, it needs to be kept closed 45 seconds.
Before calibration it is essential to make sure that no skimmer or other object is
in the vicinity of the magnetic card input slot.
After calibration the status LED should be checked again to see that it is off
(normal state: LED off).
Calibration after device commissioning

Calibration is required whenever a device is commissioned in the same way as
described above (heeding the same points explained as in the section
"Resetting an alarm").

Anti-Skimming Module Function elements
Function elements
1 Status LED (red) 2 ASKIM button (calibration button)
Status messages
The current state or any malfunction of the anti-skimming module is indicated
by the status LED.
LED Meaning Remedy
Off No alarm has been No action needs to be taken
triggered
Red (blinking) An alarm has been Reset the alarm after checking
triggered the card input slot in the
customer panel
Steady red Calibration is necessary Perform calibration after
checking that there is definitely
no skimmer or other object in
the vicinity of the magnetic card
input slot.
Red Calibration started No action needs to be taken
after button is
pressed

LEDs on the board Anti-Skimming Module
LEDs on the board

There are several LEDs on the board. They are used to check the functioning
of the ASKIM.
LED status description up to and including revision level 7
Pos. LED State Description Remedy

(illuminated)
1,2,3 D11, Voltage Internal power supply -
D12, present
D13
green
4 D2 Ready 10 seconds after the Check whether
green power supply has been power supply has
switched on the board been switched on.
goes into measurement
mode and the 'Ready'
signal is set.

Anti-Skimming Module LEDs on the board

(illuminated)
5 D3 Alarm This is set when a Find out what
red threshold has been triggered the
exceeded longer than alarm.
the specified alarm It may be
delay time. The LED necessary to
goes out when the level perform
falls below the calibration by
threshold. pressing the
In contrast to the LED ASKIM button
next to the ASKIM (see the section
button this alarm is not "Manual
stored, i.e. switching off calibration").
and back on clears the
alarm.
6 D4 Dynamic This is set as soon as a Find out why
orange alarm threshold has been threshold was
exceeded. The LED exceeded. Any
goes out when the level skimmer or other
falls below the object in the
threshold. An alarm is vicinity of the
triggered if a threshold IDCU's slot?
has been exceeded for
more than 3 minutes.
7 D5 Reserved
green

LEDs on the board Anti-Skimming Module
LED status description starting with revision level 8

(illuminated)
1,2,3 D11, Voltage Internal power supply -
D12, present
D13
green
4 D2 Ready Approx. 45 sec after Check whether
green power-on the LED is power supply has
set. been switched on.
5 D3 Alarm This is set when a Find out what
red threshold is exceeded triggered the
for more than 3 alarm.
minutes. The LED goes It may be
out when the level falls necessary to
below the threshold. perform
calibration by
pressing the
ASKIM button
(see the section
"Manual
calibration").
6 D4 Dynamic This is set as soon as a Find out why
orange alarm threshold has been threshold was
exceeded. The LED exceeded. Any
goes out when the level skimmer or other
falls below the object in the
threshold. An alarm is vicinity of the
triggered if a threshold IDCU's slot?
has been exceeded for
more than 3 minutes.
7 D5 Alarm saved Saving alarm = Switching from
green LED on (default) 'saving alarm' to
Not saving alarm = LED 'not saving alarm'
off and vice versa is
described in the
section "Changing
the setting".

Anti-Skimming Module Resetting an alarm
Resetting an alarm
• Open the device (see the Operating Manual for the device).
Use an object such as a ballpoint pen
to press the ASKIM button for approx.
2 seconds .
When you release the button the
status LED will be lit until the
calibration is completed.
• Close the device within the next 30 seconds (see the Operating Manual for
the device). Then leave the device closed for at least 45 seconds.
• As soon as the alarm is reset, the status LED goes off.
Saving alarm / not saving alarm

i The function to set the alarm output 'saving alarm' or 'not saving
alarm' is only available on an ASKIM module with at least revision
level 4.
At the time of shipping the anti-skimming module is set to 'saving

alarm'.

Saving alarm / not saving alarm Anti-Skimming Module
Display of current setting

The selected setting 'saving alarm' or 'not saving alarm' can be queried with
the ASKIM button and is displayed via the status LED.
From revision level 8 on the current setting is also displayed on the ASKIM
base unit.
• Switch the power supply of the ASKIM module off.

to press the ASKIM button.
Keep the ASKIM button pressed.
• Switch the power supply of the ASKIM module on again.
• Keep the ASKIM button pressed approximately another 10 seconds after

the power supply is switched on until the status LED lights up.
• Release the ASKIM button immediately and observe the status LED.
Display of status LED Current setting
LED is on for 3 seconds 'Saving alarm'
LED blinks 3 times 'Not saving alarm'

Anti-Skimming Module Saving alarm / not saving alarm
Setting indicated by LED on the ASKIM base unit from revision level 8 on (see
section "LEDs on the board", position 7).
ASKIM base unit LED Current setting
(position 7)
LED on 'Saving alarm'
LED off 'Not saving alarm'
Switching the setting
• Switch the power supply of the ASKIM module off.

to press the ASKIM button.
Keep the ASKIM button pressed.
• Switch the power supply of the ASKIM module on again.
• Keep the ASKIM button pressed approximately another 10 seconds after

the power supply is switched on.
i The status LED is now on for approximately 3 seconds or it blinks 3

times.
• Keep the ASKIM button pressed for at least another second.
• Now release the ASKIM button.

Saving alarm / not saving alarm Anti-Skimming Module
The current setting is now indicated via the status LED.

Display of status LED Current setting
LED is on for 3 seconds 'Saving alarm'
LED blinks 3 times 'Not saving alarm'
Setting indicated by LED on the ASKIM base unit from revision level 8 on (see
section "LEDs on the board", position 7).
ASKIM base unit LED Current setting
(position 7)
LED on 'Saving alarm'
LED off 'Not saving alarm'

Anti-Skimming Module Calibration
Calibration
to press the ASKIM button for approx.
2 seconds.
• Close the device within the next 30 seconds (see the Operating Manual for
the device). Then leave the device closed for at least 45 seconds.
The device performs calibration.
• After calibration check that the status LED is off (normal state: off).
• Open the device door or the customer panel, for example, briefly to check
calibration.

Anti-Skimming Module Function testing
Test procedure
To reduce the testing time the anti-skimming module can be placed in test
mode. The time prior to the 'alarm' is reset from 3 minutes to 0.
• Switch on the power supply of the device when the ASKIM button is
pressed.
• Request the signal 'alarm' in the KDIAG for special electronics modules via
the 'anti-skimming' checkpoint.
The test sequence is menu-driven.
At first hold a metal object (e.g. a
screw 1M4x6 or similar) in front of the
right (1) and then in front of the left
side (2) of the IDCU slot. The orange
LED 'dynamic alarm' and subsequently
1 the red LED 'alarm' have to illuminate
at the base unit anti-skimming. When
2
not in test mode, the red LED 'alarm'
illuminates after 3 minutes, presuming
that the test object remains in front of
the card reader slot for more than 3
minutes.
Switch the test mode off again after the test has been performed by rebooting
the system or by briefly interrupting the 12 V power supply to the ASKIM base
unit.

Cajetín de tinta sin sensor de proximidad – RFO-SQS
01750092196
Está diseñado con un dispositivo de tinta y una serie de micro switches que
detectan una manipulación inadecuada, en tal caso se dispara el dispositivo
de tinta inutilizando el uso de los billetes.
El cajetín solo se puede abrir con la llave.
Debido a la necesidad de ubicar el mecanismo y los depósitos de tinta, el
espacio se reduce notablemente de tal manera que solo pueden albergar
billetes de hasta 100 €uros. Es decir, el cajetín se puede ajustar para 5, 10,
20, 50 y 100 €uros
En la instalación es necesario instalar el elemento que activa el cajetín una
vez cerrado, va unido al lateral del cajetín con sendos tornillos de rosca-
chapa.
El ajuste se realiza de forma similar a un cajetín normal.
Es necesario tener en cuenta, que al liberar los elementos que rellenan el
espacio libre existente a ambos lados de las guías para ajustarlas a la medida
del billete, deben volver a colocarlas, las que quepan, es decir el espacio
debe quedar cubierto.
Desbloquee el muelle (1) Presione

la guía (2) hasta la mitad de la tapa de raíles (3) y extráigala. Ajuste al tamaño
del billete a insertar y vuelva a colocar la guía.
Tratamiento de la torre del dispensador
1. Elimine el stacker completamente.
2. Coloque la tapa SQS 01750091933 encima del primer estractor como
se indica en la ilustración .
Seguidamente doble las pletinas 1 y 2 para que la pieza quede fijada.
3.
4. Elimine los tornillos de fijación de la tapa SQS 01750068828
5.
6. Inserte las guías 2 y 3 en los orificios de fijación.
7.
8. Posicione la chapa en su sitio subiéndola hasta que quede al ras del
propio separador, finalmente coloque los tornillos para que quede
fijada.
Mensajes Acústicos
Sonido Descripción Causa Acción

Sin sonido No hay sonido El bloqueo Ajuste el bloqueo
cuando la llave se metálico se ha metálico,
gira a la posición doblado, el compruebe el
de cerrado switch está mal o switch, sustituya
la batería está la cajetín
descargada
Un pitido corto El cajetín ha sido Puede
desbloqueado y vaciar/llenar el
el dispositivo de cajetín o
tinta ha sido sustituirlo
desactivado
Dos pitidos El cajetín ha sido Puede insertar el
cortos bloqueado y el cajetín en el
dispositivo de dispensador
tinta ha sido
activado¡¡
Pitidos cortos y La carga de la Sustituya el
…. continuados batería está muy cajetín
baja
-------… Pitidos largos El cajetín ha sido Sustituir cajetín
continuos bloqueado y se
ha detectado una
avería electrónica
Manuales de
Supervisor para
Cajeros
Por
José Luis García Requerey
Pepelu

-CALIDAD:
* Cierre de avería: -Cerrar aviso, siempre con todos los módulos sin error
- Mantenimiento preventivo = Realiza chequeo de todos los módulos,
mostrándonos en pantalla y con un recibo el resultado. (Igual que al cerrar un aviso.)
-DISPENSADOR:
* Recarga de dinero
* Encaje
* Consultar totales
* Modo de dispensación
-CCDM:
* Vaciar cajetín de billetes
* Cargar monedas
* Retirar billetes rechazados Vaciar cajetín de rechazos
* Consultar totales
* Estado de ingresador
-TOP COIN:
* Encaje de monedas
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
1-CONFIGURACIÓN * PARA LOS TECNICOS EN CAMPO*

2-CAMBIO DE PANEL
3-MANTENIMIENTO DISPOSITIVOS
4-DIARIO DE OPERACIONES
5-OPERACIONES CONTABLES
6-OTRAS OPERACIONES
7-ESTADO GENERAL
8-TRATAMIENTO DE AVERIAS
3-MANTENIMIENTOS DISPOSITIVOS
1-ESTADO DISPOSITIVOS
2-DESBLOQUEO DE DISPOSITIVOS: 1-LECTOR DE TARJETAS
2- IMPRESORAS DE LIBRETAS
3-IMPRESORA DE RECIBOS
4-DEPOSITOS
5-IMPRESORA DE DOCUMENTOS
6-DISPENSADOR
7-LECTOR CÓDIGO DE BARRAS
8-ACEPTADOR DE EFECTIVO
9-LECTOR DE CHEQUES
10-DIARIO DE OPERACIONES
*DIARIO CORRUPTO RECUPERACION DEL MISMO *
11-DISPENSADOR MONEDAS
12-MENÚ ANTERIOR
13-MENÚ PRINCIPAL
3-APLICACIONES DEL FABRICANTE
* NO UTILIZAR SE BLOQUEA EL CAJERO*
4-MENÚ PRINCIPAL
5-OPERACIONES CONTABLES 1-CANTIDAD CONTABLE

2-CUADRE CONTABLE
3-JUSTIFICACIÓN CONTABLE
4-LISTADO DE TOTALES
5-DECARGA CONTABLE
6-MENÚ PRINCIPAL
6-OTRAS OPERACIONES 1-PERSONALIZACION CONCEPTO

2-CONTROL VOLUMEN *ALTAVOZ
EXTERNO*
3-RESET CAJERO: 1 SI
2 NO
4-ENVIO IMAGENES
5-MENÚ PRINCIPAL
7-ESTADO GENERAL *ESTADO REAL DE ALGUNOS DISPOSITIVOS, OJO NO

TODOS, SOLO LOS QUE FALLA COMO CLAVES, LINEA, PIN PAD
MENU PRINCIPAL DE SUPERVISOR
0.- CAMBIO DE PANTALLA

3.- DISPOSITIVOS 2 Test de Dispositivos
1.- Lector tarjetas
2.- Test impresora Recibos
3.- Test PINPAD
4 o 5.- Test dispensador
*****OJO SIEMPRE QUE CAMBIAN PAPEL EN IMPRESORA DE RECIBOS,
REALIZAR 2.- Test impresora Recibos
5.- FUNCIONES CONTABLES 1.- Arqueo con recibo

2.- Carga de dinero
3.- Cierre contable
4.- Off-line
5.- Arqueo sin recibo
*****TARJETAS CAPTURADAS REALIZAR 1.- Arqueo con recibo Y 8.- RESET
8.- RESET ESTA OPCION SOLO DEBE SER EJECUTADA

POR PERSONAL TECNICO AUTORIZADO.
*******************PULSAR CONTINUAR*******************************
Pantalla de estado
|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| v302000 PANTALLA DE ESTADO (1/2) |
| |
| LLAVE:AUX ESTADO:FUERA DE SERVICIO(MNT) |
| EST.LINEA: ON_LINE PDTES.TRANSAC.:0 |
| EST.SESION:ON_LINE PDTES.INCIDEN.:0 |
| TARJET. LIBRET. |
| SOBRES DEP.BI. |
| BILLET DEP.CHQ |
| Caj.1 Caj.2 |
| RECIBOS TICKET |
| SCANNER CHIP |
|------------------------------------------|
Menú principal
|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| MENU PRINCIPAL |
| |
| 1. FUNCIONES DE INFORMACION DE ESTADO |
| 2. FUNCIONES DEL OPERADOR |
| 3. FUNCIONES DEL SUPERVISOR |
| 4. COPIA DE FICHEROS DIARIO ELECTRONICO |
| 5. IPL |
| ELIJA UNA OPCION (+'ENTER') |
| *** Este cajero no precisa copia de |
| ficheros de diario electronico. |
| Consultarlos en terminal de oficina*** |
|------------------------------------------|
2 - Funciones de operador 1/2
|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| FUNCIONES DEL OPERADOR (1/2) |
| |
| 1. CONTROL DE LAS UNIDADES |
| 2. BALANCE CONTABLE |
| 3. MANEJO DE BILLETES |
| 4. METODO DE ENTREGA DE BILLETES |
| 5. CAMBIO DE DENOMINACION DE BILLETES |
| 6. CARGA DE LIBRETAS |
| 7. DEFINICION DEL MODELO DE LIBRETAS |
| |
| ELIJA OPCION (+'ENTER') o 'SIGUIENTE' |
2 - Funciones de operador 2/2

|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| FUNCIONES DEL OPERADOR (2/2) |
| |
| 8. CAMBIO DENOMINACION DE TICKETS |
| 9. CAMBIO DENOMINACION DE ROLLOS |
| 10. VISUALIZADOR INGRESOS BEDU |
| 11. INSTALACION DE SOFTWARE Y TABLAS |
| 12. IMPRIMIR TOTALES ANTERIORES |
| 13. IMPRESION ENTRADAS PARA VALIDACION |
| |
| |
| ELIJA OPCION (+'ENTER') o 'SIGUIENTE |
|------------------------------------------|
2.1 - Control de unidades 1/2

|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| CONTROL DE UNIDADES(1/2) |
| EST.ACTUAL EST.REQUER. |
| 1.LECT.TARJETA |
| 2.IMPR.LIBRETA FUERA SERV. EN SERVICIO |
| 7.BILLETES |
| 8.CAJETIN 1 |
| 9.CAJETIN 2 |
| 10.DEPOSI.SOBRE |
| 50.VALIDAR |
| SELECCIONE UNIDAD Y LUEGO 50-VALIDAR |
| o 'SIGUIENTE' para Pantalla Siguiente |
|------------------------------------------|
2.1 - Control de unidades 2/2
|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| CONTROL DE UNIDADES(2/2) |
| EST.ACTUAL EST.REQUER. |
| 11.IMPR.RECIBOS |
| 12.ESCANER |
| 16.TARJETA CHIP |
| 17.CHEQUES |
| 18.DEP.BIL |
| 19.IMPR.TICKETS |
| 50.VALIDAR |
| SELECCIONE UNIDAD Y LUEGO 50-VALIDAR |
| o 'SIGUIENTE' para Pantalla Siguiente |
2.19 - Impresión de entrada de test

|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| IMPRESION ENTRADAS VALIDACION |
| |
| 1. IMPRESION DE UNA ENTRADA |
| 2. ACTIVACION DE ESCANER PARA LECT |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| ELIJA OPCION (+'ENTER') o 'SIGUIENTE |
|------------------------------------------|
2.19.1 - Impresión de entrada de test

|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| IMPRIMIR UNA ENTRADA |
| |
| Esta entrada deber. usarse para validar |
| el estado del rollo de entradas y la |
| calidad obtenida en la impresi.n. |
| |
| la entrada, usar opci.n 2-Activ.escaner |
| |
| |
| 1 |
| PULSE 1 (+'ENTER') |
|------------------------------------------|
2.2 - Balance contable (1 para imprimir)
|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| SUBTOTALES(1/3)-EXISTENCIAS |
| |
| Exst. Carga Entrg Exst. Exs.act |
| Nominal anter Dscrg pagos actal importe |
| C.Inf 20 0 0 0 0 0,00 |
| C.Sup 50 0 0 0 0 0,00 |
| |
| Ext.Ant Crg/Dsc Entrg. Ext.Act |
| Imp.total 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 |
| Ingresos efectivo 0,00 |
| Ingresos cheques 0,00 (Contable |
|------------------------------------------|
2.5 - Cambio denominación de billetes

|------------------------------------------|
| OFI2400 CAJ0026 14/01/2008 18:48 |
| CAMBIO DE DENOMINACION BILLETES |
| |
| NO SE PUEDE CAMBIAR LA DENOMINACION DE |
| BILLETES SI ANTES NO SE REALIZA UN |
| CIERRE CONTABLE |
| |
| 1. DENOMINACION CAJETIN 1 [ 50]EUR: |
| 2. DENOMINACION CAJETIN 2 [ 20]EUR: |
| 5. ACTUALIZAR |
| |
| ELIJA UNA OPCION (+'ENTER') |
MENU PRINCIPAL
0) CAMBIO DE PANTALLA
1) DATOS ENTIDAD
2) DATOS DE CONEXIÓN
3) DATOS TÉCNICOS
4) DIAGNÓSTICOS
5) FUNCIONES CONTABLES
6) FUNCIONES OPERATIVAS
7) INCLUSIÓN DE PANTALLAS
8) DIARIO ELECTRÓNICO
3) DATOS TÉCNICOS
1) IDENTIFICATIVO DE VERSIÓN---- ENTIDAD XXXX V.1/03
2) ESTADO DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS-- AL ATM NO LE FALTA DE NADA

EL ATM NO ESTA BAJO DE NADA
DISPENSADOR:
CAJETINES NO LLENOS
DISPOSITIVOS CON FALLOS:
DEP.
3) TEST DE DISPOSITIVOS---------1) IMPRESORA DE RECIBOS

IMPRESORA DE RECIBOS
Comprueba e inicializa la impresora de recibos. Si esta en
perfecto estado se expide un recibo en blanco
2) DISPENSADOR DE DINERO
POSN TIPO ESTADO NUMRO VALOR
1
2 2 BAJ 91 10
3 3 BAJ 86 20
4 4 BAJ 94 50
9) SALIR
4) DISPENSADOR DE SOBRES
9) SALIR
5) FUNCIONES CONTABLES
FUNCIONES CONTABLES
1) ARQUEO CON RECIBO Esta opción es exclusivamente informativa.
2) CARGA DE DINERO
3) CIERRE CONTABLE
4) MOVIMIENTOS DKT OFFLINE
5) ARQUEO SIN RECIBO
9) SALIR
* SI ESTA OFF LINE POSIBLEMENTE NO INTRODUJERON AL ENTRAR EN MODO

SUPERVISOR LA PASSWORD*
MENU PRINCIPAL
1- FUNCIONES CONSULTA
2- FUNCIONES OPERADOR
3- MODIFICACION DE PARAMETROS
4- FUNCIONES DE SUPERVISOR
5- FUNCIONES SUPERVISOR
6- IPL
1- FUNCIONES CONSULTA
1- CONSULTA DE SUBTOTALES
2- CONSULTA DENOMINACIONES
3- CONSULTA DATOS HOST
4- CONSULTA APLICACIÓN
5- DIARIO ELECTRONICO
2-FUNCIONES OPERADOR
1- CIERRE CONTABLE
2- CARGA DE BILLETES
5-FUNCIONES SUPERVISOR
1- ESTADO DE LAS UNIDADES---- 1- LECTOR TARJETAS
2- IMP. LIBRETAS
3- DISPENSADOR SOBRES
4- IMP. RECIBOS
5- UNIDAD PIN PAD
8- IDIOMA CAJERO
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
2- FUNCIONES OPERADOR
3- FUNCIONES SUPERVISOR
4- IPL
2- FUNCIONES OPERADOR:
1-CONTROL DE UNIDADES-----1-LECTOR DE TARJETAS

2-IMPRESORA DE LIBRETAS
3-DISPENSADOR
4-CAJETIN 1
5-CAJETIN 2
6-CAJETIN 3
7-UNIDAD DE INGRESOS
8-IMPRESORA DE RECIBOS
2-CARGA BILLETES
5-BALANCE CONTABLE
7-CUADRE CONTABLE ----PRUEBA PARA IMPRIMIR EL CUADRE EN LA
IMPRESORA DE RECIBOS
3- FUNCIONES SUPERVISOR:
1-FECHA Y HORA
OBSERVACIONES: OJO CUANDO ESTE LA SESIÓN OFF LINE, ES

POSIBLE QUE NO SE IDENTIFICO CON EL Nº DE EMPLEADO EN EL
CAJERO.
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
1- IMPRESIÓN DE DATOS
2- ID CAJERO
3- CLAVE MAESTRA
4- COMUNICACIONES
5- EFECTIVO
6- TOTALES
7- CAMBIO DE REMESA
8- CARGA DE DATOS
9- IMPRESIÓN CABECERA
10- PERIFERICO
11- REINICIAR
12- CUADRE
13- CAMBIO PANTALLA
14- TARJETA-LIBRETA
15- DIARIO ELECTRÓNICO
16- VOLUMEN
17- DESCUADRE
18- MAS OPCIONES
10-PERIFERICO
1-CONSULTA DE ESTADO INDICA EL ESTADO DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
2-CONFIGURACIÓN: ACTIVAMOS DISPOSITIVOS FUERA DE SERVICIO:
F. F. HOST
1-LECTORES: 1- LECTOR DE TARJETAS
2-CODIGO DE BARRAS
2-IMPRESORAS 1-DIARIO
2-RECIBOS
3- LIBRETAS
3-ACTIVAR DISPENSADOR
4-RESET DISPOSITIVOS: 1-LECTORES: 1- LECTOR DE TARJETAS
2- CODIGO DE BARRAS
2-IMPRESORAS: 1- DIARIO
2- RECIBOS
3- LIBRETAS
3-SENSORES
4-DISPENSADOR
5-OTROS: 1-PANEL TRASERO
2-ENCRYPTOR/TECLADO
3-INGRESOS BILLETES
9-SALIR
6-SALIR
5-DIAGNOSTICOS---NO FUNCIONA
9- SALIR
11- REINICIAR
1-REINICIAR
2-APAGAR
14-TARJETA-LIBRETA
1-PETICIÓN PIN DE LIBRETA Y TARJETA
18-MAS OPCIONES
6-CONFIGURACIÓN DE IDIOMA
PARA ENTRAR EN EL MENU PRINCIPAL F6 0 F2
UNA VEZ EN EL MENU F5 O F1
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
1 FUNCIONES INFORMACIÓN ESTADO

2 FUNCIONES OPERADOR
3 FUNCIONES SUPERVISOR
1 FUNCIONES INFORMACIÓN ESTADO
1 SUBTOTALES
2 VACIAR MEDIO RETENIDOS (VACIAR C-RECHAZOS)
3 CONSULTAR VERSIÓN
2 FUNCIONES OPERADOR
1 CONTROL DE UNIDADES (activar o desactivar dispositivos)

2 CARGA DE BILLETES
3 LISTAR CONTADORES
4 MODIFICAR CONTADORES
5 INGRESOS EFECTIVOS
6 DESCARGAS DE SOBRES INGRESADOS
3 FUNCIONES SUPERVISOR
1 CAMBIAR FECHA Y HORA

2 CAMBIAR DENOMINACIÓN MONEDA
5 CAMBIAR DATOS CAJERO
7 SELECCIÓN IDIOMA
9 FUNCIONES DE SEGURIDAD
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
1 FUNCIÓN DE INFORMACIÓN DE ESTADO

2 FUNCIÓN OPERADOR
3 FUNCIÓN SUPERVISOR
1 FUNCIÓN DE INFORMACIÓN DE ESTADO
1 SUBTOTALES
2 DENOMINACIÓN BILLETES
3 VERSIÓN SOFTWARE
2 FUNCIÓN OPERADOR
*Cuando se entra en este menú el usuario tiene que poner el interruptor en
modo supervisor*
1 CONTROL DE UNIDADES
* Indica todas las unidades en ON u OFF. Validaremos la unidad a ON con 50
Y ENTER*
2 BALANCE CONTABLE *
3 CONTABILIDAD INGRESOS CON EFECTIVO: Si nos da UNIDAD
CORRECTA O.K. PERO SI NOS DA DESCUADRE=RECUPERAR UNIDAD y
paremos por (1 CONTROL DE UNIDADES) para activar el CCDM*
4 CARGA DE BILLETES *
5 METODO DE ENTREGA DE BILLETES *
6 CAMBIO DE DENOMINACIÓN *
7 APAGADO CONTROLADO * No realizaremos esta operación. La aplicación
se queda colgada.*
3 FUNCIÓN SUPERVISOR
1 INICIALIZACIÓN *
2 FUNCIONES CONFIGURACIONES *
3 FUNCIONES SEGURIDAD *
4 MANEJO FICHEROS *
5 VISUALIZAR BANDA MAGNÉTICA *
6 CONTROL UNIDADES
7 CARGA DE BILLETES *
8 VER DIARIO ELECTRÓNICO *
9 BORRAR MOVIMIENTOS PENDIENTES *
* TODAS ESTAS OPCIONES LAS REALIZAN DESDE SUS TERMINALES
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
1- VER. SOFTWARE
2- ID CAJERO
3- CLAVES
4- COMUNICACIONES
5- EFECTIVO
6- TOTALES : 6 INI. INGRESADOR COD 14 AL SACAR CAJETINES
INICIAR INGRESADOR
7- C. CONTADOR
8- CARGA DATOS
9- IMP. CABECERA
10- PERIFERICOS
11- REINICIAR
12- CONTADORES
13- CAMBIO DE PANTALLA
14- TARJETAS-LIBRETAS
15- DIARIO ELECTRÓNICO
16- VOLUMEN
17- DESCUADRE
18- MÁS OPCIONES
10- PERIFERICOS
1- CONSULTA DE ESTADO * VEMOS EL ESTADO DE LOS DTVOS*

2- CONFIGURACIÓN
3- ACTIVAR DISPENSADOR
4- RESET DISPOSITIVOS:
1-LECTOR DE TARJETAS:----- 1 TARJETAS
2 COD. DE BARRAS
2-IMPRESORAS: ---------------- 1 IMP. DIARIO
2 IMP. RECIBOS
3 IMP. LIBRETAS
3-SENSORES: ----------------------1-GENERALES
2-BEEPER
4-DISPENSADORES:------------- 1-BILLETES
2-SOBRES
5-OTROS: --------------------------- 1-PANEL TRASERO
2-ENCRIPTADOR
3-INGRESADOR DE BILLETES
*CCDM OJO MENU PRINCIPAL*
5- DIAGNOSTICOS * NO FUNCIONA*
11- REINICIAR
1-REINICIAR CAJERO
2-APAGAR CAJERO
18- MÁS OPCIONES

4- FICHERO OFF
6- CAMBIO DE IDIOMAS
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
1- FUNCIONES INFORMACIÓN ESTADO

2- FUNCIONES DEL OPERADOR
3- FUNCIONES DEL SUPERVISOR
4- IPL
6- FUNCIONES ESPECIALES
7- LIBERAR TERMINAL
1- FUNCIONES INFORMACIÓN ESTADO

1-SUBTOTALES
2-CONSULTA DENOMINACIONES
3-CONSULTA DATOS HOST
4- CONSULTA VERSION APLICACIÓN
5-CAMBIO DENOMINACIÓN
2- FUNCIONES DEL OPERADOR
1- CONTROL DE LAS UNIDADES:
1- LECTOR DE TARJETAS
2- IMPRESORA DE LIBRETAS
3- DISPENSADOR
4- CAJETIN DE 10 €
7- CAJETIN DE 100€
8- DISPENSADOR DE SOBRES
9- IMPRESORA DE RECIBOS
10- PIN PAD
11- SCANER
*LOS DISPOSITIVOS QUE ESTEN OFF LINE SE VALIDAN EL Nº Y 0
VALIDAR*
2- BALANCE CONTABLE
3- CARGA CAJETINES
4- METODO ENTREGA DINERO
5- CAMBIO DENOMINACIÓN
1- FUNCIONES DEL SUPERVISOR
1- CAMBIO FECHA/HORA
2- FUNCIONES DE SEGURIODAD
3- CAMBIO CONFIGURACIÓN COMUNICACIONES
5- VER DIARIO ELETRÓNICO
6- COPIA DIARIO ELECTRÓNICO
7- CAMBIO ESTADO CAJERO ON
8- CONTROL DE VERSIONES
9- CONFIGURACIÓN TERMINAL
10- CAMBIO IDIOMA DEFECTO
6- FUNCIONES ESPECIALES
1- CONFIGURACIÓN DATOS ESPECIALES
5- CONFIGURACIÓN RIESGO TERMINAL
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
0- CAMBIO PANTALLA / TECLADO

1- DIAGNÓSTICOS NO FUNCIONA SE QUEDA EL CAJERO BLOQUEADO
2- PARAR APLICACIÓN
3. MENÚ OPERADOR
3- MENÚ OPERADOR
1-DATOS ENTIDAD
2-DATOS CONEXIÓN: 1-VER CONFIGURACIÓN
2- CONFIGURAR ENTIDAD
3- CONFIGURAR SUCURSAL
4- CONFIGURACIÓN CAJERO
5- BORRADO DE CLAVES
6- PETICIÓN CLAVES HOST
7- INTRODUCIR CLAVES POR TECLADO
8- MENÚ ANTERIOR
3- DATOS TÉCNICOS: 1- IDENTIFICACIÓN VERSIÓN

3- POWER ON SAM
4- POWER OFF SAM
5- MENÚ ANTERIOR
4-FUNCIONES CONTABLES
5-FUNCIONES OPERATIVAS
6-INCLUSIÓN DE PANTALLAS
7-MENÚ ANTERIOR
4- FUNCIONES CONTABLES
5- FUNCIONES OPERATIVOS
1- FECHA/HORA
2- LISTAR TARJETAS
3- REACTIVAR INTENTOS PIN
4- SINCRONISMO
5- ACTIVAR / DESACTIVAR / TRAZAS
6- MENÚ ANTERIOR
6- INCLUSIÓN DE PANTALLAS
7- MENÚ ANNTERIOR
2150xe USB
MENÚ PRINCIPAL CLAVE SUPERVISOR ES 8822

1- CAMBIO DE PANTALLA
2 -DATOS DE IDENTIDAD
3 -DATOS TÉCNICO
4 –DIAGNÓSTICOS NO FUNCIONA SE QUEDA EL CAJERO BLOQUEADO
5 -FUNCIONES CONTABLES
6 -FUNCIONES OPERATIVAS
7 -RESET ORDENADO
8 -DIARIO ELECTRÓNICO
3 -DATOS TÉCNICOS
1- IDENTIFICACIÓN CAJERO
2- ESTADO DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
3- TEST DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
5- DATOS CONFIGURACIÓN EMV
6- DESHABILITAR SENSOR LECTOR
9- SALIR
1.- CONFIGURACIÓN DEL CAJERO
1.- DATOS DEL CAJERO

1. Nº DE ENTIDAD
2. Nº DE OFICINA
3. Nº DE SERIE DEL LECTOR
4. Nº DE CAJERO
5. Nº DE ENTIDAD RSI
6. LISTAR VALORES
9. SALIR
2.- DATOS DE COMUNICACIONES

1. DIRECCIÓN IP
2. MÁSCARA DE SUBRED
3. GATEWAY
4. LISTAR VALORES
9. SALIR
3.- CLAVES
1. 1ª PARTE DE LAS CLAVES
2. PARTE FINAL DE LAS CLAVES
3. ACTIVAR CLAVES
9. SALIR
4.- ACTIVAR VALENCIANO
5.- FECHA/HORA
6.- DISPOSITIVOS (HABILITAMOS/ DESHABILITAMOS)

1. PANEL DE OPERADOR
2. IMPRESORA DE DIARIO
3. MÓDULO DE DEPÓSITOS
4. DISPENSADOR DE SOBRES
5. IMPRESORA DE LIBRETAS
6. SAM
7. LISTAR
9. SALIR
7.- DATOS DE CONTROL DE RED
1.- Nº DE SERIE
2.- MODELO
9.- SALIR
9.- SALIR
2.- CAMBIO DE PANTALLA.

CUANDO EL MENU DE SUPERVISOR SALE POR LA PANTALLA DEL
CLIENTE , ESTA OPCION ESTA DENTRO CONFIGURACION DEL CAJERO
3.- MANTENIMIENTO DEL CAJERO

1.- LISTADO DE TOTALES
3.- CARGA DE BILLETES
4- CIERRE CONTABLE
5.- TEST DE DISPENSADOR
6.- CIERRE AUTOMÁTICO
7.- CIERRE PENDIENTE
9.- SALIR
4.- FICHEROS
1.- FICHERO DE BINES
1. COPIAR FICHERO
2. RECUPERAR FICHERO
3. CONSULTAR FICHERO
9. SALIR
2.- FICHERO DE OPERACIONES PENDIENTES
3.- DIARIO ELECTRÓNICO
9.- SALIR
5.- ESTADO DEL CAJERO

1.- ESTADO DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS
2.- DIAGNÓSTICOS (NO FUNCIONA)
3.- TEST DE DISPOSITIVOS
1.- TEST IMPRESORA DE RECIBO
2.- TEST LECTOR DE TARJETA CHIP
3- TEST IMPRESORA DE DIARIO
4.- TEST LECTOR SAM
5.- TEST DISPENSADOR
9 - SALIR
4.- BORRAR CONTADORES
5.- LIMPIAR ERRORES
8.- SALIR
6.- OPERACIONES TARJETA/LIBRETA
7.- RESETEAR
Menú Principal
Terminal:xxxx ‘btactil’
Tec:Z
Versión: 01540 C.P.: xxxxx
1.- Interventor
2.- Supervisor
3.- Cambiar Panel
4.- Utilidades del Cajero
5.- Estado del Cajero
6.- Reiniciar Cajero
Claves de Acceso
Interventor: 1111
Supervisor: 1234
1.- MENÚ INTERVENTOR
1.- Listar totales

1.- Cajero
2.- Ingresador
2.- Mantenimiento
1.- Añadir Billetes (función contable con caja reserva)
2.- Quitar Billetes (función contable con caja reserva)
3.- Iniciar Billetes (función no contable, solo inicia contadores)
3.- Entrega de Billetes

4.- Diario Electrónico
5.- Cambio de Clave
2- MENÚ DE SUPERVISOR
1.- Clave Maestra

2.- Asignar clave de acceso
3.- Identificar ATM
1.- Cambiar cajero

2.- Cambiar oficina
3.- Cambiar modelo ATM
4.- Cambiar Entorno Cajero
5.- Param. Red Cajero
6.- Param. Red Host
7.- Param. Red Host Contingencia
8.- Aceptar Cambios
4.- Modulo SAM
5.- Subtotales
6.- Menú Scanner
7.- Orientación Recibo
8.- Carga de Versiones
5-MENÚ ESTADO DEL CAJERO
1.- Estado de las Unidades1-
Cajero: Cajero en servicio

Lector Tarj: ok
Libretas: ok
Dispensador Efectivo: ok
Depósitos: error
Escáner: ok
Imp. Recibos: ok
Cifrador: ok
Comunicaciones: Online
Continuar para consumibles
Cajetin 50: ok
Cajetin 20: ok
Cajetin 10: ok
Cajetin 5: vacío
Sobres: no existe
Papel recibos: ok
2.- Recuperar Dispositivos
3.- Activar Dispositivos
4.- Desactivar Dispositivos
Al abrir puerta, Password de Supervisor 6656, y si nos aparece el siguiente
menú:
Menú Página 2
1 Cargar efectivo
2 Reponer consumibles
3 Atasco libretas/tarjetas
4 Atasco billetes
5 Avería técnica
6 Otros
7 Carga de claves
8 Baja/retirada de cajero
9 Reset askim (cuando está instalado, no tiene función real)
Seleccionar el correspondiente a nuestra visita, por avería normalmente 5 ó 6,

nos pasará al Menú principal.
Menú principal
1 Cajetines
1 Modificar contenido
2 Manipular cajetines
3 Listar contenido
4 Salir-atrás
2 Apagar cajero
3 Actualización
4 Paso a pantalla. Muestra menú en pantalla exterior
5 Salir cajero-servicio
6 Cambiar idioma
7 Cierre
8 Tratamiento claves
Paswword 2138
Ahora debemos insertar claves
9 Ingresos
1 Listar contenidos
2 Listar estados
1 Listado cajetines
2 Listado dispositivos
3 atrás
3 Vaciar ingresos
4 Vaciar rechazos
5 Recuperar ingresador
6 Recuperar cajetines
7 Salir
Menú Tratamiento de Claves
Paswword 2138
Ahora debemos insertar claves

10.- MENÚ SUPERVISOR I
20.- MENÚ SUPERVISOR II
30.- MENÚ TECNICO I
40.- MENÚ TECNICO II
01.- MENÚ SUPERVISOR GENERAL (vuelve al menú principal)

11.- MENÚ TRATAMIENTO BILLETES
1.- INICIALIZAR
2.- SUMAR BILLETES
3.- QUITAR BILLETES
4.- TERMINAR (vuelve atrás)
12.- MENÚ IMPRESORAS (realiza los tests de las impresoras)
1.- IMPRESORA RECIBOS
2.- IMPRESORA TICKETS
3.- IMPRESORA DOCUMENTOS
4.- IMPRESORA SOBRES
5.- IMPRESORA DIARIO
6.- IMPRESORA LIBRETAS
7.- IMPRIMIR CERTIFICADO
8.- TERMINAR
13.- LISTAR TOTALES (muestra los totales de todas las operaciones del cajero
en la impresora de diario y después pregunta si se quiere también por la de recibos)
14.- BORRADO DE ERRORES (comprueba y hace test de todos los
dispositivos de una sola vez)
15.- LISTAR ESTADO DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS (los muestra por la OPL en 2
paginas y se puede imprimir)
16.- PRUEBA DISPENSADOR (manda un billete de cada cajetín a rechazos)
21.- RESET ORDENADO
22.- BLOQUEO / DESBLOQUEO
23.- CONSULTAR DATOS TARJETA (lee las bandas e imprime los datos de
las pistas por la impresora de recibos)
24.- CONSULTAR DATOS LIBRETA (lee las bandas e imprime los datos de
las pistas por la impresora de recibos)
25.- CAMBIAR DISPLAY
26.- TRATAMIENTO VERSIONES (muestra la versión de la aplicación del
cajero)

31.- BORRAR CORRECTORA
33.- CAMBIO FECHA Y HORA
34.- CONFIGURAR TERMINAL
1.- CAMBIAR ENTIDAD
2.- CAMBIAR OFICINA
3.- CAMBIAR CAJERO
4.- CAMBIAR NUMERO SERIE
5.- TERMINAR
35.- MENÚ MONEDERO
1.- HABILITAR LECTOR
2.- CONECTAR CHIP
3.- DESCONECTAR CHIP
4.- EXPULSAR TARJETA
5.- TERMINAR
36.- MENÚ ESCANER
1.- CONFIGURAR ESCANER
2.- INICIAR ESCANER
3.- PUERTO SERIE CONFIG.
4.- CONFIGURAR P. SERIE
5.- TEST ESCANER
6.- TERMINAR
37.- SELECCIONAR IMPRESORA
1.- 80 CARACTERES POR LINEA
2.- 40 CARACTERES POR LINEA
3.- 40 Y 80 COLUMNAS
4.- AUTOCHEQUEO
41.- CONFIGURAR TECLADO
42.- CARGAR CLAVES
44.- DIAGNOSTICOS
45.- MENÚ OFF
46.- CONFIGURAR IMP. TICKETS
47.- TIPO ATM
48.- CONFIGURAR COMS
MENÚ PRINCIPAL
1- SERVICIO TECNICO.
2- MANTENIMIENTO.
3- CONSULTAS.
1- SERVICIO TECNICO
1 Subtotales
3 Conf. comunicaciones cajero
4 Gestión BDU
4.1 Denominación Cajetines
4.2 Tipo de Dispensación
5 Gestión BRU *SÓLO ESTAN DISPONIBLE EN FUJITSU*

5.1 Visualización DDB
5.2 Actualización fw BRU
6 Configuración Aplicación
6.2 Cajero / Entradas
6.3 Idioma Cliente
6.4 Idioma Supervisor
7 Diagnóstico
7.1 Diagnósticos *SÓLO ESTAN DISPONIBLE EN NCR*
7.2 Gestión D.E.
7.3 Extracción D.E.
7.5 Manejo de Trazas
7.6 Diagnósticos rápidos *SÓLO ESTAN DISPONIBLE EN NCR*
8 Control Presencia Unidades
9 Cambio Estado Unidades

10 Reinstalar aplicación
11 Gestión de incidencias
12 Cambio de configuración del pinpad *SÓLO ESTAN DISPONIBLE EN
FUJITSU*
2. MANTENIMIENTO
1 Subtotales
2 Descarga Billetes BRU
3 Fichero Ingresos en Efectivo *SÓLO ESTAN DISPONIBLE EN FUJITSU*

3.1 Ver todo el fichero
3.2 Ver billetes con incidencias
3.3 Ver billetes de una cuenta
3.4 Ver billetes de una operación
4 Actualización de Cajetines
4.1 Añadir Billetes
4.2 Retirar Billetes
4.3 Carga de Billetes
5 Estado de Cajero
6 Borrado imágenes publicidad
7 Opciones Diario Electrónico

7.1 Gestión D.E.
7.2 Copia D.E.
8 Aplicación cajero/recogida entradas

20 Test de Dispositivos
21 Idioma del Cliente
22 Verificación de unidades
OCULTAS
11 Borrar fichero OFF-line

12 Borrar Fichero USOS
52 Datos Config Cajero
69 Opción Real / Pruebas
81 Copia fichero Off-line
82 Copia contenido off-line en formato texto
83 Recuperación de claves
84 Borrar Fichero TRANSPORTES
85 Copia diarios electr. en formato texto
3. CONSULTAS
1 Subtotales
2 Denominación Cajetines
4 Ver Configuración Comunicaciones
OCULTAS
13 Ver Fichero TRANSPORTES
Acrónimos de las unidades:

PPR: Pasbook Printer: unidad de libretas.
CRW: Card Reader Writer: unidad de tarjetas.
RPR: Receipt Printer: unidad de recibos.
RP1: Receipt Printer 1: rollo superior, en los cajeros con dos rollos en su unidad de
recibos.
RP1: Receipt Printer 2: rollo inferior, en los cajeros con dos rollos en su unidad de
recibos.
SAM: Security Access Module: lector de tarjeta de seguridad para monedero
electrónico.
EDU: Envelope Depository Unit: unidad de ingresos en sobre.
BRU: Bill Recognizer Unit: unidad de ingresos en efectivo.
BDU: Bill Dispenser Unit: unidad de dispensación de billetes.
CJ1: Cajetín superior de la unidad de reintegros
CJ2: Cajetín medio de la unidad de reintegros
CJ3: Cajetín inferior de la unidad de reintegros

Manual Basico de Cajeros PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Manual Basico de Cajeros PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CÓDIGOS FALLO DENTRO DE PRODUCTO

CÓDIGO FALLO FUERA DEL PRODUCTO

CÓDIGOS FALLO DENTRO DE PRODUCTO

CÓDIGO FALLO FUERA DEL PRODUCTO

CAMBIAR CODIGO MAESTRO

1º- DESACTIVACION DEL TOR (CONSOLA) DESDE EL CAJERO:

2º- ACTIVAREMOS EL TOR (CONSOLA) DESDE EL CAJERO GIRANDO EL POMO Y

CAMBIAR CODIGO MAESTRO

La cerradura debe estar siempre abierta.

EL SINTOMA DE CAMBIO DE PILAS ES EL MISMO QUE EN 4B? Si

PONER EL CIERRE AUTOMATICO

3 * código maestro * tiempo *

***RETIRAR LAS PILAS VIEJAS EN EL MOMENTO DEL CAMBIO***

Durante el cambio de pilas no se perderán ni los códigos ni la configuración del programa.

DURACION DE TEMPORIZACION O PROGRAMACION DEL RETARDO

****PUERTA ABIERTA Y CERRAR PESTILLERIA*****

Si el parámetro de temporización ya se configuró y desea modificarlo, ingrese un código de

Por ejemplo, para configurar la temporización de 15 minutos, ingrese:

CAMBIO DE CODIGO MAESTRO

****PUERTA ABIERTA Y CERRAR PESTILLERIA*****

Por ejemplo, para cambiar el Código Maestro preconfigurado de fábrica a 654321:

* Código incorrecto ingresado

* Código ingresado durante el periodo de sanción por error

* Código de usuario integrado para comenzar temporización

* Cuenta regresiva de temporización

* Señal de expiración de temporización

* Señal de ventana de apertura

* Advertencia de pilas bajas

* Indicador de extensión de cerrojo

* Señal de forzado del teclado (opcional)

* Fin de descarga de seguimiento de auditoría

* Habilitar candado (Modo Control/Empleado)

* Deshabilitar candado (Modo Control/Empleado)

1) La Consola y la Cerradura deberán de estar conectadas entre si permanentemente,

PROCESO DE APERTURA PARA INSTALADORES,

1) El SPIDER PRO deberá de estar conectado a la red de 220 V.

1) Pulsar √ (En el visor aparece: CERRANDO…. PROBAR APERTURA?)

_-.-- ,?,91119911131I:-6 I 2 3 4 s 6 ,*.p"rroquésrs. qur€6abrirár6j¿o $

'1.7 AoertuE éon ÉlaRto.

2. rcambio del código |1|aestro.

I Cúdo s pr@dA a (mbir códisos,y pon

3. Programac¡ón del retardo

É reta¡no6 @nf¡guBhsdé 1 5 99min|nc, siendo1 mh,noet E|ardomi.itu.

z4t a-: - - --l#¡r¡rr00#r¡¡ [-_I#rx [__l#¡¡,

{¡¡ !ii s¿ i¡Hd .¡Ú o nodo de Prcs'moon s o lvuBv

se übró abrnl¡ emdú 6n u códi@irodo

rs - se rÉbj ql cudo. rom.@ h ' m@ de¡

I t E^-ñ;-"p.'ru U;;" .r s!.nrq dddiri rr

a.,e n/.'ttz et ?es¡-tua ve¿¿!¡r, ¿lr1 A atwn' 6n-l-1'

Procedimiento de Apertura en la fase de Instalación

• Utilizando la clave de Pruebas.

1. Pulse √ , en el visor aparece: CERRANDO ……PROBAR APERTURA?

1) La Consola y la Cerradura deberán de estar conectadas entre si permanentemente,

PROCESO DE APERTURA PARA INSTALADORES,

1) El SPIDER PRO deberá de estar conectado a la red de 220 V.

1) Pulsar 9 (En el visor aparece: CERRANDO…. PROBAR APERTURA?)

código 13 - Password 1357

CÓDIGOS DE RESOLUCION DE AVERIA

Valor Descripción Explicación

7 Reparar vandalismo Para averías abiertas por acto vandálico en general

CÓDIGOS DE PRESENCIA DE TECNICO

Valor Descripción Explicación

El fichero Diario Electrónico se genera al detectarse cualquier problema en la impresora

RETIRAR LAS PILAS VIEJAS EN EL MOMENTO DEL CAMBIO

PUERTA ABIERTA Y CERRAR PESTILLERIA*

PUERTA ABIERTA Y CERRAR PESTILLERIA*

C:\D_E\99\cd 11\del .